TENDER Window & Door Hardware Replacement, Exterior ... · Window & Door Hardware Replacement, Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Northern S. S. – Sturgeon Falls, ON The Near

Our mission is to educate learners to their fullest potential in preparation for life-long learning.

TENDER Window & Door Hardware Replacement,

Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Northern S. S. – Sturgeon Falls, ON

The Near North District School Board invites qualified vendors to submit tenders for the above project.

Documents may be downloaded from this site with the vendor having the sole responsibility to register their intention to bid as stated. Any difficulty downloading tender documents, or questions as to how to obtain tender documents, contact the Purchasing Department, Near North District School Board, 963 Airport Road, North Bay, Ontario. Phone: 705-472-8170 or 1-800-278-4922. Complete proposal signed under seal, executed, and dated together submitted in sealed, opaque envelopes, clearly marked, “Tender – Window & Door Hardware Replacement, Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades “, will be received until 2:00:00 p.m., local time, March 27, 2018 at the address below.

PLEASE DELIVER DIRECTLY TO “PURCHASING DEPARTMENT”

Near North District School Board

963 Airport Road North Bay, ON P1C 1A5

Phone: 705-472-8170 / 1-800-278-4922

NOTE: The Board Office will be closed between 12:00 p.m. and 1:00 p.m. Do not deliver Tenders during that time. Tender forms submitted on or after 2:00:01 p.m. on the date noted above will be returned to the Bidder unopened. Please Note: All tender submissions will be opened publicly, shortly after the time of closing, on the day of closing and at the offices of the Near North District School Board, North Bay. The lowest or any proposal not necessarily accepted. The Near North District School Board is committed to supporting an inclusive and accessible environment. Please ask us how we may help you by contacting us at [email protected] David Thompson, Jackie Young, Chairperson Director of Education

mailto:[email protected]


Near North District School Board

TENDER Window & Door Hardware Replacement,

Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Northern S. S. – Sturgeon Falls, ON

A copy of this document may be downloaded. This document may be viewed only at the

Purchasing Department at the Near North District School Board, 963 Airport Road, North

Bay, ON or by contacting Charlotte Land, Supervisor of Purchasing at 705-472-8170 or 1-800-

278-4922, extension 5025. It is the sole responsibility of the interested vendor to forward by fax

705-472-9927 their intention to bid including their contact information on the following

Registration Form to the Purchasing Department, Near North District School Board Office,

North Bay.

No addenda or additional information will be forwarded to vendors/sub-trades

who are not registered.

NOTE: You will find the Education Act and the Map with our schools on our website just

above the Tenders.

NOTE: The Board Office will be closed between 12:00 p.m. and 1:00 p.m. Do not deliver Tenders during that time.

“VENDORS BIDDING ON PROJECTS WITH THE NEAR NORTH SCHOOL BOARD AGREE TO BE PAID BY ELECTRONIC FUNDS TRANSFER (EFT/DIRECT DEPOSIT) SHOULD THEY BE THE SUCCESSFUL BIDDER.”


REGISTRATION FORM

TENDER

Window & Door Hardware Replacement,

Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades

Northern S. S. – Sturgeon Falls, ON

If you intend to submit a proposal, it is in your best interest to submit this registration form by fax. No addenda or further information will be available to bidders who have not registered. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to register their intent in a timely fashion prior to last date for questions to be able to receive addenda. It is also the responsibility of the bidder to confirm receipt of this registration form by the Purchasing Department. NOTE: The Board Office

will be closed between 12:00 p.m. and 1:00 p.m. Do not deliver Tenders during that time.

Phone: 705-472-8170, Ext. 5025 or Ext. 5037 Fax back to: Purchasing Department – 705-472-9927

Name of Vendor

Street Address City Postal Code

Representative or Contact Person

Telephone fax e-mail address

I am a: General Contractor Sub-Contractor

PROJECT MANUAL ¯ VOLUME: 1 of 1 CONTENT: Specification DIVISIONS: 00 to 48 PROJECT NO: 217073

Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Northern Secondary School Near North District School Board 175 Ethel Street, Sturgeon Falls, Ontario

TO C TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page 1

Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Northern Secondary School Near North District School Board

217073

February 2018

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTIONS PAGES DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 00 01 06 - CONSULTANTS 1 SECTION 00 01 07 - PROFESSIONAL SIGNATURES AND SEALS 1 SECTION 00 11 11 - LIST OF DRAWINGS 1 SECTION 00 21 12 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 8 SECTION 00 31 21 - ASBESTOS SURVEY 1 NNDSB ASBESTOS SURVEY – NORTHERN SECONDARY SCHOOL 205 SECTION 00 41 10 - SAMPLE TENDER FORM 1 SECTION 00 41 12.02 - TENDER FORM 4 SECTION 00 52 13 - CONTRACT FORM 1 SECTION 00 56 13 - SUPPLEMENTARY DEFINITIONS 3 SECTION 00 73 01 - SUPPLEMENTARY ARTICLES OF AGREEMENT 1 SECTION 00 73 02 - SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS 14

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 00 01.01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - NNDSB 9 SAMPLE HOT WORK PERMIT 4 SECTION 01 30 10 - ALTERATION PROCEDURES 4

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

NOT APPLICABLE


Page 2


217073

February 2018

DIVISION 05 - METALS

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

SECTION 06 10 13 - WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 2 SECTION 06 20 00 - FINISH CARPENTRY 4

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

SECTION 07 27 00 - AIR BARRIERS 4 SECTION 07 46 16 - PREFORMED METAL SIDING 3 SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 3 SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS 4

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

SECTION 08 11 13 - STANDARD METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 7 SECTION 08 14 16 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS 4 SECTION 08 41 13 - ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 5 SECTION 08 51 13 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS 8 SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE 3 SECTION 08 80 50 - GLASS AND GLAZING 5

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

SECTION 09 03 95 - TERRAZZO RESTORATION 3 SECTION 09 21 16 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 6 SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING 8 SECTION 09 30 00 - TILING 5 SECTION 09 51 13 - ACOUSTIC PANEL CEILINGS 5 SECTION 09 66 13 - PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO FLOORING 3 SECTION 09 91 10 - PAINTING 10


Page 3


217073

February 2018

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

SECTION 10 21 14 - METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 3 SECTION 10 26 13 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 2 SECTION 10 28 14 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 4

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15010 - MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 8 SECTION 15130 - THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES 3 SECTION 15140 - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 4 SECTION 15190 - IDENTIFICATION 5 SECTION 15260 - THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING 3 SECTION 15412 - DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY PIPING: COPPER 3 SECTION 15413 - DRAINAGE WASTE AND VENT PIPING - CAST IRON AND COPPER 2 SECTION 15414 - DRAINAGE WASTE AND VENT PIPING: PLASTIC 1 SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 3 SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 3 SECTION 15516 - FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS, ANCHORS, JOINTS AND GUIDES 2 SECTION 15860 - COMMERCIAL FANS 3 SECTION 15891 - DUCTWORK, METALLIC, LOW PRESSURE - TO 500 PA 4 SECTION 15893 - FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK 2


Page 4


217073

February 2018

SECTION 15911 - DUCT ACCESSORIES 4 SECTION 15912 - DAMPERS - BALANCING 2 SECTION 15914 - DAMPERS - FIRE AND SMOKE 3 SECTION 15942 - GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS 3 SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB) 5

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16010 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 9 SECTION 16111 - CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT FITTINGS 3 SECTION 16122 - WIRES AND CABLES 0 - 1000 V 3 SECTION 16131 - SPLITTERS, JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS 2 SECTION 16132 - OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS 2 SECTION 16141 - WIRING DEVICES 3 SECTION 16151 - WIRE AND BOX CONNECTIONS 0 - 1000 V 2 SECTION 16191 - FASTENINGS AND SUPPORTS 2 SECTION 16440 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES - FUSED AND NON-FUSED UP TO 1000 V 2 SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING - SECONDARY 2 SECTION 16505 - LIGHTING EQUIPMENT 4 SECTION 16536 - UNIT EQUIPMENT FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING 3 SECTION 16721 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 6

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING(HVAC)

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 25 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION

NOT APPLICABLE


Page 5


217073

February 2018

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 35 - WATERWAY AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 40 - PROCESS INTEGRATION

NOT APPLICABLE


Page 6


217073

February 2018

DIVISION 41 - MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 42 - PROCESS HEATING, COOLING, AND DRYING EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 43 - PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 44 - POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 45 - INDUSTRY-SPECIFIC MANUFACTURING EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 46 - WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 48 - ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION

NOT APPLICABLE

00 01 06 CONSULTANTS

Page 1


217073

February 2018

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 CONSULTANTS .1 The following are the consultants who have prepared these Contract Documents:

.1 Prime Consultant (Architect): Mitchell Jensen Architects Inc.

124a Main Street East North Bay, Ontario P1B 1A8 Phone: (705) 474 3250 FAX: (705) 474 0737

.2 Structural Engineer: A2S Associates Limited 289 Cedar Street Suite 201 Sudbury, Ontario P3B 1M8 Phone: (705) 222 0420

.3 Mechanical Engineer: Piotrowski Consultants Ltd 1820 Bond St North Bay, Ontario P1B 4V6 Phone: (705) 472-2536 FAX: (705) 476-5105

END OF SECTION

2018.03.02

00 11 11 LIST OF DRAWINGS

Page 1


217073

February 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 LIST OF DRAWINGS .1 The Bidder is responsible for reviewing the documents received and ensuring that all documents are

complete. .2 The following is a list of all drawings issued for Tender: .3 Drawings:

Drawing No. Title ARCHITECTUR A1.0 Main Floor Key Plan, General Notes A2.0 2nd Floor Key Plan and Main Floor Ceiling / Piping Plan A3.0 Enlarged Washroom Plans A4.0 Enlarged Washroom Plans A5.0 Washroom Elevations, Door Elevations A6.0 Window Elevations A7.0 Window Elevations & Details A8.0 Details A9.0 Main Floor Door Schedule A10.0 Main Floor & 2nd Floor Door Schedule A11.0 Exterior Gym Wall Repair Plan STRUCTURAL S1.0 General Notes and Typical Details S1.1 Structural Plans and Details MECHANICAL M101 Mechanical Plumbing Floor Plan M102 Mechanical Plumbing Floor Plan M103 Mechanical Plumbing and HVAC Washroom Floor Plans M104 Mechanical Plumbing and HVAC Partial Floor Plans ELECTRICAL E101 Electrical Power and Lighting washroom Floor Plans

END OF SECTION

00 21 12 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

Page 1


217073

February 2018

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 INTENT OF TENDER .1 The intent of this invitation is to obtain offers from General Contractors for window and

door/hardware replacement, installation of new exterior wall cladding and washroom renovations/upgrades at Northern Secondary School located at 175 Ethel Street, Sturgeon Falls, Ontario

.2 Throughout the contract documents, the "Owner" shall mean "Near North District School Board”.

1.2 PURPOSE OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS .1 The Instructions to Bidders define the terms of agreement between the Owner and Bidders relative to

the process of tendering, tender evaluation and potential acceptance of an offer received. .2 Submitting a tender constitutes acceptance by the Bidder of the terms of agreement defined herein. .3 The Owner accepts no obligations to Bidders unless explicitly stated herein. .4 The Owner is interested in receiving an offer which is designed to provide a high quality of

construction, an efficient and non-adversarial construction process, and a reasonable price, and it will consider criteria other than price in determining which if any tender to accept.

.5 The Owner encourages all bidders to consider the use of local resources and trades to perform the work when possible.

1.3 TENDER SUBMISSIONS .1 Tender Form - Submit in a sealed envelope, clearly marked “Tender Form – Window &

Door/Hardware Replacement, Exterior Cladding and Washroom Upgrades - Northern S.S. will be received until 14:00:00 local time March 27th, 2018 by the Purchasing Department of the Near North District School Board located at 963 Airport Road, North Bay, ON, include:

.1 Complete Tender Form, signed and sealed; and

.2 Bid Bond; and

.3 Consent of Surety; and

.4 Proof of Insurance as noted in Article 1.22 of this Section; and

.5 WSIB Certificate of good standing as noted in Article 1.23 of this Section. .2 Tender Forms submitted at or after 14:00:01, on the date noted above, will be returned to the Bidder

unopened. .3 All Tender Forms will be opened publicly at the location of closing shortly after closing on the day of

closing and at the offices of the Near North District School Board. .4 Tenders may not be submitted nor revised by telephone, or Facsimile Transmissions. .5 Tenders must be submitted on the Tender Form issued with Tender Documents. .6 All blanks on Tender Form must be filled in. .7 Tenders shall not be qualified by any condition without express written consent of the Consultant prior

to submission of Tender. .8 All requirements of the Tender Form must be completed. .9 Tender Form shall be submitted sealed in opaque envelopes clearly identified with Bidders Name,

Project Name and Owners name on the outside. .10 Bidders shall be solely responsible for the delivery of Tender in the manner and time prescribed. .11 Bidders shall be solely responsible for verifying they have received all of the Addenda issued.


Page 2


217073

February 2018

.12 Submit proof of insurance coverage (refer to 1.22 this Section) and WSIB Certificate of Good Standing (refer to 1.23 this Section) with the Tender Form.

1.4 TENDERING COSTS .1 All costs associated with the preparation and delivery of a tender shall be paid by the Bidder. .2 The Owner is not responsible for compensation of tendering costs under any circumstances.

1.5 DEFINITIONS .1 Owner: Near North District School Board. .2 Tender Documents: Documents listed in Table of Contents, and addenda issued by the Consultant

during the tender period. .3 Addendum/Addenda: Supplementary information, clarification or amendments to the tender

documents, issued by the Consultant during the tender period to all those who have received tender documents. Addenda will be in written and/or drawn format and each issue will be numbered and dated.

.4 Tender: An offer received by the Owner in response to this invitation, and the act of submitting an

.5 Bidder: A person, corporation, partnership, sole proprietorship or other entity which has submitted a Tender before the aforementioned deadline. The word "Tenderer" is synonymous.

.6 Tender Form: A form supplied with the Tender Documents to be completed as an offer to undertake work described by contract documents. This form identifies primarily Base Bid, and is signed and sealed by Tenderer.

.7 Base Bid: A stipulated sum (price) for the supply and installation of all materials and equipment specified and shown and the execution of the Work described by the tender documents.

.8 Acceptable Alternate: An alternate product, material, manufacturer, method or procedure to that specified which has been pre-approved by the Consultant and identified within the specification, and no further submission or request is required. Prices for the use of Acceptable Alternates are included in the Base Bid.

.9 Approved Alternate: An alternate product, material, manufacturer, method or procedure to that specified which has been approved by the Consultant during the tender period, and confirmation of its acceptability has been issued as an addendum. Prices for the use of approved alternates are to be included in the Base Bid.

.10 Prescribed Alternate: The specification and the Tender Form identify specific alternative products, materials, manufacturers, methods or procedures which must be priced as additions to, or deletions from, the Base Bid. Prices for the use of Prescribed Alternates are not included in Base Bid. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject Prescribed Alternates.

.11 Bidder Proposed Alternates: The Bidder may propose alternate materials, methods or sub-contractors for consideration of the Consultant and the Owner without prior approval, and include a brief description of the proposed alternate and the price to be added or deleted from the Base Bid if the Owner accepts the alternate proposed. Prices for the use of Bidder Proposed Alternates are not included in Base Bid. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject Bidder Proposed Alternates.


Page 3


217073

February 2018

.12 Acceptable Alternate Manufacturer: A manufacturer specifically named as such in the specification, which is acceptable, provided that the specific product manufactured by the alternate manufacturer is equivalent in quality, performance and operating characteristics to the specified material or product by the specified manufacturer. Products manufactured by Acceptable Alternate Manufacturers may be included in the Base, but if the product is determined to not be equivalent upon review by the Consultant, the specified product by the specified manufacturer must be provided with no change in the contract price.

.13 Take Out Price: The stipulated price of a specific area of the Work identified on the Contract Documents and included in the Base Bid, which, at the Owners discretion, may be deleted from the scope of work prior to execution of the construction contract, and the quoted price deducted from the Base Bid in determining the Contract Price.

.14 Separate Price: The stipulated price of specific areas of the Work identified on the Contract Documents, which is not included in the Base Bid, which may, at the Owner's discretion be added to the scope of work prior to the execution of the construction contract, and the quoted price added to the Base Bid Price in determining the Contract Price.

.15 Unit Price: The stipulated price of specific units of the Work identified on the Contract Documents, for which prescribed quantities are included in the Base Bid, and which, pricing shall remain in force for the duration of the Contract. Unit prices include all additional overhead and profit. No additional mark-ups are permitted for valuations submitted under this method. Unit Prices do not include the H.S.T. Valuations are based on the actual unit quantity used, and will be added or subtracted from, any prescribed quantities outlined the construction contract, at the quoted price after the total quantity has been determined and is subject to review by the Consultant and Owner.

1.6 EXAMINATION/REGISTRATION .1 Tender Documents are available for download on the Near North District School Board (NNDSB)

website for downloading and printing. www.nearnorthschools.ca. .2 Verify documents are complete; notify Consultant should documents be incomplete. .3 Examine Tender Documents for discrepancies or omissions, and notify the Consultant of discrepancies

or omissions, no fewer than five (5) calendar days prior to the date specified for closing. .4 All tender documents are complimentary and must be read together to ascertain a complete

description of the Work.

1.7 QUERIES/ADDENDA .1 Direct questions to the Near North District School Board, TEL. (705) 472-8170 or 1-800-278-4922, Ext.

#5025, FAX (705) 472-9927, attention Charlotte Land or via email to [email protected]. It is the Bidder's responsibility to ensure any emailed or faxed questions have been received by the Board.

.2 Addenda may be issued during the Tender period. All addenda become part of the Tender Documents. Include costs arising from addenda in the Base Bid.

.3 Verbal answers to inquiries and clarifications are only binding when confirmed by addenda.

.4 Clarification requests by bidders must be received not less than five (5) calendar days before date set for receipt of bids.

.5 Confirm the completeness of all addenda.

.6 Insert on the Tender Form in the space provided the number and date of all addenda received.


Page 4


217073

February 2018

1.8 PRODUCT/SYSTEM OPTIONS .1 The specification requires the use of specific products, materials, manufacturers, methods and

procedures, and may also identify Acceptable Alternates to those requirements, within the specification.

.2 Alternatives to products, materials, manufacturers, methods and procedures which are specified or Acceptable Alternates, will be considered by the Consultant upon detailed submissions received no less than ten (10) calendar days before the date specified for receipt of Tenders, and if accepted will be identified as an Approved Alternate by addendum.

.3 The Base Bid includes the use of products, materials, manufacturers, methods and procedures which are specified, or an Acceptable Alternate, or an Approved Alternate, and the Bidder may chose which to use.

.4 If an Acceptable Alternate Manufacturers is identified in the specification without specific Acceptable Alternate products, the products manufactured by the alternate manufacturer must be equivalent in quality, performance and operating characteristics to that which is specified to be acceptable for use, and such acceptability is not guaranteed by the identification of the alternate manufacturer or supplier in the specification. If the product manufactured by the alternate manufacturer is determined by the Consultant to not be equivalent, provide the specified product at no change in contract price. Bidders may submit specific product data by an Acceptable Alternate Manufacturer during the tendering period for review and if acceptable, the product will be identified as an Approved Alternate by addendum.

.5 Base Bid includes the cost of changes in the Work required to accommodate Acceptable Alternates , Approved Alternates and equivalent products by acceptable alternate suppliers.

.6 Bidder Proposed Alternates may be included in the space provided on the Tender Form without prior approval, but the price for using Bidder Proposed Alternates is not included in the Base Bid Price.

.7 Additions to, or deletions from, the Base Bid for the incorporation of Prescribed Alternates must be provided on the Tender Form.

.8 The price adjustments offered for Prescribed Alternates and Bidder Proposed Alternates include all changes to the Work required for their incorporation into the Work.

.9 The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject Bidder Proposed Alternates and Prescribed Alternates.

.10 If a Bidder Proposed Alternate or a Prescribed Alternate is accepted by the Owner, the Base Bid will be adjusted as offered in determining the Contract Price.

1.9 IDENTIFICATION .1 List on the Tender Form all subcontractors and suppliers, to be employed in the execution of this

contract for the categories of work identified, together with telephone numbers for each Sub-Contractor or supplier listed.

.2 It is suggested that the Contractor give careful consideration to the suitability of the sub-contractors listed on the Tender Form.

.3 In listing a sub-contractor on the Tender Form, it is understood that if the Owner accepts the Contractor's tender, a contract is deemed to exist between the Contractor and the named Sub-Contractor for the value of the Sub-Contractor's Tender.

.4 The Consultant may, upon acceptance by the Owner of the Contractor's tender, notify the sub-contractor's named on the Tender Form that they have been so named.


Page 5


217073

February 2018

.5 The Contractor shall employ only the subcontractors and suppliers listed in these categories. Deviation from this list must be approved in writing by the Consultant in response to a written proposal which must include an explanation and a written release of liability signed by the rejected sub-contractor, acceptable to the Consultant. In reviewing such a request, the Consultant shall be authorized to enter into discussions with both sub-contractors, to verify the reason for the requested change.

1.10 EXAMINATION OF SITE .1 Carefully examine and study all of the Contract Documents and inspect the Site of the work in order to

determine all conditions affecting the work and associated costs. .2 The act of submitting a tender is confirmation that the Bidder has visited the project site and

surrounding properties and become familiar with the place of work. .3 Visits to the site must be arranged in advance with the owner’s designee, Mr. Steve Sutton –

maintenance services supervisor, cell number 1-705-840-8210. .4 No formal site visit will be held.

1.11 TIMING OF WORK .1 Time is of the essence in this contract. .2 Commence preparations for the Work immediately following contract award. .3 Work will be required to be undertaken and completed during the summer break which

commences on July 3rd, 2018. Attain Substantial Completion of the Work no later than August 24th, 2018. Undertaking of the Work while classes are in session will not be permitted.

.4 Once the Work has commenced, work continuously towards completion. Periods of inactivity on site will not be permitted without prior consent of the Owner.

1.12 BID BOND .1 Each tender shall be submitted with a Bid Bond in the name of an approved surety, made payable to

owner in an amount not less than 10% (ten percent) of the Tender Price, as a guarantee that the Bidder will, if the tender is accepted, execute a general construction contract as specified herein and provide the specified Performance and Labour and Materials Bonds within ten (10) days of acceptance

1.13 CONSENT OF SURETY .1 Submit with the Tender Form and Bid Bond, a "Consent of Surety" stating that the named Surety will

supply the specified Performance Bond and Labour and Material Payment Bonds for this project.

1.14 PERFORMANCE BOND .1 Upon acceptance by the Owner, the successful Tenderer shall execute with an established Surety, a

Performance Bond, in an amount equal to fifty percent (50%) of the Contract Price and submit the Bond to the Owner within ten (10) days of acceptance of the tender, and prior to commencing activity on the site.


Page 6


217073

February 2018

1.15 LABOUR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND .1 Upon acceptance by the Owner, the successful Tenderer shall execute with an established Surety, a

Labour and Materials Payment Bond in the amount of fifty percent (50%) of the Contract Price, and submit the Bond to the Consultant within ten (10) days of acceptance of the tender, and prior to commencing activity on the site.

1.16 BONDING COSTS .1 Include the cost of all Bonds in the Base Bid Price.

1.17 TENDER SIGNING .1 The Tender shall be signed under seal by the Bidder. .2 Sole Proprietorship: Signature of sole proprietor in the presence of a witness who will also sign.

Insert the words "Sole proprietor" under signature. Affix seal. .3 Partnership: Signature of all partners in the presence of a witness who will also sign. Insert the

word "Partner" against each signature. Affix seal against each signature. .4 Corporation or Limited Company: Signature of duly authorized signing officers in their normal

signatures. Insert the officer's capacity in which the signing officer acts against each signature. Affix the Corporate seal. If the tender is signed by an official other than the President and Secretary of the company or the President-Secretary-Treasurer of the company, a copy of the by-law resolution of the Board of Directors authorizing them to do so must also be submitted with the tender in the tender envelope.

.5 If the bidder is a joint venture, each party to the joint venture shall execute the Tender under seal in the manner appropriate to such party.

1.18 DURATION OF OFFER .1 Tenders shall remain open to acceptance and shall be irrevocable for a period of sixty (60) days after

the Tender closing date.

1.19 TAXES .1 The Base Bid (Tender Price) excludes the Harmonized Sales Tax (HST). .2 Base Bid (Tender Price) includes all other applicable taxes, duties levies, etc.

1.20 CASH ALLOWANCES .1 Cash Allowances shall be included in the Base Bid in accordance with Part 4 of the General Conditions

of the Contract. Cash Allowances are identified in Section 01 00 01 – General Requirements.

1.21 COST BREAKDOWN .1 The Contractor shall provide a breakdown of Tender Price by building components within three (3)

days of request from Consultant.

1.22 INSURANCE .1 Submit proof with the Tender Form, that the Contractor has in place the insurance coverage required

by CCDC 2 contract.


Page 7


217073

February 2018

1.23 WORKER’S SAFETY INSURANCE BOARD .1 Submit a copy of the most current certificate of good standing from the Worker’s Safety Insurance

Board (WSIB) with the Tender Form. .2 Exemption from enrollment in the WSIB applicable to Sole Proprietorship will not be accepted. Sole

Proprietors are required to obtain the voluntary insurance coverage WSIB provides and provide proof of same.

1.24 "FORMALITY" OF TENDER .1 The Owner reserves the sole discretionary right to declare any irregular Tender to be "informal". .2 Tender Forms or enclosures that are unsigned, improperly signed or sealed, conditional, illegible,

obscure, contain arithmetical errors, erasures, alterations, or irregularities of any kind, may be declared "informal", at the Owner's sole discretion.

.3 Failure to provide a security deposit, bonding or insurance requirements may result in the tender being declared "informal".

.4 Failure to fill in all the blanks on the Tender Form, or the insertion of multiple, or otherwise non-committal or confusing entries on the Tender Form may render the Tender "informal" at the Owner's sole discretion.

.5 Any tender which the Owner deems to be "informal" may be rejected at the Owners sole discretion.

1.25 EVALUATION AND ACCEPTANCE .1 The Owner reserves the sole discretionary right to accept or reject any or all bids received. .2 The Owner will evaluate the bids received and identify the offer which represents "best value”, as

interpreted, in its own best interest, by the Owner, in its sole and absolute discretion; this may not be the lowest priced tender.

.3 In making a determination, the Owner reserves the right to objectively and reasonably consider any criterion which it considers to be relevant in its own best interest; which may include, among other criteria, consideration of past performance of the Bidder, based on the Owner’s experience and/or experience reported by individuals which have knowledge of the Bidder’s past performance.

.4 If requested by the Owner, Bidders will meet with the Owner to discuss their offer.

.5 Acceptance by the Owner will be communicated by the issuance of a letter of acceptance to the successful bidder, by the Owner or by the Consultant on behalf of the Owner.

.6 All Bidders will be notified of the acceptance or not of their tender.

.7 The Owner is not obligated to provide Bidders with details of its determination of best value.

1.26 CONTRACTOR’S HEALTH & SAFETY POLICY .1 Bidders are required to have in place a company health and safety policy. The Contractor’s health

and safety policy shall be in the form of a type written manual and shall in general, identify specific roles and responsibilities of the Contractor’s supervisors, employees and sub-trades, provide protocols for injury and accident prevention and protocols for dealing with workplace injuries.

.2 Prior to contract award, the successful Bidder will be required to submit a copy of their health and safety manual to the Owner for review and acceptance within 3 days, if requested to do so by the Consultant. Failure to provide an acceptable health and safety manual within a reasonable time period may result in the Bidder’s tender being declared informal.


Page 8


217073

February 2018

1.27 CRIMINAL BACKGROUND CHECK .1 If required by the Board, the successful Bidder covenants and agrees to assist the Board in complying

with same by providing the Board or such other entity as the Board may designate with a criminal background check covering offences under the Criminal Code, the Controlled Drugs and Substances Act and any other offences with would be revealed by a search of the automated Criminal Records Retrieval System maintained by the RCMP (“Criminal Background Check”), together with an Offence Declaration in a Board-approved form for every individual or employee of the successful Bidder who may come into direct contact with pupils on a regular basis at a school site of the Board, prior to the occurrence of such possible direct contact and on or before September 1st each year thereafter with respect to the Offence Declarations. For the purpose of this Request for Proposal/Tender/Quotation, the Board shall determine in its sole and unfettered discretion whether an individual or employee of the successful Bidder may come into direct contact with pupils on a regular basis.

.2 The successful Bidder further acknowledges and agrees that the contract between the Board and the successful Bidder to be entered into pursuant to the terms hereof shall contain provisions of indemnification and provisions allowing the Board to terminate same in the event the successful Bidder fails to provide the Board with a Criminal Background Check and an Offence Declaration for every individual or employee who may come into direct contact with pupils on a regular basis at a school site of the Board, prior to the occurrence of such possible direct contact and on or before September 1st each year thereafter with respect to the Offence Declaration.

.3 In addition, the contract will contain provisions that will allow the Board, or such other entity as the Board may designate, upon review of the Criminal Background Check provided to determine that an individual or employee will not be permitted on a school site in circumstances where direct contact with students is probable.

END OF SECTION

00 31 21 ASBESTOS SURVEY

Page 1


217073

February 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 ASBESTOS SURVEY .1 The following is the Owner’s asbestos survey report. .2 This Survey Report was prepared by its author for the Owner and is hereby offered to the bidder in

good faith for general information and guidance. The Consultant assumes no responsibility or liability for the completeness and accuracy of the information contained in this report.

.3 Include in the Base Bid Price, abatement of only those existing asbestos containing materials indicated on the drawings to be removed. If abatement of other building materials not currently indicated on the drawings is deemed necessary once the Work proceeds, it will be addressed as a change in the scope of Work.

.4 The Asbestos Survey is provided for the Contractor’s information The Contractor shall review the report and advise the Consultant in advance of any areas where they expect existing asbestos containing building materials to be disturbed as part of the Work, where abatement is not currently specified to be included in the Work.

.5 Should there be a discrepancy between recommendations contained in the report and the requirements of the Contract Documents, the latter shall govern. Advise the Consultant in writing prior to proceeding with the Work.

END OF SECTION

00 41 10 SAMPLE TENDER FORM

Page 1


217073

February 2018

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 TENDER FORM .1 The following is a blank copy of the "Tender Form" which is to be used for the purposes of submitting a

Tender, in accordance with Section 00 21 12 Instructions to Bidders.

END OF SECTION

00 41 12.02 TENDER FORM

Page 1


217073

February 2018

TENDER FORM PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Contractor’s Name: _______________________________________________________________ .1 Pursuant to, and in compliance with, Section 00 21 12 - Instructions to Bidders, and the Contract

Documents relating to the construction of Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, Exterior Cladding and Washroom Upgrades - Northern Secondary School, as per documents issued by Mitchell Jensen Architects inc. including the Addenda numbered and dated as follows:

.1 _________________________________ .4 _________________________________

.2 _________________________________ .5 _________________________________

.3 _________________________________ .6 _________________________________ .2 The undersigned, having become thoroughly familiar with the Terms and Conditions of the Contract

Documents, with local conditions affecting the performance, and the costs of the work at the place proposed, and having fully inspected the site, hereby offers and agrees to fully perform the work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents, including the furnishing of all labour, materials, equipment, permits, fees, duties, and all taxes except the Harmonized Sales Tax (HST), for the stipulated price, in lawful Canadian Funds as indicated in Article 1.2 Base Bid Price.

1.2 Base Bid Price .1 dollars.

($ )

in lawful Canadian funds, (excluding HST) In addition to the above price, applicable Harmonized Sales Tax (HST) will be charged.

.2 The undersigned hereby accepts the terms of the Instructions to Bidders as related to the tendering

process and acknowledges that the Owner has the right to reject this Tender, but that this Tender shall remain open and irrevocable for a period of 60 days from the date of closing.

.3 If notified in writing by the Owner, or a representative on behalf of the Owner, of the acceptance of this tender, within 60 days of the tender closing date, the undersigned agrees to within 10 days thereafter: .1 Commence the Work, and attain Substantial Performance of the Work described in the Contract

Documents, barring delays as prescribed in the Contract Documents, within the duration prescribed by the Contract Documents.

.2 Execute a “Canadian Standard Construction Document CCDC 2 (2008) Stipulated Price Contract”, including amendments contained in the Specification.

.3 Provide a Performance Bond, and a Labour and Materials Payment Bond satisfactory to the Owner, as specified in the Contract Documents.

.4 The undersigned declares that no person, firm or corporation other than the undersigned has any interest in this tender or in the proposed contract for which this tender is submitted.


Page 2


217073

February 2018

.5 The undersigned acknowledges that the Tender Price includes the Cash Allowances specified in the Section 01 00 01 General Requirements.

1.3 Take-Out Prices The following Take-Out are for specific areas of work which, at the Owner's discretion, may be

DELETED from the Work and the Base Bid Price in establishing Contract Value. Take-Out Prices do not include the H.S.T.

1.4 Separate Prices The following Separate Prices are for specific areas of work which, at the Owner's discretion, may ADD

to the Work and the Base Bid Price in establishing Contract Value. Separate Prices do not include the H.S.T.

1.5 Sub-Contractors The following Sub-Contractors and Suppliers will be engaged by the undersigned to complete the work

described in the Contract Documents. See Section 00 21 12 Instructions To Bidders for details regarding this list, its use and implications.

SUBTRADE

NAME

.2 Asbestos Abatement

.3 Finish Carpentry

.4 Masonry

.5 Prefinished Steel Cladding Installation

.6 Steel Door and Frame Supply

.7 Aluminum Entrance Framing & Window Supplier

.8 Finish Hardware Supplier

.9 Gypsum Wallboard Installation

.10 Ceramic Tile Installation

.11 Acoustic Tile Ceiling Installation

.12 Resilient Flooring Installation

.13 Painting

.14 Mechanical

.15 Electrical


Page 3


217073

February 2018

1.6 Alternate Prices - Bidder Proposed As per Section 00 21 12 - Instructions to Bidders, the following prices are offered as additions or

deletions to the Tender Price for the use of alternative methods or materials to those specified or identified as "Base Bid". These alternates are proposed by the Bidder, and shall only be incorporated into the Contract if expressly accepted by the Owner. Alternate Prices do not include the H.S.T.

Description ADD DELETE

__________________________ $________________________ $________________________

__________________________ $________________________ $________________________

__________________________ $________________________ $________________________

__________________________ $________________________ $________________________

__________________________ $________________________ $________________________

__________________________ $________________________ $________________________

__________________________ $________________________ $________________________


Page 4


217073

February 2018

Signed, sealed and submitted for and on behalf of:

____________________________________

Company Name

____________________________________

Address

____________________________________ ___________________________________

Name and Title Witness Name and Title

____________________________________ ___________________________________

Signature Witness Signature

____________________________________

Date

Affix Corporate Seal over signature

00 52 13 CONTRACT FORM

Page 1


217073

February 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 CONTRACT FORM .1 The following is a copy of CCDC Document 2, Stipulated Price Contract, 2008, provided for reference

only. .2 Article A-5 Payment including percentage holdback, and interest is completed and will form

part the completed contract. .3 The balance of the Contract Form will be completed upon acceptance of a tender.

END OF DOCUMENT

00 56 13 SUPPLEMENTARY DEFINITIONS

Page 1


217073

February 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 DEFINITIONS .1 CCDC 2-2008 Edition, Stipulated Price Contract as may be amended, forms the basis of Definitions

between the Owner and Contractor. .2 These Definitions are bound to the CCDC 2 Definitions and CCDC 2 General Conditions.

1.2 SUPPLEMENTARY DEFINITIONS TO CCDC 2-2008 .1 Add the following words and terms to the CCDC 2 Definitions.

.1 Addendum A document that amends the Bid Documents during the Bidding Period and becomes part of the

Contract Documents when a Contract is executed. (Plural: Addenda):

.2 Agreement The signed and sealed legal instrument binding parties in a Contract, describing in strict terms their

mutual arrangement, roles and responsibilities, commencement, and completion responsibilities.

.3 Alternative Price The amount stipulated by a Bidder for an Alternative and stated as an addition, a deduction, or no

change to the Bid Price.

.4 Bid To offer as a Bid stating for what price a Contractor will assume a Contract.

.5 Bid Documents A set of documents consisting of the Instructions to Bidders, Bid Form, Contract Documents, and other

information issued for the benefit of Bidders to prepare and submit a Bid.

.6 Bid Form The specific and detailed form used to collect information about a Bid.

.7 Bidding The process of preparing and submitting a Bid.

.8 Construction Documents The Drawings and Project Manual. When combined with a Contract and Contract conditions, these

documents form the Contract Documents.

.9 Contingency Allowance An additional monetary amount added to a Project cost estimate and designated to cover

unpredictable or unforeseen items of Work. The amount is usually based on some percentage of the estimated cost and expended and adjusted by Change Order. It is not intended to cover additions to the scope of Work.


Page 2


217073

February 2018

.10 Cost Plus Contract A Contract under which a Contractor is reimbursed for the direct and indirect costs for the

performance of a Contract and, in addition, is paid a Fee for services. The Fee is usually stated as a stipulated price or as a percentage of cost.

.11 General Conditions

That part of the Contract Documents which sets forth many of the rights, responsibilities and relationships of the parties involved in a Contract.

.12 Install

To remove from site storage, move or transport to intended location, install in position, connect to utilities, repair site caused damage, and make ready for use.

.13 Instructions To Bidders

Instructions contained in the Bid Documents to convey an Owner's expectations and criteria associated with submitting a Bid.

.14 Section

A portion of a Project Specification covering one or more segments of the total Work or requirements. Sections are included in a Project manual as required to meet Project requirements.

.15 Standard

A document describing a grade or a level of quality, which has been established by a recognized agency or organization, utilizing an internal voting process.

.16 Separate Price

A separate price for work to be added to the base price if selected by the Owner. This price type is not a part of the base bid price.

.17 Stipulated Price

An amount set forth in a Stipulated Price Contract as the total payment for the performance of the Work. Sometimes referred to as a stipulated sum or a lump sum stipulated price.

.18 Submittals

Submittals are documents or items required by the Contract Documents to be provided by the Contractor, such as:

- Shop Drawings, samples, models, mock-ups to indicate details or characteristics, before the portion of the Work that they represent can be incorporated into the Work; and

- Record drawings and manuals to provide instructions to the operation and maintenance of the Work.

.19 Supply


Page 3


217073

February 2018

To acquire or purchase, ship or transport to the site, unload, remove packaging to permit inspection for damage, re-package, replace damaged items, and safely store on-site.

.20 Tender

A term that was formally abandoned by CCDC and the Canadian Construction industry in the early 1980's in favour of the preferred term Bid.

.21 Unit Price

The amount payable for a single unit of Work as stated in a Schedule of Prices. Unit prices include all additional overhead and profit. No additional mark-ups are permitted for valuations submitted under this method.

END OF SECTION

00 73 01 SUPPLEMENTARY ARTICLES OF AGREEMENT

Page 1


217073

February 2018

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 The Articles of Agreement of the Stipulated Price Contract CCDC 2, 2008 are amended as follows:

.1 ARTICLE A-6 – RECEIPT AND ADDRESSES FOR NOTICES IN WRITING .1 Delete Article A-6.1 and substitute new article 6.1:

.1 6.1 Notices in Writing between the parties or between them and the Consultant shall be

considered to have been received by the addressee on the date of receipt if delivered by hand or by commercial courier or if sent during normal business hours by fax and addressed as set out below. Such Notices in Writing will be deemed to be received by the addressee on the next business day if sent by fax after normal business hours or if sent by overnight commercial courier. Such Notices in Writing will be deemed to be received by the addressee on the fifth Working Day following the date of mailing, if sent by pre-paid registered post, when addressed as set out below. An address for a party may be changed by Notice in Writing to the other party setting out the new address in accordance with this Article.

END OF SECTION

00 73 02 SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS

Page 1


217073

February 2018

PART 1 - GENERAL

Where a General Condition or paragraph of the General Conditions of the Stipulated Price Contract is deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the numbering of the remaining General Conditions or paragraphs shall remain unchanged, and the numbering of the deleted item will be retained, unused.

The General Conditions of the Stipulated Price Contract CCDC 2, 2008 are amended as follows:

1.1 GC 1.1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS .1 Add to the end of subparagraph 1.1.2.2

.1

.2 Except where the Consultant shall be indemnified as a third party beneficiary as provided in subparagraphs 9.2.7.4, 9.2.8.4, 9.5.2.4 and 9.5.3.4 and in 12.1.1.

.2 Add new subparagraph 1.1.7.5:

.1 1.1.7.5 In case of discrepancies, noted materials and annotations shall take precedence

over graphic indications in the Contract Documents.

.3 Delete 1.1.7.1 and substitute new paragraph 1.1.7.1:

.1 the order of priority of documents, from highest to lowest, shall be .1 Supplementary Articles of Agreement, .2 the Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor, .3 Supplementary Definitions, .4 the Definitions, .5 Supplementary Conditions, .6 the General Conditions, .7 Division 1 of the Specifications, .8 technical Specifications, .9 material and finishing schedules, .10 the Drawings.

.4 Delete 1.1.8. and substitute new paragraph 1.1.8.

.1 ".8 The Owner shall provide the Contractor, without charge, a digital copy of the Contract

Documents, in Adobe PDF format, to perform the Work. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all hard / paper copies of Contract Documents required for their own use, for building permit application and for 3 (three) Contract sets."

1.2 GC 2.2 ROLE OF THE CONSULTANT .1 Delete paragraph 2.2.4. in its entirety. .2 Add the word “schedules after the word “techniques in paragraph 2.2.6. .3 Add to the end of the second sentence of paragraph 2.2.6. “or to adhere to the construction schedule.”


Page 2


217073

February 2018

.4 Add at the end of paragraph 2.2.9. “The Owner and the Contractor shall waive any claims against the Consultant arising out of the making of such interpretations and findings in accordance with paragraphs 2.2.7., 2.2.8. and 2.2.9”.

.5 Delete the comma after the word “submittals” and add the words “which are provided” before the words “in accordance” in paragraph 2.2.14.

.6 Add new sentence to end of paragraph 2.2.11 “The Consultant’s obligation to make findings on a large claim or large number of claims is subject to the terms and conditions of the Owner/Consultant agreement.”

.7 Delete from paragraph 2.2.15 the words “Change Directives” and "and GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE"

1.3 GC 2.3 REVIEW AND INSPECTION OF THE WORK .1 Delete paragraph 2.3.6. in its entirety. .2 Delete paragraph 2.3.7. in its entirety.

1.4 GC 2.4 DEFECTIVE WORK .1 Add new subparagraphs 2.4.1.1 and 2.4.1.2:

.1 2.4.1.1 The Contractor shall rectify, in a manner acceptable to the Owner and the

Consultant, all defective work and deficiencies throughout the Work, whether or not they are specifically identified by the Consultant.

.2

.3 2.4.1.2 The Contractor shall prioritize the correction of any defective work which, in the sole discretion of the Owner, adversely affects the day to day operation of the Owner.

1.5 GC 3.1 CONTROL OF THE WORK .1 Add the word “schedules” after the word “techniques” in paragraph 3.1.2. .2 Add new paragraph 3.1.3:

.1 3.1.3 Prior to commencing individual procurement, fabrication and construction

activities, the Contractor shall verify, at the Place of the Work, all relevant measurements and levels necessary for proper and complete fabrication, assembly and installation of the Work and shall further carefully compare such field measurements and conditions with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Where dimensions are not included or exact locations are not apparent, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Consultant in writing and obtain written instructions from the Consultant before proceeding with any part of the affected work.

1.6 GC 3.2. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER AND OTHER CONTRACTORS .1 Delete from paragraph 3.2.5 the words "and GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE" .2 Delete 3.2.2.1 and 3.2.2.2.

.3 Add new clauses 3.2.3.4 and 3.2.3.5 as follows:

.1 3.2.3.4 provide for the co-ordination of the activities and work of other contractors and

Owner’s own forces with the Work of the Contract; .2 3.2.3.5 assume overall responsibility for compliance with the applicable health and

construction safety legislation at the Place of the Work.


Page 3


217073

February 2018

1.7 GC 3.4 DOCUMENT REVIEW .1 Delete paragraph 3.4.1 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 3.4.1:

.1 3.4.1 The Contractor shall review the Contract Documents and shall report promptly to

the Consultant any error, inconsistency or omission the Contractor may discover. Such review by the Contractor shall comply with the standard of care described in paragraph 3.14.1 of the Contract. Except for its obligation to make such review and report the result, the Contractor does not assume any responsibility to the Owner or to the Consultant for the accuracy of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be liable for damage or costs resulting from such errors, inconsistencies, or omissions in the Contract Documents, which the Contractor could not reasonably have discovered. If the Contractor does discover any error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall not proceed with the work affected until the Contractor has received corrected or missing information from the Consultant.

1.8 GC 3.6 SUPERVISION .1 Delete paragraph 3.6.1 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 3.6.1:

.1 3.6.1 Employ a competent superintendent to provide supervision and necessary

assistants who shall be in attendance at the Work site at all times while work is being performed. .1 The superintendent shall be satisfactory to the Consultant and shall not be changed

except for good reasons and only then after consultation with, and agreement by, the Consultant.

.2 The superintendent shall represent the Contractor at the Work site and directions given to him by the Consultant shall beheld to have been given to the Contractor.

.3 Superintendent shall be deemed not satisfactory and changes or additions to superintendent may be demanded when: .1 Control, organization and co-ordination of the Work is not satisfactory, or .2 The quality of the Work does not meet the requirements of the Contract

Documents, or .3 The directions given in accordance with the Contract Documents are not followed,

or .4 The progress of the Work is behind the agreed schedule.

.4 Superintendent to co-ordinate work of all trades and ensure prompt and continuous prosecution of work.

1.9 GC 3.7 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS .1 Delete the words “through the Consultant” in paragraph 3.7.6.

1.10 GC 3.8 LABOUR AND PRODUCTS .1 Add new paragraph 3.8.4:


Page 4


217073

February 2018

.1 3.8.4 The Contractor is responsible for the safe on-site storage of Products and their protection (including Products supplied by the Owner and other contractors to be installed under the Contract) in such ways as to avoid dangerous conditions or contamination to the Products or other persons or property and in locations at the Place of the Work to the satisfaction of the Owner and the Consultant. The Owner shall provide all relevant information on the Products to be supplied by the Owner.

1.11 GC 3.10 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Add the words “AND OTHER SUBMITTALS” to the Title after SHOP DRAWINGS. .2 Add “and Submittals after the words “Shop Drawings in paragraphs 3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.10.4, 3.10.7, 3.10.8,

3.10.8.2, 3.10.9, 3.10.10, 3.10.11, and 3.10.12. .3 Delete 3.10.3 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 3.10.3

.1 3.10.3 The Contractor shall prepare a schedule of the dates for provision, review and

return of Shop Drawings and Submittals and submit it to the Consultant for review. .4 Delete the last sentence in paragraph 3.10.9 .5 Delete the words “so as to cause no delay in the performance of the Work” in paragraph 3.10.12.

1.12 Add new General Condition 3.14 as follows: .1 GC 3.14 PERFORMANCE BY CONTRACTOR

.1 3.14.1 In performing its services and obligations under the Contract, the Contractor shall

exercise a standard of care, skill and diligence that would normally be provided by an experienced and prudent contractor supplying similar services for similar projects. The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that throughout the Contract, the Contractor’s obligations, duties and responsibilities shall be interpreted in accordance with this standard. The Contractor shall exercise the same standard of due care and diligence in respect of any Products, personnel, or procedures which it may recommend to the Owner.

.2 3.14.2 The Contractor further represents, covenants and warrants to the Owner that:

.1 The personnel it assigns to the Project are appropriately experienced;

.2 It has a sufficient staff of qualified and competent personnel to replace its designated supervisor and project manager, subject to the Owner’s approval, in the event of death, incapacity, removal or resignation.

1.13 GC 4.1 CASH ALLOWANCES .1 Delete paragraph 4.1.4 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 4.1.4:

.1 4.1.4 Where the actual cost of the Work under any cash allowance exceeds the

amount of the allowance, any unexpended amounts from other cash allowances shall be reallocated, at the Consultant’s direction, to cover the shortfall, and, in that case, there shall be no additional amount added to the Contract Price for overhead and profit. Only where the actual cost of the Work under all cash allowances exceeds the total amount of all cash allowances shall the Contractor be compensated for the excess incurred and substantiated, plus an amount for overhead and profit on the excess only, as set out in the Contract Documents.


Page 5


217073

February 2018

.2 Delete paragraph 4.1.5 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 4.1.5:

.1 4.1.5 The net amount of any unexpended cash allowances, after providing for any

reallocations as contemplated in paragraph 4.1.4, shall be deducted from the Contract Price by Change Order without any adjustment for the Contractor's overhead and profit on such amount.

.3 Delete paragraph 4.1.7 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 4.1.7.

.1 4.1.7. The Contractor shall prepare a schedule that shows when the Owner must

authorize ordering of items called for under cash allowances to avoid delaying the progress of the work.

.4 Add new paragraph 4.1.8:

.1 4.1.8 The Owner reserves the right to call, or to have the Contractor call, for competitive

bids for portions of the Work, to be paid for from cash allowances.

1.14 GC 5.2 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT .1 Revise Paragraph 5.2.7 as follows:

.1 "... not yet incorporated into the Work, provided such Products are Project specific and cannot

readily be used elsewhere, may be considered for payment on an individual basis, and shall be supported by such evidence ..."

.2 Add the following new paragraphs:

.1 5.2.8 The Contractor shall submit to the Consultant with every application for payment, the following documentation in accordance with the Construction Lien Act

.1 A Statutory Declaration certifying that all accounts of all Subcontractors and suppliers relative to the project have been paid in full, less only the part of holdback monies due to them. The form of Statutory Declaration CCDC Document 9A shall be used. The required document shall be a printed electronic version bearing the required CCDC copyright seal. Digital copies and/or photocopies of the CCDC document, whether bearing the copyright seal or not, will be rejected.

.2 A Clearance Certificate from the Workplace Safety & Insurance Board (WSIB) stating that the Contractor has complied with the requirements of the Workers' Compensation Act and is in good standing as of the date of the Certificate.

.2 5.2.9 Application for release of holdback as permitted under the Construction Lien Act

(Ont.) 1990 shall be accompanied by Workplace Safety Insurance Board (WSIB) clearance and a statutory declaration in the form CCDC Document 9A, printed electronic version with CCDC copyright seal, and such additional supporting documents as the Consultant may reasonably require.


Page 6


217073

February 2018

1.15 GC 5.3 PROGRESS PAYMENT .1 Delete subparagraph 5.3.1.1 in its entirety.

1.16 GC 5.6 PROGRESSIVE RELEASE OF HOLDBACK .1 Delete paragraphs 5.6.1., 5.6.2 and 5.6.3 entirely.

1.17 GC 6.2 CHANGES IN THE WORK .1 Add to the end of 6.2.1:

.1 "..., and if no adjustment in Contract Time is proposed by the Contractor, then it shall be deemed

that the change in the Work will have no impact on the Contract Time."

.2 Add the following new paragraphs 6.2.3 through 6.2.9:

.1 6.2.3 In presenting a method of cost adjustment or amount of adjustment for the Contract Price proposed or required for a change in the Work, the Contractor shall include a detailed estimate of the Contractor's and Subcontractor's costs, including Products and labour, shown in hours per category of worker, and allowance for overhead costs and profit. The following maximum percentages shall be applied to the net actual increased cost required to be borne by the Contractor or Subcontractor, as complete compensation for overhead costs and profit:

.1 Contractor on work of Subcontractors 10%.

.2 Contractor on his own work 10%.

.3 Subcontractors on their own work 10%. .2 These percentage allowances for overhead costs and profit are deemed to include:

.1 the Contractor's head office and administration expenses, associated travelling/accommodation/meal costs, financing costs including holdback, bonding and insurance costs;

.2 all supervision, coordination, administration, margin and risk of undertaking within stipulated amount;

.3 the salaries of superintendents, engineers, timekeepers, accountants, clerks, watch persons and all other Site supervision staff above foreperson level employed directly on the Work;

.4 the Contractor’s mark-up and profit;

.5 use of temporary offices, sheds and other general temporary Site support facilities and all utilities used therein;

.3 These percentage allowances also include for miscellaneous additional costs related to: .1 licences and permits, except when these are special for a particular item of Work; .2 purchase of rental material, plant and equipment; .3 purchase of small tools and supplies; .4 safety and protection measures; and .5 engineering, as-built drawings and commissioning.

.4 For a given change in the Work, these percentage allowances apply to the net cost of the change after consideration of both increases and decreases in the cost of the Work.


Page 7


217073

February 2018

.2 6.2.4 In presenting a method of adjustment of the Contract Time for a proposed or required change in the Work, the Contractor will include detailed scheduling information to substantiate the impact of the change on the critical path of the project, being the linear sequence of dependent activities to complete the project in the least possible time. If the work resulting from the change can be completed concurrent with originally planned activities so as not to delay the overall project, no change in contract time will apply.

.3 6.2.5 The preparation of proposed adjustments to Contract Price and Contract Time for

proposed or required changes in the Work is a requirement of the Contract and fees for preparing such quotations will not constitute a change in Contract Price, whether or not the change proceeds.

.4 6.2.6 If the Consultant determines it necessary for the proper performance of the Work

or to avoid delays, that the work of change should proceed before an adjustment in Contract Price and/or Contract Time can be determined or agreed upon, the Consultant may issue instructions to proceed with the work of the change prior to the issuance of a Change Order. The Contractor shall act immediately according to such instructions; it being understood that doing so will not jeopardize any claim the Contractor may have related to the change in the Work. The Contractor and the Consultant will expedite valuation and agreement between the parties on the corresponding change in Contract Price and change in Contract Time.

.5 6.2.7 If, after reasonable efforts by the Parties and the Consultant, the method of

adjustment or the amount of adjustment for the Contract Price or Contract Time cannot be agreed upon, then the Consultant in the first instance will determine the method of valuation, measurement, the change in Contract Price and Contract Time subject to final determination in the manner set out in Part 8 DISPUTE RESOLUTION. In this case the Consultant will, with consent of the Owner, issue a Change Order establishing the method of valuation and if by stipulated sum his valuation of the change in Contract Price and Contract Time, and such Change Order constitutes the finding of the Consultant in accordance with GC 2.2, sentence 2.2.6 and the Contractor will proceed with the change in the Work in accordance with GC 8.1, sentence 8.1.3. Parties wishing to further dispute the Change Order must submit a notice in writing of dispute in accordance Part 8 DISPUTE RESOLUTION, within the time limitations contained therein. Failure to provide notice in writing of dispute within the required time limitations with regard to a Change Order constitutes acceptance of the terms of the Change Order, whether the Change Order is signed by the party or not, and the Contract is deemed to have been changed in accordance with the Change Order.

.6 6.2.8 The Contractor will keep accurate records of quantities, labour time and cost of

work of any disputed Change Order.

.7 6.2.9 In the case of a disputed Change Order, pending final determination of associated adjustment in Contract Price and Contract Time, the Contractor will include the value of the disputed Change Order on applications for payment without prejudice to the dispute, and the Consultant will certify the value of the work performed in accordance with the Change Order, and include the amount with regular certificates for payment.


Page 8


217073

February 2018

1.18 GC 6.3 CHANGE DIRECTIVE .1 Delete GC 6.3 Change Directive in its entirety.

1.19 GC 6.4 CONCEALED OR UNKNOWN CONDITIONS .1 Add new subparagraph 6.4.5:

.1 6.4.5 The Contractor confirms that, prior to bidding the Project, it carefully investigated

the Place of the Work and applied to that investigation the degree of care and skill described in paragraph 3.14.1, given the amount of time provided between the issue of the bid documents and the actual closing of bids, the degree of access provided to the Contractor prior to submission of bid, and the sufficiency and completeness of the information provided by the Owner. The Contractor is not entitled to compensation or to an extension of the Contract Time for conditions which could reasonably have been ascertained by the Contractor by such careful investigation undertaken prior to the submission of the bid.

.2 Delete from paragraph 6.4.2 the words "or GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE"

1.20 GC 6.5 DELAYS .1 Delete the period at the end of paragraph 6.5.1, and substitute the following words:

.1 “, but excluding any consequential, indirect or special damages.”

.2 Delete the period at the end of paragraph 6.5.2, and substitute the following words:

.1 “, but excluding any consequential, indirect or special damages.”

.3 Add new subparagraph 6.5.6.

.1 6.5.6 If the Contractor is delayed in the performance of the Work by an act or omission

of the Contractor or anyone employed or engaged by the Contractor directly or indirectly, or by any cause within the Contractor’s control, then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Consultant may decide in consultation with the Contractor. The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for all reasonable costs incurred by the Owner as the result of such delay, including all services required by the Owner from the Consultant as a result of such delay by the Contractor and, in particular, the cost of the Consultant’s services during the period between the date of Substantial Performance of the Work stated in Article A-1 herein as the same may be extended through the provisions of these General Conditions and any later, actual date of Substantial Performance of the Work achieved by the Contractor.


Page 9


217073

February 2018

1.21 GC 6.6 CLAIMS FOR A CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE .1 Delete paragraph 6.6.5. in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 6.6.5.

.1 6.6.5 The Consultant’s findings, with respect to a claim made by either party will be

given by Notice in Writing by the Consultant to both parties within reasonable time after receipt of the claim information noted in paragraph 6.6.3.

.2 Add new paragraph 6.6.7

.1 6.6.7 The Owner may make claims arising out of the costs incurred for additional

services provided by the Consultant resulting from the Contractor’s failure to reasonably perform the Work in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract, including the Contractor’s issuance of unnecessary Requests for Information. The Consultant will notify the Owner and Contractor where it has been determined that additional services will be required or have been provided in order not to cause a delay. The Owner shall make claims based on the Consultant’s invoices.

1.22 GC 8.2 NEGOTIATION, MEDIATION AND ARBITRATION .1 Revise the heading, “GC 8.2 NEGOTIATION, MEDIATION AND ARBITRATION” to read, “GC 8.2

NEGOTIATION AND MEDIATION”. .2 Delete paragraphs 8.2.6, 8.2.7, and 8.2.8 in their entirety.

1.23 GC 9.1 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY .1 Delete subparagraph 9.1.1.1 in its entirety and substitute new subparagraph 9.1.1.1:

.1 9.1.1.1 errors in the Contract Documents which the Contractor could not have discovered

applying the standard of care described in paragraph 3.14.1;

.2 Delete paragraph 9.1.2 in its entirety and substitute the following new paragraph 9.1.2:

.1 9.1.2 Before commencing any Work, the Contractor shall determine the locations of all underground utilities and structures indicated in or reasonably determinable from the Contract Documents, or that are reasonably determinable from an inspection of the Place of the Work exercising the degree of care and skill described in paragraph 3.14.1.

.2

1.24 GC 9.2 TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES .1 Add to paragraph 9.2.6 after the word "responsible”, the following new words:

.1 "or whether any toxic or hazardous substances or materials already at the Place of the Work (and

which were then harmless or stored, contained or otherwise dealt with in accordance with legal and regulatory requirements) were dealt with by the Contractor or anyone for whom the Contractor is responsible in a manner which does not comply with legal and regulatory requirements, or which threatens human health and safety or the environment, or material damage to the property of the Owner or others,"


Page 10


217073

February 2018

.2 Add “and the Consultant” after the word “Contractor” in subparagraph 9.2.7.4.

.3 Add to paragraph 9.2.8 after the word "responsible”, the following new words:

.1 "or that any toxic or hazardous substances or materials already at the Place of the Work (and

which were then harmless or stored, contained or otherwise dealt with in accordance with legal and regulatory requirements) were dealt with by the Contractor or anyone for whom the Contractor is responsible in a manner which does not comply with legal and regulatory requirements, or which threatens human health and safety or the environment, or material damage to the property of the Owner or others, "

.4 Add “and the Consultant” after the word “Owner” in subparagraph 9.2.8.4.

1.25 GC 9.4 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY .1 Delete from paragraph 9.4.1 the words ‘Subject to paragraph 3.2.2.2 of’ and replace with ‘In accordance

with paragraph 3.2.3.5 of’.

1.26 GC 9.5 MOULD .1 Add “and the Consultant” after “Owner” in subparagraph 9.5.2.4.

.2 Add “and the Consultant” after “Contractor” in subparagraph 9.5.3.4.

1.27 GC 10.2 LAWS, NOTICES, PERMITS, AND FEES .1 Replace GC 10.2.2 with:

.1 "The Contractor shall obtain and pay for the building permit. The Owner shall provide and pay

for all development approvals, permanent easements and rights of servitude and all other necessary approvals and permits except for the permits and fees referred to in paragraph 10.2.3. or for which the Contract Documents specify as the responsibility of the Contractor."

.2 Delete from the first line of paragraph 10.2.5 the word, "The" and substitute the words:

.1 "Subject to paragraph 3.14.1, the".


Page 11


217073

February 2018

1.28 GC11.1 INSURANCE .1 Delete entirety of general condition and CCDC 41 and replace with the following:

11.1 Without restricting the generality of GC 12 - INDEMNIFICATION, the Contractor shall

provide, maintain, and pay for the insurance coverages specified in GC 11.1 - INSURANCE. Unless otherwise stipulated, the duration of each insurance policy shall be from the date of commencement of the Work until the expiration of the warranty periods set out in the Contract Documents. Prior to commencement of the Work and upon the placement, renewal, amendment, or extension of all or any part of the insurance, the Contractor shall promptly provide the Owner with confirmation of coverage and, if required, a certified true copy of the policies certified by an authorized representative of the insurer together with copies of any amending endorsements.

General Liability Insurance General liability insurance shall be in the name of the Contractor, with the Owner and the Consultant

named as additional insureds, with limits of not less than $5,000,000.00 inclusive per occurrence for bodily injury, death, and damage to property, including loss of use thereof, for itself and each of its employees, Subcontractors and/or agents. The insurance coverage shall not be less than the insurance required by IBC Form 2100, or its equivalent replacement, provided that IBC Form 2100 shall contain the latest edition of the relevant CCDC endorsement form. To achieve the desired limit, umbrella, or excess liability insurance may be used. All liability coverage shall be maintained for completed operations hazards from the date of Substantial Performance of the Work, as set out in the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, on an ongoing basis for a period of 6 years following Substantial Performance of the Work. Where the Contractor maintains a single, blanket policy, the addition of the Owner and the Consultant is limited to liability arising out of the Project and all operations necessary or incidental thereto. The policy shall be endorsed to provide the Owner with not less than 30 days notice, in writing, in advance of any cancellation and of change or amendment restricting coverage.

Automobile Liability Insurance Automobile liability insurance in respect of licensed vehicles shall limits of not less than $2,000,000.00

inclusive per occurrence for bodily injury, death and damage to property, covering all licensed vehicles owned or leased by the Contractor, and endorsed to provide the Owner with not less than 30 days notice, in writing, in advance of any cancellation, change or amendment restricting coverage. Where the policy has been issued pursuant to a government-operated automobile insurance system, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with confirmation of automobile insurance coverage for all automobiles registered in the name of the Contractor.


Page 12


217073

February 2018

Aircraft and Watercraft Liability Insurance Where determined necessary by the Contractor, acting reasonably, aircraft and watercraft liability

insurance will be obtained in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 11.1.3. Aircraft and watercraft liability insurance with respect to owned or non-owed aircraft and watercraft if used directly or indirectly in the performance of the Work, including use of additional premises, shall be subject to limits of not less than $2,000,000.00 inclusive per occurrence for bodily injury, death and damage to property, including loss of use thereof and limits of not less than $2,000,000.00 for aircraft passenger hazard. Such insurance shall be in a form acceptable to the Owner. The policies shall be endorsed to provide the Owner with not less than 30 days notice, in writing, in advance of cancellation, change or amendment restricting coverage.

Builders Risk and Boiler and Machinery Insurance (1) Builder's Risk property insurance shall be in the name of the Contractor with the Owner and the

Consultant named as additional insureds. The policy shall insure against all risks of direct physical loss or damage to the property insured which shall include all property included in the Work, whether owned by the Contractor or the owner or owned by others, so long as the property forms part of the Work. The property insured also includes all materials and supplies necessary to complete the work, whether installed in the work temporarily or permanently, in storage on the project site, or in transit to the project site, as well as temporary buildings, scaffolding, falsework forms, hoardings, excavation, site preparation and similar work.

Builders Risk insurance shall have limits of not less than the sum of 1.5 times Contract Price and the

full value, as stated in the Contract, of Products and design services that are specified to be provided by the Owner for incorporation into the Work, with a deductible not exceeding $5,000. The insurance coverage shall not be less than the insurance provided by IBC Forms 4042 and 4047 (excluding flood and earthquake) or their equivalent replacement.

The insurance shall include the foregoing and, otherwise, shall not be less than the insurance required

by IBC Form 4042 or its equivalent replacement provided that the IBC Form 4042 shall include the latest addition of the relevant CCDC endorsement form. The coverage shall be based on a completed value form and shall be maintained continuously from the date of commencement of the Work until the earliest of:

(a) 10 calendar days after the date of Substantial Performance of the Work; (b) on the commencement of use or occupancy of any part or section of the Work unless such use or

occupancy is for construction purposes, habitational, office, banking, convenience store under 465 square metres in area, or parking purposes, or for the installation, testing and commissioning of equipment forming part of the Work;

(c) when left unattended for more than 30 consecutive calendar days or when construction activity has ceased for more than 30 consecutive calendar days.


Page 13


217073

February 2018

(2) Boiler and machinery insurance shall be in the name of the Contractor, with the Owner and the Consultant named as additional insureds, for not less than the replacement value of the boilers, pressure vessels and other insurable objects forming part of the Work. The insurance provided shall not be less than the insurance provided by the “Comprehensive Boiler and Machinery Form” and shall be maintained continuously from commencement of use or operation of the property insured and until 10 days after the date of the final certificate for payment.

(3) The policies shall allow for partial or total use or occupancy of the Work. (4) The policies shall provide that, in the case of a loss or damage, payment shall be made to the

Owner and the Contractor as their respective interests may appear. The Contractor shall act on behalf of the Owner for the purpose of adjusting the amount of such loss or damage payment with the insurers. When the extent of the loss or damage is determined, the Contractor shall proceed to restore the Work. Loss or damage shall not affect the rights and obligations of either party under the Contract except that the Contractor shall be entitled to such reasonable extension of the Contract Time, relative to the extent of the loss or damage, as determined by the Owner, in its sole discretion.

(5) The Contractor shall be entitled to receive from the Owner, in addition to the amount due under

the Contract, the amount at which the Owner's interest in restoration of the Work has been appraised, such amount to be paid as the restoration of the Work proceeds and as provided in GC 5.2 - APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT and GC 5.3 - PROGRESS PAYMENT. In addition, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive from the payments made by the insurer the amount of the Contractor's interest in the restoration of the Work.

(6) In the case of loss or damage to the Work arising from the work of other contractors, or the

Owner's own forces, the Owner, in accordance with the Owner's obligations under paragraph 3.2.2.4 of GC 3.2 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR OTHER CONTRACTORS, shall pay the Contractor the cost of restoring the Work as the restoration of the Work proceeds and as provided in GC 5.2 - APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT and GC 5.3 - PROGRESS PAYMENT.

Contractors' Equipment Insurance "All risks " contractors' equipment insurance covering construction machinery and equipment used by

the Contractor for the performance of the Work, excluding boiler insurance, shall be in a form acceptable to the Owner and shall not allow subrogation claims by the insurer against the Owner. The policies shall be endorsed to provide the Owner with not less than 30 days notice, in writing, in advance of cancellation, change or amendment restricting coverage. Subject to satisfactory proof of financial capability by the Contractor for self-insurance of his equipment, the Owner agrees to waive the equipment insurance requirement.

11.1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for deductible amounts under the policies except

where such amounts may be excluded from the Contractor's responsibility by the terms of GC 9.1 - PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY and GC 9.2 - DAMAGES AND MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY.


Page 14


217073

February 2018

11.1.3 Where the full insurable value of the Work is substantially less than the Contract Price, the Owner may reduce the amount of insurance required to waive the course of construction insurance requirement.

11.1.4 If the Contractor fails to provide or maintain insurance as required by the Contract

Documents, then the Owner shall have the right to provide and maintain such insurance and provide evidence of same to the Contractor. The Contractor shall pay the costs thereof to the Owner on demand, or the Owner may deduct the amount that is due or may become due to the Contractor.

11.1.5 All required insurance policies shall be with insurers licensed to underwrite insurance in

the jurisdiction of the Place of the Work.”

1.29 GC 11.2 - CONTRACT SECURITY .1 Add new Paragraph 11.2.3 as follows:

.1 11.2.3 The Contractor shall provide a Performance Bond in the name of the Owner for Fifty Percent (50%) of the Contract Price, to assure the faithful performance of the Contract, including corrections to the Work required under GC 12.3 - Warranty; on Performance Bond Form, CCDC 221.

.2 Add new Paragraph 11.2.4 as follows: .1 11.2.4 The Contractor shall also provide a Labour and Material Payment Bond in the

name of the Owner for Fifty Percent (50%) of the Contract Price, to assume faithful payment of monies to parties in contract with the Contract; on Labour and Material Payment Bond Form, CCDC 222.

1.30 GC 12.1 INDEMNIFICATION .1 Add “and the Consultant” after the words “hold harmless the other” in paragraph 12.1.1.

1.31 GC 12.3 WARRANTY .1 Delete from the first line of paragraph 12.3.2 the word, "The" and substitute the words:

.1 "Subject to paragraph 3.14.1, the...".

END OF SECTION

01 00 01.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - NNDSB

Page 1


217073

February 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS .1 Instructions to Bidders, Division 00, Section 00 21 12. .2 Tender Form , Division 00, Section 00 41 10. .3 Canadian Construction Document (CCDC 2) 2008, Stipulated Price Contract, Division 00, Section 00 52

13. .4 Supplementary Definitions, Division 00, Section 00 56 13. .5 Supplementary Articles of Agreement, Division 00, Section 00 73 01. .6 Supplementary General Conditions, Division 00, Section 00 73 02.

1.2 CONTRACT SECURITY .1 Contractor shall acquire at their expense the following bonds:

.1 50% Performance Bond

.2 50% Labour and Materials Bond .2 Submit required Bonds prior to commencing work on site. .3 Bonds shall be issued by a surety company acceptable to the Consultant and kept in force until

expiration of the Contract.

1.3 CASH ALLOWANCES .1 Refer to GC4.1. .2 All of the following allowances are intended to cover the cost of the items listed, including provincial

sales taxes, delivery, duty, levies, etc. but do not include the Harmonized Sales Tax. .3 Include the sum of $25,000 as an architectural general contingency allowance to be expended as later

directed by the Consultant. Refer to GC4.2. .4 Include the sum of $25,000 as a mechanical general contingency allowance to be expended as later

directed by the Consultant. Refer to GC4.2. .5 Include the sum of $10,000 as an electrical general contingency allowance to be expended as later

directed by the Consultant. Refer to GC4.2. .6 Include the sum of $25,000 for the supply and installation of new window coverings as later directed

by the Consultant. .7 Include the sum of $5,000 for re-keying of existing interior locks as later directed by the Consultant .8 Include the sum of $10,000 for third party testing and inspection services related to asbestos

abatement to be provided by the Owner's environmental consultant.

1.4 APPROVALS AND PERMITS .1 The Work is subject to the approval, inspection, by-laws and regulations of all municipal, provincial,

federal and other authorities having jurisdiction. .2 The Contractor shall obtain and pay the fees for all approvals and permits required for the Work.

Refer to Supplementary General Conditions - Section 00 73 02, GC 10.2.2. .3 Where the Ontario Building Code is referenced, it shall mean the consolidated version of the 2012

Ontario Building Code Act containing the Building Code Act and Ontario Regulation 332/12 (O.Reg. 332/12).


Page 2


217073

February 2018

1.5 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT .1 Payments on this Contract to be made by the Owner in accordance with Supplementary General GC

-5.2 - Application for Progress Payment. .2 Submit breakdown of the contract price in detail as directed by Consultant and aggregating the total

contract amount. .3 Submit progress claim showing breakdown of cost of work done to date in accordance with approved

cost breakdown format. .4 The breakdown shall include a separate line item with a value of $1,000.00 as a deposit for

borrowed keys. This line item will not be paid until Total Completion of the project has been achieved and the Owner’s Designee (Steve Sutton) has confirmed that all borrowed keys have been returned. If keys are not returned within 30 days after Total Completion, the Contractor forfeits the deposit to the Owner who will utilize these funds for re-keying of the building.

.5 Holdback procedure shall be in accordance with Construction Lien Act R.S.O. 1990.

.6 Payment will be made by the Owner to the Contractor by electronic fund transfer (EFT/direct deposit) method only.

1.6 SCHEDULES .1 Submit Construction Progress Schedule within 10 days after award of Contract. .2 Submit 4 copies, 3 copies to be retained by Consultant. .3 Consultant will review schedule and return reviewed copy within 10 days after receipt. .4 Interim reviews of work progress based on work schedule will be conducted as decided by Consultant

and schedule updated by Contractor in conjunction with and to approval of Consultant.

1.7 SUBMITTALS .1 Administrative:

.1 Submit to Consultant submittals listed for review. Submit with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence so as to not cause delay in the Work. Allow two weeks for Consultant's review.

.2 Work affected by submittal shall not proceed until review is complete.

.3 Review submittals prior to submission to Consultant. This review represents that necessary requirements have been determined and verified, or will be, and that each submittal has been checked and co-ordinated with requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.

.4 Verify that field measurements and affected adjacent Work are co-ordinated. .2 Shop Drawings and Product Data:

.1 Refer to GC 3.10.

.2 'Shop Drawings' means drawings, diagrams, performance charts, brochures and other data which are to be provided by Contractor to illustrate details of a portion of the Work.

.3 Indicate materials, methods of construction and attachment or anchorage, erection diagrams, connections, explanatory notes and other information necessary for completion of Work.

.4 Adjustments made on shop drawings by Consultant are not intended to change Contract Price.

.5 Make changes in shop drawings as Consultant may require.

.6 Submit four (4) sets of shop drawings prints for each requirement requested in specification Sections and as Consultant may reasonably request.

.7 Submit 4 copies of product data sheets or brochures for requirements requested in specification Sections and as Consultant may reasonably request where shop drawings will not be prepared due to standardized manufacture of product.


Page 3


217073

February 2018

.3 Samples: .1 Submit for review, samples in duplicate as requested in respective specification Sections. .2 Deliver samples prepaid to Consultant's business address, clearly and permanently marked with

Contractor's name, project, and specification section.

1.8 DOCUMENTATION REQUIRED BEFORE CONSTRUCTION START .1 Prior to construction start, submit the following:

.1 An executed construction contract.

.2 Proof of liability and fire insurance, with provisions preventing unilateral cancellation.

.3 Specified bonds.

.4 Proof that all building permits have been issued.

.5 Breakdown of contract price.

.6 Schedules required.

.7 Certificate of good standing from the Worker's Safety Insurance Board (WSIB).

.8 “Notice of Project " Application to the Ministry of Labour.

1.9 QUALITY CONTROL .1 Refer to GC2.3. .2 Provide a system of quality control to ensure that the minimum standards specified herein are

attained. .3 Bring to the attention of the Consultant any defects in work or departures from the Contract

Documents which may occur during construction. The Consultant will decide upon corrective actions and state his recommendations in writing.

.4 The Consultant's general review during construction and inspection and testing by dependent inspection and testing agencies reporting to the Architect are both undertaken to inform the Owner of the Contractor's performance and shall in no way augment the Contractor's quality control or relieve him of contractual responsibility.

1.10 PROTECTION AND SAFETY .1 Comply with requirements of all Acts and Regulations with respect to health and safety including

Occupational Health and Safety Act, R.S.O. 1980 Chapter 321 (as amended) and Regulations for Construction Projects (as amended) made thereunder; and Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) Regulation, Ontario Regulation 644/88 including the following: .1 Before commencement of Work, and throughout Contract, maintain on Site, and readily

accessible to all those who may be exposed to hazardous materials, a list of all hazardous materials proposed for use on Site or Workplace together with current Materials Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

.2 Ensure hazardous materials used and/or supplied on Site are labelled in accordance with WHMIS requirements.

.3 Provide detailed written procedures for safe handling, storage and use of such hazardous materials including special precautions, safe clean-up and disposal procedures. Conform to Environmental Protection Act for disposal requirements.

.4 Ensure that those who handle, and/or are exposed to, hazardous materials are fully instructed and trained in accordance with WHMIS requirements.

.2 Work required to be undertaken near occupied spaces must be coordinated with the Consultant and, the Owner.


Page 4


217073

February 2018

.3 Contractor must provide for safe use of the facilities by the staff throughout the duration of the contract, including the provision of protective barriers and hoarding to separate the work area from occupied areas and to protect public access and egress from the building and on exterior walkways around building.

.4 Contractor’s Health and Safety Policy .1 Contractor shall provide written confirmation that all workers employed by the Contractor have

obtained health and safety training including WHMIS training specified under 10.0-1.4. .2 Contractor shall retain on site a copy of its health and safety manual identified in Section 00 21

12 Instructions to Bidders. Make readily available to all employees, sub-trades and Owner/Consultant.

.3 Comply with the Owner’s “Hot Work " protocols and obtain "Hot Work Permits" per the attached Owner’s guidelines and sample permit.

1.11 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS .1 Installation/Removal

.1 Provide construction facilities and temporary controls in order to execute the work expeditiously.

.2 Remove from site all such work after use. .2 Guard Rails and Barricades

.1 Provide secure, rigid guard railings and barricades around openings as required by governing authorities.

.3 Weather Enclosures .1 Provide weathertight closures to unfinished openings in a manner to maintain building security.

.4 Site Storage/Loading .1 Refer to GC3.11. .2 Confine the Work and the operations of employees so as to not unreasonably encumber the

premises with products. .3 Do not load or permit to be loaded any part of the Work with a weight or force that will

endanger the Work. .4 Restore damaged site finishes (e.g. paving, sodding, landscaping) caused by Work of this

contract. .5 Project Cleanliness

.1 Maintain the Work in tidy condition, free from accumulation of waste products and debris.

.2 Remove waste material and debris from site and deposit in waste container at end of each working day. Remove waste from container as required.

.3 Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work. Maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations.

.6 Power, Water, Light and Heat .1 The Owner will provide and pay for a potable water supply for use by the Contractor. .2 The Owner will provide and pay for electrical power supply for normal hand tools, temporary

lighting and similar equipment for use by the Contractor. .3 The Contractor shall provide and pay for temporary lighting required to complete the Work. .4 The Contractor shall provide and pay temporary heating equipment required in addition to the

building’s primary heat source as required to complete the Work.


Page 5


217073

February 2018

.7 Toilet Facilities .1 The Contractor may use the existing toilet facilities, provided they are maintained in a clean

condition during their use.

1.12 SUPERINTENDENT .1 Employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Work

site at all times while work is being performed. .2 The superintendent shall be satisfactory to the Consultant and shall not be changed except for good

reasons and only then after consultation with, and agreement by, the Consultant. .3 The superintendent shall represent the Contractor at the Work site and directions given to him by the

Consultant shall beheld to have been given to the Contractor. .4 Superintendent shall be deemed not satisfactory and changes or additions to superintendent may be

demanded when: .1 Control, organization and co-ordination of the Work is not satisfactory, or .2 The quality of the Work does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, or .3 The directions given in accordance with the Contract Documents are not followed, or .4 The progress of the Work is behind the agreed schedule.

.5 Superintendent to co-ordinate work of all trades and ensure prompt and continuous prosecution of work.

1.13 PROJECT COORDINATION .1 Coordinate progress of the Work, progress schedules, submittals, use of site, temporary utilities, and

construction facilities. .2 Coordinate work, including work of subtrades. Where conflicts between requirements of different

Sections occur, notify Consultant for direction. .3 Check and verify dimensions, construction and equipment locations before setting out the work and

report any discrepancies to the Consultant. The Contractor shall be held responsible for errors resulting from his failure to comply with this requirement.

1.14 DOCUMENTS REQUIRED .1 Maintain at job site, one copy each of following:

.1 Contract drawings.

.2 Specifications.

.3 Addenda.

.4 Reviewed shop drawings.

.5 Site Instructions.

.6 Notices of Change.

.7 Change orders.

.8 Other modifications to Contract.

.9 Field test reports.

.10 Copy of approved work schedule.

.11 Manufacturer's installation and application instructions.


Page 6


217073

February 2018

1.15 PROJECT MEETINGS .1 Prior to work commencing, the Consultant will schedule and administer a pre-construction meeting to

be attended by the Contractor, major sub-contractors, site supervisor, and Owner’s Designee(s). Agenda to include the following: .1 Appointment of official representative of participants in the Work. .2 Schedule of Work, progress scheduling. .3 Schedule of submission of shop drawings, samples, colour chips. .4 Requirements for temporary facilities, site sign, offices, storage sheds, utilities, fences. .5 Site security. .6 Contemplated change notices, change orders, procedures, approvals required, mark-up

percentages permitted, time extensions, overtime, administrative requirements. .7 Review of pre-construction documentation.

.2 The Consultant may schedule additional meetings if project conditions warrant.

.3 Consultant will record minutes, including significant proceedings and decisions.

.4 Consultant will reproduce and distribute copies of minutes to meeting participants and affected parties not in attendance.

1.16 SETTING OUT OF WORK .1 Assume full responsibility for and execute complete layout of work to locations, lines and elevations

indicated. .2 Provide devices needed to lay out and construct work. .3 Supply such devices as straight edges and templates required to facilitate Consultant's review of work. .4 Supply stakes and other survey markers required for laying out work. .5 Protect existing survey markers.

1.17 ADDITIONAL DRAWINGS .1 Consultant may furnish additional drawings to assist proper execution of work. These drawings will

be issued for clarification only. Such drawings shall have same meaning and intent as if they were included with plans referred to in Contract documents.

1.18 SITE REVIEW .1 Refer to GC2.2 and 2.3. .2 No review by the Consultant shall relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations under the Contract or

shall be interpreted as being an acceptance of defective or improper work or material, which must in every case be removed and replaced properly or otherwise rectified in a satisfactory manner whenever discovered at any time.

1.19 CUTTING AND PATCHING .1 Approvals.

.1 Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: .1 Structural integrity of any element of Project. .2 Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. .3 Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. .4 Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. .5 Work of Owner or separate Contractor.


Page 7


217073

February 2018

.2 Inspection .1 Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during

cutting and patching. .2 After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of work. .3 Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

.3 Execution .1 Perform cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete the Work. .2 Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work. .3 Perform work to avoid damage to other work. .4 Prepare proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. .5 Employ original installer to perform cutting and patching for weather-exposed and

moisture-resistant elements, and sight-exposed surfaces. .6 Cut rigid materials using power saw or core drill. Pneumatic or impact tools not

allowed. .7 Restore work with new products in accordance with Contract Documents. .8 Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes; for continuous surfaces refinish to nearest

intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit.

1.20 COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION SCHEDULE .1 Time is of the essence in this contract. .2 Commence preparations for the Work immediately. .3 Work will be required to be undertaken and completed during the summer break which

commences on July 3rd, 2018. Attain Substantial Completion of the Work no later than August 24th, 2018. Undertaking of the work while classes are in session will not be permitted.

.4 Once the Work has commenced, work continuously towards completion. Periods of inactivity on site will not be permitted without prior consent of the Owner.

1.21 OPERATING / MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND RECORD DRAWINGS .1 Submit to the Consultant, 3 (three) copies of operating and maintenance manuals. .2 Manuals to contain operational information on equipment, cleaning and lubrication schedules, filters,

overhaul and adjustment schedules and similar maintenance information. Instructions in this manual shall be in simple language so as to guide the Owner in the proper operation maintenance of building components.

.3 Bind contents in a three-ring, hard covered, plastic jacketed binder. Organize contents into applicable categories of work, parallel to specification Sections.

.4 In addition to information specified, include the following: .1 Title sheet, labeled "Operating & Maintenance instructions", containing project name and date. .2 List of names, addresses and phone number of subcontractors and suppliers who can effect

repair of maintenance on equipment. .3 List of contents. .4 Final shop drawings and product data of equipment. .5 Full description of building systems and operation. .6 Warranties


Page 8


217073

February 2018

.5 Project Record Drawings: .1 After award of Contract the Consultant will provide a set of drawings for the purpose of

maintaining record drawings. Accurately and neatly record deviations from Contract Documents caused by site conditions and changes ordered by the Consultant. Provide 1 (one) paper copy of final project record drawings.

.2 Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal work until required information is recorded.

.3 Legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including: .1 Measure depths of elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum. .2 Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,

referenced to permanent surface improvements. .3 Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances, referenced to visible and

accessible features of construction. .4 Field changes of dimension and detail. .5 Changes made by Change Orders and Site Instructions. .6 Details not on original Contract Drawings.

1.22 PROJECT CLOSEOUT .1 Final Cleaning

.1 Refer to GC 3.14.

.2 Prior to final acceptance, review final cleaning with Owner representative and Architect.

.3 When the Work is Substantially Performed, remove surplus products, tools, temporary facilities, construction machinery and equipment not required for performance of remaining Work.

.4 Remove waste materials and debris from site at regularly scheduled times or dispose of as directed by Consultant. Do not burn waste materials on site, unless approved by Consultant.

.5 Remove dirt and other disfigurations from exterior surfaces. .2 Documents

.1 Collect reviewed submittals and assemble documents executed by Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers.

.2 Submit material two weeks minimum prior to Application for Substantial Performance.

.3 Submit a final statement of accounting giving total adjusted Contract Price, previous payments, and monies remaining due.

.4 Consultant will issue a final change order reflecting approved adjustments to Contract Price not previously made.

.3 Inspection/Takeover Procedures .1 Prior to application for certificate of Substantial Performance, carefully inspect the Work and

ensure it is complete, that major and minor construction deficiencies are complete, defects are corrected and building is clean and in condition for occupancy. Notify Consultant in writing, of satisfactory completion of the Work and request an inspection.

.2 During Consultant inspection, a list of deficiencies and defects will be tabulated. Correct same.

.3 When Consultant considers deficiencies and defects have been corrected and it appears requirements of Contract have been performed, make application for Certificate of Substantial Performance.


Page 9


217073

February 2018

.4 A list of deficiencies still outstanding will be established. If the contract has been Substantially Performed in accordance with the legal requirements of the Construction Lien Act, all required submittals and occupancy certificates have been received, and the provisions of the required completion schedule have been met, a Certificate of Substantial Performance will be issued.

.5 After Certificate of Substantial Performance is issued, arrange and pay for publication of Substantial Performance in acceptable trade publication. Forward proof of publication to Consultant.

.6 Within two weeks after Certificate of Substantial Performance is issued, submit schedule for completion of deficiencies and warranties, and guarantees fully executed and notarized.

.4 Required Documentation for Project Takeover: The following are required at project takeover (or prior thereto as specified elsewhere): .1 Consultant's certificates. .2 Warranties .3 List of subtrades who will handle warranty work under the terms of the guarantee. .4 Maintenance materials specified. .5 Maintenance manuals and project record drawings.

END OF SECTION

Hot Work Permit Page 1

A Health and Safety Guideline for Your Workplace

INTRODUCTION: The Near North District School Board must protect against fire created by construction or open flame work. The use of welding, grinding, and abrasive cutting equipment is a cause of many fires and explosions in workplaces across Ontario. Where such work is not the part of day to day operations of the Board, a HOT WORK PERMIT system must be used. OBJECTIVES: The objective of the HOT WORK PERMIT is to ensure that:

Work is authorized by a competent person Potential hazards are identified, isolated, removed, protected or disconnected as

appropriate The operator is trained to perform the work safely Appropriate protective clothing and equipment is used Appropriate warning and fire fighting equipment is on hand

DEFINITIONS: Hot work Any activity that could produce flames, sparks, slag or other hot fragments that

might act as an ignition source to flammable materials in the area. HOT WORK also includes any activity that could generate sufficient smoke or heat to activate a fire alarm detection system. It includes, but is not limited to: brazing, cutting, grinding, torch soldering, pipe thawing, torch applied roofing and welding.

Fire Watch A visual inspection of the surrounding work area for smoldering or flaming

ignitions during and after HOT WORK. ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES: Facility and Maintenance Supervisors 1. To ensure that all HOT WORK performed by Contractors, maintenance or custodial staff

within their area of responsibility is conducted in a safe manner.

Hot Work Permit


2. To ensure that contractors, custodial or maintenance staff who are conducting HOT WORK are competent in doing so and use a permit system.

3. To ensure that the above-mentioned Board employees are trained in HOT WORK procedures

and have adequate quantities of permits. 4. Pre-screen contractors prior to work. Ensure they have a HOT WORK permit system and

carry suitable and sufficient liability insurance coverage. 5. To ensure that all HOT WORK performed by contractors within their area of responsibility is

conducted in a safe manner. 6. To ensure that a HOT WORK permit system is being utilized by the contractor. 7. To ensure that contractors who are conducting the HOT WORK is competent in doing so. 8. To maintain a copy of the completed permit on site within the custodian’s office. Used

permits shall be filed and maintained for at least one year after the completion of the work. 9. Persons not involved in the hot work should be removed from the area or otherwise protected

from the activities. Plant Manager 1. Pre-screen contractors prior to work. Ensure they have a HOT WORK permit system and

carry suitable and sufficient liability insurance coverage. Custodial and Maintenance Staff 1. To follow all safety and HOT WORK procedures. 2. When performing HOT WORK, complete the HOT WORK permit. 3. To maintain and file HOT WORK permits in the custodian office at the site where the work

was performed and a copy with the lead custodian at the secondary schools. Contractor: 1. The contractor will verify that all hot work equipment is in proper working order and in a fire

safe condition. 2. Any contractor equipment or material that is to be stored in the facility overnight must be

properly secured in an area designated by the Facility or Maintenance Supervisor. 3. Contractors must provide a copy of and follow all necessary precautions in their hot work

program.


Health and Safety Officer: 1. Will maintain additional hot work permits and provide additional copies upon request. PROCEDURE: 1. Before conducting any HOT WORK, the operator shall determine if there is a safer way of

doing the work without the use of any heat or flame-producing device. 2. Prior to conducting HOT WORK, the operator must contact their direct supervisor indicating

the scope of work and the location where the work is to be performed. 3. The operator must check to see that all aspects of the proposed work meets all safety

measures as indicated on the HOT WORK PERMIT. 4. The operator must complete, sign and post the HOT WORK PERMIT in plain view. These

permits should be posted in designated Hot Work Permit pockets. 5. The operator or designate must conduct a fire watch during the work (lunch and breaks) and

for thirty (30) minutes after the work is completed. The individual who is conducting the fire watch shall have a fire extinguisher readily available and trained in its use.

Fire watch is required when:

a) combustible material in construction or contents is closer than 35 feet to the point of operation

b) combustibles are more than 35 feet away but are easily ignited by sparks c) wall or floor openings within 35 feet expose combustible materials in adjacent areas

including concealed spaces in walls or floors d) combustible materials are adjacent to the opposite side of metal partitions, walls,

ceilings, or roofs and are likely to be ignited by heat conduction or radiation. 6. The operator must file the HOT WORK PERMIT(S) within the custodian’s office at the

location where the work was performed and a copy with the lead custodian at the secondary school.

7. CONTRACTOR MUST PROVIDE A COPY OF AND FOLLOW ALL NECESSARY

PRECAUTIONS IN THEIR HOT WORK PROGRAM.

HOT WORK PERMIT

01 30 10 ALTERATION PROCEDURES

Page 1


217073

February 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Conform to Ontario Building Code, Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act and all other Standards

and Regulations noted. .2 All work performed and materials used shall be of the same standard of quality as that of the existing

finished building as a minimum. .3 Any welding shall be performed by Welders certified in accordance with CSA W47, and shall conform to

CSA W59.

1.2 SECURITY .1 Make provision to maintain building security in a manner acceptable to the Owner during construction

and after normal working hours.

1.3 ACCESS .1 Contractor's access to the work and storage space shall be as agreed between the Owner and

Contractor.

1.4 SCHEDULING .1 The Contractor shall schedule his work and the sequence of operations in cooperation with the Owner

and Consultant and phasing specified in Section 01 00 01 General Requirements, 1.20 Commencement and Completion Schedule. Work shall proceed in strict accordance with the agreed upon and approved schedule.

.2 Hours of Work: .1 While classes are in session

.1 Work is not permitted. .2 Summer break (July 3rd to August 24th, 2018)

.1 The facilities will be staffed by custodians performing summer maintenance on a periodic basis throughout the summer but will be otherwise vacant. Hours of work are generally unlimited during the summer break. The Owner will provide the Contractor with keys and security access code as required.

.3 Overtime work, weekend work, etc. is included in the contract and shall be provided as required to meet the completion schedule specified in Section 01 00 01 General Requirements.

.4 The building and site shall remain open throughout the course of construction and allow the Owner's custodial staff to perform routine summer maintenance throughout the duration of the Work. Co-ordinate scheduling of work and sequencing of areas to be used for construction with the Owner before work begins.

.3 Utility and service outages shall be kept to a minimum and will be permitted only with written permission of the Owner. Make outage requests at least 48 hours before date of proposed outage. State in request hours of outage.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Suppress all dust and dirt. Prevent the occurrence of unsanitary conditions, flooding or leaking. .2 Do not allow dirt, debris or discarded materials to accumulate on site. Remove promptly each day.


Page 2


217073

February 2018

.3 Obtain written confirmation from the Owner that services to be abandoned, removed or cut have been properly and safely shut off, capped or sealed.

.4 If asbestos or silica type insulation or fireproofing are encountered during alteration work cease work in the specific area at once and notify the Consultant immediately. Await Consultant's written instructions before proceeding.

.5 Take extreme care when removing asbestos or silica board fireproofings. Comply strictly with health and safety regulations. Bag material and dispose of in accordance with regulations. Enforce use of breathing masks during cleaning operations.

1.6 DEMOLITION .1 Cutting, removing and demolition shall be performed so as not to cut or remove more than is

necessary or to damage adjacent work. .2 Do not let piled material endanger structure or persons at any time or create unsanitary conditions. .3 Where demolition work involves cutting into any part of the building structure, materials or finishes

which are to be extended, added to or joined to new work, the cutting shall be performed by trades whose work is encountered.

.4 Construction, furnishings and articles of a private or historic nature which are encountered during demolition shall be turned over to the Owner, or they shall be disposed of as the Owner directs for the specific item.

.5 Cut out and remove all those assemblies, materials or items indicated as being removed, abandoned or discarded on the drawings and promptly removed from the site if not wanted by Owner.

1.7 ALTERATIONS, CUTTING AND PROTECTION .1 Extent

.1 Cutting and removal work shall be performed so as not to cut or remove more than is necessary and so as not to damage adjacent work.

.2 Responsibility and Assignment to Trades .1 Contractor shall assign the work of moving, removal, cutting, patching and repair to trades

under his supervision so as to cause the least damage to each type of work encountered, and so as to return the building as much as possible to the appearance of new work.

.2 Patching of finish materials shall be assigned to mechanics skilled in the work of the finish trade involved.

.3 Protection .1 Protect remaining finishes, equipment and adjacent work from damage caused by cutting,

moving, removal and patching operations. Protect surfaces which will remain a part of the finished work.

.4 Debris .1 Remove debris promptly from the site each day. Removed material, except that listed or marked by

the Consultant for retention, becomes the property of the Contractor. Load removed material directly on trucks for removal from site. Dispose of removed material legally. Do not burn on site. Do not allow debris to enter sewers.

.2 Do not let piled material endanger structure.

.3 Suppress dust. Prevent the occurrence of unsanitary conditions, dirt or debris on the site and neighbouring property.

.4 Any salvaged items left over after completion of the Work shall be delivered to a place of storage designated by the Owner, or they shall be disposed of by the Contractor as directed by Owner.


Page 3


217073

February 2018

1.8 PATCHING, EXTENDING AND MATCHING .1 Skill

.1 Patch and extend existing work using skilled mechanics who are capable of matching the existing quality or workmanship. The quality of patched or extended work shall not be less than that specified in the Sections of the product and execution Specifications which follow these General Requirements.

.2 Patching .1 In areas where any portion of an existing finished surface is damaged, lifted, stained or

otherwise made or found to be imperfect, patch or replace the imperfect portion of the surface with matching material.

.2 Do not incorporate salvaged or used material in new construction, except where small quantities of finish material which are difficult to match or duplicate are approved for patching or extending purposes by the Consultant.

.3 Provide adequate support or substrate for patching of finishes.

.4 If the imperfect surface was painted or coated, repaint or recoat the patched portion in such a way that uniform colour and texture over the entire surface results.

.5 If the surrounding surface cannot be matched, repaint or recoat the entire surface. .3 Quality

.1 In the Sections of the Specifications which follow these General Requirements, no concerted attempt has been made to describe each of the various existing products that must be used to patch, match, extend or replace existing work. Obtain all such products in time to complete the Work on Schedule. Such products shall be provided in quality which is in no way inferior to the existing products.

.2 The quality of the products that exist in the building, as apparent during prebid site visits, shall serve as the minimum Specification requirement for strength, appearance and other characteristics.

.4 Transitions .1 Where new work abuts or finishes flush with existing work, make the transition as smooth and

workmanlike as possible. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance so as to make the patch or transition invisible to the eye at a distance of one metre.

.2 In cases of extreme change of level (50 mm or more), obtain instructions from the Consultant as to method of making transition. Either stepping, bulkheading, encasement, ramping, sloping or change of transition line shall be employed, or a combination of these, as directed in each case by the Consultant.

.5 Matching .1 Restore existing work that is damaged during construction to a condition equal to its condition

at the time of the start of the Work. .6 Overall Requirement That the Work be Complete

.1 Where a product or type of construction occurs in the existing building, and is not specified as a part of the new work, provide such products or types of construction as needed to patch, extend or match the existing work.


Page 4


217073

February 2018

.2 These specifications will generally not describe existing products or standards of execution, nor will they enumerate products which are not a part of the new construction. The existing product is its own specification.

.3 The presence of any product or type of construction in the old work shall cause its patching, extending or matching to be performed, as necessary to make the work complete and consistent, to identical standards of quality.

1.9 REPAIR .1 Replace work damaged in the course of alterations, except at areas approved by the Consultant for

repair. .2 Where full removal of extensive amounts of almost-suitable work would be needed to replace

damaged portions, then filling, spackling, straightening and similar repair techniques, followed by full painting or other finishing, will be permitted.

.3 If the repaired work is not brought up to the standard for new work, the Consultant will direct that it be cut out and replaced with new work at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.10 CLEANING .1 Each Successive Trade

.1 As the trade finishes its work on each part of the alterations work and related new work, it shall clean up its work area and make work surfaces ready for the work of the succeeding trades.

.2 Spillage, overspray, collections of dust or debris, damage to Owner-occupied spaces shall be cleaned or remedied immediately by the responsible trade.

.2 Each Area as It is Completed .1 As soon as work in each area of the alterations is complete, clean up all surfaces, remove

equipment, salvage and debris and return in condition suitable for use by the Owner as quickly as possible.

.3 Prior to final acceptance, review final cleaning with Owner's representative and the Consultant.

END OF SECTION

06 10 13 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING

Page 1


217073

February 2018

Section 06 10 13 - Wood Blocking and Curbing

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Blocking in wall openings. .2 Wood furring and grounds. .3 Telephone and electrical panel back boards. .4 Concealed wood blocking for support of toilet and bath accessories.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 08 51 13 - Aluminum Windows : Window openings to receive wood blocking.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 CSA-O141-05 (R2009) - Softwood Lumber. .2 CSA-O151-09 - Canadian Softwood Plywood. .3 APA (The Engineered Wood Association) - Product Guide Grades and Specifications. .4 CANPLY (Canadian Plywood Association) - Canadian Plywood Handbook. .5 NLGA (National Lumber Grades Authority) - Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, 2010

edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION .1 Installation Data: Provide application instructions.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Lumber Products: Graded and stamped to NLGA requirements. .2 Plywood Products: Certified and graded to CANPLY requirements.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MATERIALS .1 Lumber: NLGA (Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber).

.1 CSA-O141, softwood SPF species, S4S, grade no. 2 or better.

.2 19% maximum moisture content. .2 Plywood: CSA-O151, Sheathing Grade; unsanded. .3 Telephone and Electrical Panel Boards: Plywood. .4 Furring, blocking, nailing strips, grounds, rough bucks, cants, curbs, fascia backing and sleepers:

UseS4S material, S/P/F species, NLGA, Standard or better grade, grade marked S-Dry, in standard boardsizes as indicated on Drawings

2.2 FASTENERS .1 Fasteners and Anchors:

06 10 13 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING

Page 2


217073

February 2018

.1 Screws and Nails: Galvanized steel; type suitable for application.

.2 Anchors: Galvanized steel; toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry, expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete bolt or ballistic fastener for anchorages to steel.

.3 Galvanized Coating for Exterior Work: Hot dip galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 FRAMING .1 Set members level and plumb, in correct position. .2 Place horizontal members, crown side up. .3 Construct curb members of single pieces. .4 Space furring at 400 mm on centre.

3.2 SHEATHING .1 Secure sheathing to framing members with ends over firm bearing and staggered. .2 Install telephone and electrical panel back boards with plywood sheathing material where required.

Size the back board by [300 mm ] beyond size of electrical panel.

END OF SECTION

06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY

Page 1


217073

February 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Finish carpentry items. .2 Hardware and attachment accessories. .3 Provide miscellaneous wood trims, panel boards for electrical, telephone and other equipment. .4 Bed thresholds in sealant as shown on Drawings and as specified in Section 07 92 00. .5 Receive and install: Steel Frames from Section 08 11 13. .6 Receive and install: Wood Doors from Section 08 14 16. .7 Receive and install: Hardware from Section 08 71 00 - Finish Hardware. .8 Receive and install: Division 10 specialties. .9 Receive and install: Owner supplied washroom accessories.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 06 10 13 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Grounds and support framing. .2 Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. .3 Section 08 11 13 - Standard Metal Doors and Frames. .4 Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors. .5 Section 08 71 00 - Finish Hardware .6 Section 08 51 13 - Aluminum Windows. .7 Division 10: Specialties.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ASTM E84-13a - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. .2 ASTM D5116-10 Standard Guide for Small-Scale Environmental Chamber Determinations of Organic

Emissions From Indoor Materials/Products. .3 CSA-O141-05 (R2009) - Softwood Lumber. .4 CSA-O151-09 - Canadian Softwood Plywood. .5 AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS) – 2nd Edition, 2014. .6 CHPVA (Canadian Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association) - Official Grading Rules for Canadian

Hardwood Plywood-2010. .7 NLGA (National Lumber Grades Authority) - Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, 2010

edition. .8 NHLA (National Hardwood Lumber Association).

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS .1 Coordination:

.1 Coordinate with other work having a direct bearing on work of this section.

.2 Coordinate the work with electrical and plumbing rough-ins, installation of associated and adjacent components, and finishes.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Perform work to AWMAC Premium quality.


Page 2


217073

February 2018

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION .1 Protect work from moisture damage.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 ADHESIVE .1 Adhesives are to be Low VOC content, unless the application does not recommend it for a specific use. .2 Adhesive: to CSA O112 Series and ASTM D2832; Polyvinyl acetate adhesive. .3 Adhesive for High Humidity Areas: to CSA O112 Series, Type I and II water resistant area formaldehyde

adhesive. .4 Adhesive for locations exposed to weather: to CSA O112 Series, Class I - Type I, or Class II - Type I

phenol or resorcinol resin adhesive. .5 Contact Adhesive: water base type. .6 Wall Adhesive: solvent release, cartridge type, compatible with wall substrate, capable of achieving

durable bond. .7 Adhesive: Type recommended by laminate manufacturer and AWMAC to suit application.

2.2 FASTENERS .1 Fasteners: Unfinished steel, unless otherwise noted in Drawings, of size and type to suit application. .2 Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded, galvanized steel. .3 Galvanized Coating for Interior High Humidity Areas or Exterior: Hot dip galvanized to ASTM

A153/A153M.

2.3 ACCESSORIES .1 Lumber for Shimming, Blocking: as specified in Section 06 10 13. .2 Solid Surfacing: as specified in Section 06 61 00. .3 Primer: Alkyd primer sealer type. .4 Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish colour.

2.4 FABRICATION .1 Fabricate to AWMAC Premium standards. .2 Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. .3 When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide

trim for scribing and site cutting. .4 Use running members in greatest lengths obtainable. .5 Machine dressed wood shall be slow fed using sharp cutters and finished work shall be free from drag,

feathers, slivers, or roughness of any kind. Remove machine marks by sanding. .6 In finished work machine sand exposed surfaces in shop and hand sand on job site to even smooth

surface, fee from scratches, ready for finishing. .7 Frame materials with tight joints rigidly held in place. Use glue blocks where necessary. .8 Assemble work in shop and deliver ready for installation, as far as practicable. Leave ample

allowance for fitting and scribing on job. .9 Take care to prevent opening up of glue lines in finished work. .10 Design construction methods for the expansion and contraction of materials. .11 Conceal joints and connections wherever possible. Locate prominent joints where directed by

Consultant. Intermediate joints between supports not permitted.


Page 3


217073

February 2018

.12 Mortise and tenon joints shall be glued and pinned.

.13 Glue, blind screw or nail all work unless otherwise specified. Where surface fasteners are not possible , confirm locations with Consultant, set nails and plug surface screws with wood plugs of material to match surface. Conceal nailing of tongued and grooved work.

.14 Accurately scribe, cope and mitre members where required.

.15 Finished work shall be free from bruises, blemishes, mineral marks, knots, shakes, and other defects and shall be selected for colour and grain.

.16 Take field dimensions and fabricate work to suit field dimensions.

.17 Fasten wood nailers, blocking solidly to adjacent materials in true planes.

.18 Check access clearance at site before assembling large units or components in factory for shipment to site.

.19 Provide all blocking coming in direct contact with millwork in accordance with applicable provision set forth herein.

.20 Comply with glue manufacturer's recommendations for lumber moisture content, glue shelf life, pot life, working life, mixing, spreading, assembly time, time under pressure and ambient temperature.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify that field measurements are as indicated on the approved Shop Drawings. .2 Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. .3 Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to

receive this work.

3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Install work to AWMAC Architectural Woodworks Standards, Premium Quality Standard. .2 Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. .3 Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1 mm . Do not use

additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. .4 Install all carpentry and millwork shown on drawings or as specified for completion of the work.

Cooperate with other trades in installing items supplied by other sections. .5 Set and secure all materials and components in place, rigid plumb and square. .6 Install all work in accordance with the best practice of skilled craftspeople specialized in work specified

and to the requirements of other trades. .7 Be responsible for methods of construction and for ensuring that materials are rigidly and securely

attached and will not be loosened by work of other trades. .8 Joints made on site shall be equal in quality and workmanship to joints made in the shop. .9 Apply water resistant building paper or bituminous coating over wood framing members in contact

with masonry or cementitious construction. .10 Install hardware and all specialties listed in Division 08 and Division 10 as per manufacturer's

recommendation or as specified in Division 08 and Division 10. .11 On completion, remove manufacturers identification marks and clean surfaces. .12 Install with concealed fasteners using glue, blind screw or nail all work unless otherwise specified.

Where surface fasteners are not possible , confirm locations with Consultant, set nails and plug surface screws with wood plugs of material to match surface. Conceal nailing of tongued and grooved work.

.13 Install hardware to manufacturer's written instructions supplied by Section 06 41 11.


Page 4


217073

February 2018

.14 Apply solid surfacing as specified in Section 06 61 00.

.15 Install hollow metal doors and frames as specified in Section 08 11 13.

.16 Install wood doors as specified in Section 08 14 16.

.17 Install finish hardware as specified in Section 08 71 00.

.18 Seal gaps and joints as specified in Section 07 92 00.

3.3 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING .1 Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth. .2 Site Finishing: Refer to Section 09 91 10. .3 Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with cementitious

materials.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES .1 Maximum Variation from True Position: 1.5 mm . .2 Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1 mm .

END OF SECTION

07 27 00 AIR BARRIERS

Page 1


217073

February 2018

Section 07 27 00 - Air Barriers

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Air leakage criteria for primary air seal building enclosure materials and assemblies. .2 Materials and installation methods supplementing primary and other air seal materials and

assemblies. .3 Air seal materials to connect and seal openings, joints, and junctions between other air seal materials

and assemblies.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Sealant materials and installation techniques. .2 Section 08 41 13 - Aluminum Framed Entrances And Storefronts: Aluminum entrances and store

fronts, functioning as a primary air seal. .3 Section 08 51 13 - Aluminum Windows.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 CAN/ULC S710.1-11: Standard for Thermal Insulation - Bead Applied One-Component Polyurethane

Air Sealant Foam, Part 1: Material Specification. .2 CAN/ULC S710.2-11: Standard for Thermal Insulation - Bead Applied One-Component Polyurethane

Air Sealant Foam, Part 2: Application. .3 CAN/ULC S711.1-11: Standard for Thermal Insulation - Bead Applied Two-Component Polyurethane

Air Sealant Foam, Part 1: Material Specification. .4 CAN/ULC S711.2-11: Standard for Thermal Insulation - Bead Applied Two-Component Polyurethane

Air Sealant Foam, Part 2: Application. .5 CAN/ULC S741-R2016: Standard for Air Barrier Materials - Specification. .6 CAN/ULC S742-12: Standard for Air Barrier Assemblies - Specification.

1.4 DEFINITIONS .1 Air Barrier: A continuous network of materials and joints providing air tightness, with adequate

strength and stiffness to not deflect excessively under air pressure differences, to which it will be subjected in service. It can be comprised of a single material or a combination of materials to achieve the performance requirements.



.2 Coordinate the work of this section with all sections referencing this section. .2 Pre-installation Meetings: Convene one (1) week before starting work of this section. .3 Sequencing: Sequence work to permit installation of materials in conjunction with all other related

air and vapour barrier materials and seals.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data: Provide data on material characteristics, performance criteria, limitations.


Page 2


217073

February 2018

1.7 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION .1 Installation Data: Manufacturer's special installation requirements, including preparation, installation

requirements and techniques, product storage and handling criteria.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Contractor Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this

section with minimum three (3) years documented experience.

1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the materials manufacturers before, during and

after installation.

1.10 WARRANTY .1 Provide a three (3) year warranty to include coverage for failure to meet specified requirements. .2 Warranty: Include coverage of installed sheet materials and accessories which fail to achieve air tight

seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 SHEET MATERIALS .1 Self-Adhering Vapour Permeable Air Barrier: CAN/CGSB 51.32 and ASTM E96, a tri-laminated woven

high density polyethylene to surface film with silcone release film, 0.6 mm thick, a maximum perm rating of 2875 ng/(Pa•s•sq m) , and maximum air leakage rate of 0.0025 L/s•m2 at 75 Pa. .1 Product: Product: Blueskin VP160, manufactured by Henry-Bakor Company. .2 Product: AirOutshield SA 280, manufactured by SRP Canada Inc. .3 Product: Sopraseal Stick VP, manufactured by Soprema Inc.

.2 Foam-In-Place Sealant (for use at window frames, door frames or penetrations in exterior assembly): .1 Foam-In-Place Sealant Type 1 (FS-1) (Windows, doors and operable components): to CAN/ULC

S710.1, low expansion, one component, semi-flexible soft, spray-applied polyurethane foam insulation, designed for low expansion around windows and doors. .1 Product: Zerodraft Foam Sealant, manufactured by Canam Building Envelope

Specialists. .2 Product: Great Stuff Pro Window & Door Insulating Foam Sealant, manufactured by

Dow Chemical Canada. .3 Product: IPF Green, manufactured by Rivenco Industries Ltd.

2.2 SEALANTS .1 Membrane and Flashing Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 35, Use NT, M, O, A, and I; single

component, capable of continuous water immersion, non-sagging type; Use Low VOC products wherever possible. .1 Elongation Capability: plus or minus 25%. .2 Service Temperature Range: -40 to 82 degrees C . .3 Shore A Hardness Range: 20 to 35.


Page 3


217073

February 2018

.4 Product: As recommended by manufacturer for compatibility with membrane products and specific application. Do not use polysulfide, polyurethane or silicone sealants in contact with bitumen based materials.

2.3 ACCESSORIES .1 Primers and Cleaners: As recommended by sheet material manufacturer. .2 Tape: Manufacturers recommended, UV resistant polypropylene, self adhering type, 75 mm wide,

compatible with sheet material. .3 Thru-Wall Flashing: As recommended by manufacturer for application. Coordinate materials of this

Section for interaction and tie-in with materials and assemblies of other Sections. .4 Attachments: Galvanized steel bars and anchors, or as recommended by the membrane

manufacturer for compatibility and suitability for the application.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the Work of this section.

3.2 PREPARATION .1 Remove loose or foreign matter which might impair adhesion of materials. .2 Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive membranes, adhesive and/or sealants to manufacturers

written instructions. .3 Allow concrete to cure for fourteen (14) days prior to installation of air or air/vapour barrier

membranes. .4 Fill joint or cracks in substrates per manufacturers recommendations for use with specified products. .5 Apply primer to surfaces indicated to receive self-adhering membranes as recommended by

manufacturer.

3.3 INSTALLATION .1 Provide air tight joints. .2 Seal Products completely around projections and penetrations. .3 Self Adhering Sheet Membranes:

.1 Fully adhere membranes to primed substrate, from low points to high points, to manufacturer's recommended overlaps. Membranes should be installed shingled to promote drainage.

.2 Roll membrane with weighted roller wrapped in resilient material.

.3 Stagger end laps.

.4 Eliminate wrinkles, gaps, bubbles, pockets, and fishmouths.

.5 Apply transition membranes at openings and transitional connections.

.6 Leave sufficient amount of excess membrane material over the top of parapet walls and around the perimeter of openings for tie-in by others.

.7 Cut membrane neatly around penetrations. Seal with air/vapour barrier sealant or mastic.

.8 Seal around perimeter or dissimilar materials to ensure complete and continuous seal. .4 Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when

sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.


Page 4


217073

February 2018

3.4 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK .1 Do not permit adjacent work to damage work of this section.

END OF SECTION

07 46 16 PREFORMED METAL SIDING

Page 1


217073

February 2018

Section 07 46 16 - Preformed Metal Siding

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Preformed metal siding system for walls with Z-girt framing, related flashings and accessory

components.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 07 27 00 - Air Barriers. .2 Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim. .3 Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ASTM A653/A653M-13 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron

Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .2 ASTM E84-13a - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .1 Assembly of components includes preformed and prefinished metal siding system; site assembled.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS .1 Components: Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and

negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall. .2 Maximum Allowable Deflection of Panel: 1/90 of span. .3 Movement: Accommodate movement within system without damage to components or

deterioration of seals, movement within system; movement between system and perimeter components when subject to seasonal temperature cycling; dynamic loading and release of loads; deflection of structural support framing.

.4 Drainage: Provide positive drainage to exterior for moisture entering or condensation occurring within panel system.

.5 Products: Provide continuity of thermal barrier at building enclosure elements in conjunction with thermal insulating materials.

.6 Air Seal: Provide continuity of air barrier seal at building enclosure elements in conjunction with air seal materials specified in Section 07 27 00.



.2 Coordinate the Work for installation of vapour retarder and air barrier seals.

.3 Coordinate the Work with installation of windows, louvers, and components or materials.

1.7 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, layout, joints, construction details, methods of anchorage.


Page 2


217073

February 2018

.2 Samples: Submit two samples of siding, 200 x 200 mm in size illustrating finish colour, sheen, and texture.

1.8 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION .1 Installation Data: Manufacturer's special installation requirements.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum

three (3) years documented experience and approved by the manufacturer.

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION .1 Protect panels from accelerated weathering by removing or venting sheet plastic shipping wrap. .2 Store prefinished material off ground protected from weather, to prevent twisting, bending, or

abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. .3 Prevent contact with materials which may cause discolouration or staining.

1.11 WARRANTY .1 Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for failure to meet specified requirements. .2 Warranty: Include degradation of panel finish including colour fading caused by exposure to weather,

water tightness, and integrity of seals.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MANUFACTURERS .1 Agway Metals; Product: HF-8F. .2 Other acceptable manufacturers offering functionally and aesthetically equivalent products.

.1 Vic West; Product: AD 200R

2.2 EXTERIOR SHEET MATERIALS .1 Precoated Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, Z275 zinc coating designation; shop precoated

with silicone polyester coating. .1 Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Colour - QC-8228 Metro Brown.

2.3 ACCESSORIES .1 Sealants: as specified in Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. .2 Z-Girts and Wind Bearing Steel Studs: fabricated from minimum 2.2mm (18 ga) steel core with zinc

coating conforming to ASTMA-526, with Z275 coating or "Galvalume" by Dofasco. .3 Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type to suit application; with soft neoprene washers, steel, hot

dip galvanized. Exposed fasteners with nylon cap of same finish as panel system. .4 Field Touch-up Paint: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

2.4 COMPONENTS .1 Exterior Sheet: Minimum 0.76 mm (22 ga) thick precoated steel, stock profile as specified


Page 3


217073

February 2018

.2 Internal and External Corners: Same material, thickness, and finish as exterior sheets; profile to suit system; shop cut and factory mitred to required angles. Mitred internal corners to be back braced with precoated sheet stock to maintain continuity of profile.

.3 Miscellaneous Trim, Caps, Flashings and Closures: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; brake formed to required profiles.

.4 Anchors: Galvanized steel.

2.5 FABRICATION .1 Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. .2 Form pieces in longest practicable lengths.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify that building framing members are ready to receive panel system.

3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Install metal siding system on walls to manufacturer's written instructions. .2 Protect surfaces in contact with cementitious materials and dissimilar metals with bituminous paint.

Allow to dry prior to installation. .3 Install metal Z-girts spaced as recommended by manufacturer for gauge of cladding being installed but

no more than 1220mm O.C. .4 Install continuous starter strips, inside and outside corners, edgings, drip cap, sill and .5 window/door opening flashings. Install outside corners, fillers and closure strips with carefully .6 formed and profiled work. .7 Fasten siding to supports; aligned, level, and plumb. .8 Locate joints over supports. Lap panel ends minimum 50 mm. .9 Maintain joints in exterior cladding, true to line, tight fitting, hairline joints. .10 Use concealed fasteners unless otherwise approved by Consultant. .11 Attach components in manner not restricting thermal movement and to allow draining of wall .12 cavities. .13 Seal and place gaskets to prevent weather penetration. Maintain neat appearance. .14 Caulk junctions with adjoining work with sealant. Do work in accordance with Section 07 92 00 - Joint

Sealants. .15 Seal and place gaskets to prevent weather penetration. Maintain neat appearance.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES .1 Maximum Offset From True Alignment Between Adjacent Members Butting or In Line: 1.6 mm. .2 Maximum Variation from Plane or Location Indicated on Drawings: 6 mm.

3.4 CLEANING .1 Remove site cuttings from finish surfaces. .2 Clean and wash prefinished surfaces with mild soap and water; rinse with clean water.

END OF SECTION

07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

Page 1


217073

February 2018

Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Metal parapet cap, sill and miscellaneous trim flashings. .2 Metal counterflashings.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 07 46 16 - Preformed Metal Siding. .2 Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants.


Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .2 CAN/CGSB 51.34-M86 - Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet for Use in Building Construction. .3 SMACNA 1120 - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, 7th Edition (2012).


.1 Coordinate with other work having a direct bearing on work of this section. .2 Pre-installation Meetings: Convene one (1) week before starting work of this section.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Samples:

.1 Submit two (2) samples, 300 x 300 mm in size illustrating typical junction to vertical dissimilar surface, internal corner, external corner seam, etc. indicating locking and anchoring method, material and finish.


1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Perform Work to SMACNA standard details and requirements. Maintain one (1) copy of document

on site. .2 Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this

section with minimum three (3) years documented experience. .3 Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum

three (3) years documented experience.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION .1 Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal

sheets to ensure drainage. .2 Prevent contact with materials which may cause discolouration or staining.


Page 2


217073

February 2018

PART 2 - Products

2.1 SHEET MATERIALS .1 Pre-Coated Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, Z275 zinc coating designation; 0.55 mm (26ga) core

steel. Shop pre-coated with modified silicone or PVDF coating; colour to match metal siding. .2 Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, Z275 zinc coating designation; 0.70 mm (24ga) core steel.

2.2 ACCESSORIES .1 Fasteners: Galvanized steel or stainless steel. .2 Sealant: type, specified in Section 07 92 00.

2.3 COMPONENTS .1 Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.

2.4 FABRICATION .1 Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. .2 Fabricate cleats of galvanized steel, interlockable with sheet. .3 Form pieces in longest possible lengths. .4 Hem exposed edges on underside 13 mm; mitre and seam corners. .5 Form material with flat lock seams. .6 Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 450 mm long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. .7 Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 12 mm and hemmed to form drip. .8 Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 50 mm over roofing. Return and brake edges.

2.5 FINISHES .1 Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of

0.4 mm .

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place,

and nailing strips located. .2 Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.

3.2 PREPARATION .1 Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. .2 Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels. Seal top of reglets with sealant.

3.3 INSTALLATION .1 Conform to drawing details included in the SMACNA 1120 manual. .2 Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit. Secure in place with plastic wedges. Seal flashings into

reglets with sealant. .3 Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. .4 Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.


Page 3


217073

February 2018

.5 Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles.

.6 Seal metal joints watertight.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with specified

requirements.

END OF SECTION

07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS

Page 1


217073

February 2018

Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Preparing substrate surfaces. .2 Sealant and joint backing.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 07 27 00 - Air Barriers: Sealants required in conjunction with air barrier. .2 Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Sealants required in conjunction with firestopping. .3 Section 07 46 16 - Preformed Metal Siding: Sealants required in conjunction with siding. .4 Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim: Sealants required in conjunction with metal

flashings. .5 Section 08 11 13 - Metal Doors and Frames: Sealants required in conjunction with door frames. .6 Section 08 51 13 - Aluminum Windows: Sealants required in conjunction with aluminum windows. .7 Section 08 80 50 - Glass and Glazing: Sealants required in conjunction with glazing methods.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ASTM C834-10 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants. .2 ASTM C919-12 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. .3 ASTM C920-14 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. .4 ASTM C1193-16 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. .5 ASTM C1311-10 - Standard Specification for Solvent Release Sealants. .6 ASTM C1330-02(2013) - Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid

Applied Sealants. .7 ASTM E330/E330M-14 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,

Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. .8 CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87: Sealing Compound, One Component, Elastomeric, Chemical Curing. .9 CAN/CGSB-19.17-M90: One Component Acrylic Emulsion Base Sealing Compound.



.2 Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria,

substrate preparation, staining characteristics, limitations, and colour availability. .2 Samples: Submit two (2) samples, of each specified joint sealant, illustrating available sealant colours

for selection.



Page 2


217073

February 2018

.1 Indicate special procedures, surface preparation, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, field quality control testing.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Perform work to sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material

installation instructions. .2 Perform sealant application work to ASTM C1193. .3 Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this

section with minimum five (5) years documented experience.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after

installation. .2 Do not allow products to exceed temperature ranges recommended by manufacturer before, during

application and during curing. .3 Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces.

1.9 WARRANTY .1 Provide a five (5) year system warranty to include coverage for failure to meet specified requirements. .2 System Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve water

tight and air tight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. .3 Warranty that surfaces will not be stained by sealants. Non-staining is defined as bleeding not more

than 3 mm beyond edges of sealant. .

PART 2 - Products

2.1 EXTERIOR SEALANTS .1 Weatherseal Sealants

.1 Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920 and CAN/CGSB-19.24, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, Use T, NT, G, M, A and O; single component, moisture curing, non-staining, non-bleeding, non-sagging, low modulus polyurethane sealant type; capable of accommodating joint movement of plus 100 percent or minus 50 percent, with an 3 to 4 hour skin time; colour as later selected by Consultant. .1 Product: Dymonic FC, manufactured by Tremco. .2 Product: Sikaflex 15LM, manufactured by Sika.

2.2 INTERIOR SEALANTS .1 Mildew Resistant Interior Silicone Sealant (Counters, Food Preparation Areas, or Plumbing Fixtures):

ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT; single component, non-sagging, non-staining, mildew resistant, fungicidal silicone rubber; colour as later selected by Consultant .1 Product: DC 786, manufactured by Dow Corning. .2 Product: Tremsil 200 Sanitary, manufactured by Tremco.

.2 Interior General Applications (unless specified otherwise): ASTM C920 and CAN/CGSB 19.13, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT; single component, siliconized acrylic latex, non-sagging, non-staining, mildew resistant, accommodating joint movement plus or minus 12 percent; colour as later selected by Consultant.


Page 3


217073

February 2018

.1 Product: Tremflex 834, manufactured by Tremco.

.2 Product: GE Contractors 1000, manufactured by GE.

2.3 ACCESSORIES .1 Primer: Non-staining type, to suit application. .2 Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer;

compatible with joint forming materials. .3 Joint Backing: ASTM C1330, round, closed cell, semi-rigid, compressible; polyethylene or

polyurethane foam rod product, oversized 30% to 50% larger than joint width. .4 Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. .5 Masking tape: Non-staining, non-absorbent type compatible with sealant and adjacent surfaces.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify that joint openings and substrate surfaces are clean, dry, and free of frost and ready to receive

work. .2 Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. .3 Inspection: Inspect work of other Sections upon which work of this Section depends and verify that

conditions are suitable for this Work to proceed. .4 The sections providing joints between elements to be sealed by or in conformance with this section

shall conform to the limits of movement of the specified sealant by the careful determination of acceptable lengths of element to be joined (spacing of joints) and establishment of sufficiently wide joints to accommodate anticipated movement in the finished Work.

.5 Check compatibility of proposed sealants with materials to be in contact with sealant including roofing and waterproofing materials and sealants.

.6 Where sealant beads terminate against another material, check compatibility of sealant with materials encountered and ensure durable seal is provided there.

3.2 PREPARATION .1 Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. .2 Clean and prime joints as required to meet sealant manufacturer's written instructions. .3 Perform preparation to ASTM C1193 for solvent release and latex base sealants .4 Perform preparation to sealant manufacturer's written instructions. .5 Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfiguration. .6 Verify that mean ambient annual temperatures meet manufacturer's written tolerances. .7 Clean joints and spaces which are to be caulked and ensure that they are dry and free of dust, loose

mortar, oil, grease, and other foreign matter. Clean ferrous metals of rust, mill scale and foreign materials by wire brushing, grinding or sanding.

.8 Wipe metal surfaces to be caulked, except pre-coated metals, with cellulose sponges or clean rags soaked with ethyl alcohol, a ketone solvent, xylol or toluol and wipe dry with a clean cloth. Clean pre-coated metals with solutions or compounds which will not injure finish and which are compatible with the primer and sealant.

.9 Provide bond breaker between sealant and other materials spanning joint where backup rod cannot be provided because of depth.


Page 4


217073

February 2018

.10 Where joint depth/width ratio is 3:2 or greater, install joint filler to proper, uniform depth to give sealant bead of optimum size and shape for joint condition and expected movement condition.

.11 Where surfaces adjacent to joints are likely to become coated with sealant during applications, mask them prior to priming and caulking.

.12 Seal joints in surfaces to be painted before surfaces are painted. Where surfaces to be caulked are prime painted in shop before caulking, check to make sure prime paint is compatible with primer and sealant. If they are incompatible, inform Consultant and change primer and sealant to compatible types approved by Consultant.

.13 Prime sides of joints, if priming is recommended by sealant manufacturer for type of surface being caulked, for service conditions or performance requirement of joint.

3.3 INSTALLATION .1 Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193 for solvent release and latex base sealants . .2 Install sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Apply sealant using

air- or hand-operated guns fitted with suitable nozzles and equipment approved by manufacturer. .3 Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. .4 Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of the joint width. .5 Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. .6 Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. .7 Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when

sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. .8 Apply sealant under pressure in such a manner as to assure good adhesion to sides of joints and to

completely fill all voids in the joint. .9 Form surface of sealant smooth, concave, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets and embedded

foreign matter. .10 Upon completion, remove masking and sealant smears and droppings from adjacent and other

surfaces. .11 Tool joints concave. .12 Remove and repair defective areas in sealant installation as required.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Joint Sealants: Perform adhesion tests to manufacturer's written instructions and ASTM C1193,

Method A - Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab .1 Perform test seven (7) days after installation at a rate of one test every 300 m of installed

sealant. .2 Remove sealants failing adhesion test, clean substrates, reinstall sealants and perform retesting.

3.5 CLEANING .1 Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.

3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK .1 Remove masking tape and excess sealant. .2 Protect sealants until cured.

END OF SECTION

08 11 13 STANDARD METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

Page 1


217073

February 2018

Section 08 11 13 - Standard Metal Doors and Frames

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Hollow metal doors. .2 Pressed steel door frames. .3 Louvres.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware. .2 Section 08 80 50 - Glazing. .3 Section 09 91 10 - Painting: Field painting of doors.


Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .2 ASTM B29-03(2009) - Standard Specification for Refined Lead. .3 ASTM B749-03(2009) - Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products. .4 ASTM C553-13 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial

and Industrial Applications. .5 ASTM C578-13 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. .6 ASTM C591-13 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal

Insulation. .7 ASTM C665-12 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame

Construction and Manufactured Housing. .8 ASTM C1289-14 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation

Board. .9 ASTM E90-09 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission

Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. .10 ASTM E413-10 - Classification for Rating of Sound Insulation. .11 CAN/ULC-S104-10 - Standard Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. .12 CAN/ULC-S105-09 - Standard Specification for Fire Door Frames Meeting the Performance Required by

CAN/ULC-S104. .13 CAN/ULC-S701-11 - Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering. .14 CAN/ULC-S702-09 - Standard for Mineral Fibre Thermal Insulation for Buildings (Includes Amendment

1, 2012). .15 CAN/ULC-S704-11 - Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polyurethane and Polyisocyanurate Boards,

Faced. .16 CSA-G40.20-13/G40.21-13 - General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/

Structural Quality Steel. .17 CSA-W59-13 - Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding). .18 FM (Factory Mutual). .19 CSDMA (Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers Association).

.1 Recommended Dimensional Standards for Commercial Steel Doors and Frames, 2000.


Page 2


217073

February 2018

.2 Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for Commercial Steel Doors and Frame Products, 2009.

.20 NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives, 2013 Edition.

.21 NFPA 252 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, 2012 Edition.

.22 ULC-FR-14 - Fire Resistance Directory (2014 Edition).

.23 UL - Fire Resistance Directory.



.2 Coordinate the work with frame opening construction, door, and hardware installation. .2 Sequencing: Sequence installation to ensure wire connections are achieved in an orderly and

expeditious manner.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data: Indicate door and frame configurations and finishes, location of cut-outs for hardware

reinforcement. .2 Shop Drawings:

.1 Indicate frame elevations, reinforcement, anchor types and spacing, location of cut-outs for hardware, and finish.

.2 Indicate door elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, and cut-outs for louvres and glazing.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION .1 Installation Data: Manufacturer's special installation requirements. .2 Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Conform to requirements of CSDMA. Maintain one (1) copy of document on site. .2 Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this

section with minimum three (3) years documented experience.

1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS .1 Fire Rated Door and Frame Construction: Labeled and listed to CAN/ULC-S104. .2 Fire Rated Door Construction: Rate of rise of 250 C degrees across door thickness. .3 Installed Door and Frame Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION .1 Remove doors and frames from wrappings or coverings upon receipt on site and inspect for damage. .2 Store in vertical position, spaced with blocking to permit air circulation between components. .3 Store materials on planks or dunnage, out of water and covered to protect from damage. .4 Clean and touch up scratches or disfigurement caused by shipping or handling with zinc-rich primer.


Page 3


217073

February 2018

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MANUFACTURERS .1 Manufacturers having Product considered acceptable for use:

.1 All Steel Doors 2000 Ltd.

.2 Ambico Ltd.

.3 Artek Door (1985) Ltd.

.4 Baron Metal Industries Inc.

.5 Daybar Industries Limited.

.6 Fleming Door Products Ltd.

.7 Gensteel Doors.

.8 Metal Door Limited.

.9 Steldor.

.10 Trillium Steel Doors Limited.

.11 Vision Hollow Metal Limited. .2 Minimum specification for products specified herein shall be Canadian Steel Door and Frame

Manufacturer's Association.

2.2 MATERIALS .1 Sheet Steel: Galvanized steel to ASTM A653/A653M, commercial grade (CS), Type B.

.1 Exterior Doors: Coating designation ZF120 .

.2 Interior Doors: Coating designation ZF75 . .2 Reinforcement Channel: CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Type 44W, ZF75 coating designation to ASTM

A653/A653M. .3 Reinforcement: CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Type 44W, ZF75 coating designation to ASTM A653/A653M.

Requirements of CSDFMA Standard shall govern except as specified following: .1 Glazing stops and lite trim: 1 mm (20 ga) steel. .2 Top cap for exterior doors: 1.3 mm (18 ga) steel, set flush with top of door, sealed and totally

concealed from face of door. Provide continuous metal closure at bottom of doors. .3 Hardware reinforcing:

.1 Butts and Pivots: 3.5 mm (10 ga) steel.

.2 Top hinge Reinforcement: 3.5mm (10ga) steel, high frequency type with additional stiffening bend.

.3 Panic Bars: 3.5 mm (10 ga) steel.

.4 Flush Bolts, Locks and Strikes: 2.5 mm (12 ga) steel.

.5 Closers and Holders: 3.5 mm (10 ga) steel.

.6 Mortar Boxes: 1 mm (20 ga) steel.

.7 Surface Mounted Overhead Stops / Closers: 2.8mm (3/16”) steel. .4 Metal jamb anchors occurring in exterior walls shall be fabricated from hot dipped galvanized sheet

steel. .5 Anchors: cold rolled commercial quality steel, regular galvannealed finish, nominal coated thickness

as indicated: .1 T-strap Type: 1.30 mm. .2 Stirrup-strap type: 50 x 250 mm size, 1.60 mm thick. .3 Jamb Floor Type: 1.60 mm thick. .4 Stud Type: 1.00 mm thick.


Page 4


217073

February 2018

.6 Jamb Spreaders: 1.00mm thick, cold-rolled commercial quality steel, regular galvannealed finish.

2.3 DOOR CORE MATERIALS .1 Honeycomb Core: Structural small cell 25.4 mm maximum kraft paper honeycomb; weight 36.3 kg

ream minimum, density 16.5 kg/cu m minimum, sanded to required thickness. .2 Polystyrene Core: ASTM C578, Type 1, rigid extruded fire retardant, closed cell board, density 16 to 32

kg/cu m, thermal values RSI-1.0 minimum. .3 Temperature Rise Rated (TRR): Core composition to provide fire-protection rating and limit

temperature rise on unexposed side of door to 250 degrees C at 30 or 60 minutes, as determined by governing code requirements, core tested as part of a complete door and frame assembly, to CAN/ULC-S104, and listed by a nationally recognized testing agency having a factory inspection service.

2.4 ADHESIVES .1 Cores and Steel Components: Heat resistant, structural reinforced epoxy, resin based adhesive. .2 Adhesive For Lock Seam Edges: 2 component, fire-resistant RRPC type designed to maintain doors

faces in permanently locked position at mechanically interlocked edge seam, and having the ability to hold paint

2.5 PRIMERS .1 Primer: Rust inhibitive touch-up only.

2.6 ACCESSORIES .1 Door Silencers: Single stud rubber/neoprene. .2 Exterior Top Caps: Rigid polyvinylchloride (PVC) extrusion. .3 Frame Thermal Breaks: Rigid polyvinylchloride (PVC) extrusion. .4 Louvres:

.1 Material and Finish: Extruded aluminum; clear anodized finish.

.2 Louver Blade: Inverted Y blade, sight proof.

.3 Frame: angle frame with surface fasteners.

.4 "Type CDL" Louvers as manufactured by K.N. Crowder. .5 Glass: As specified in Section 08 80 50.

2.7 FABRICATION - DOORS .1 Exterior Doors: Laminated core construction. .2 Interior Doors: Laminated core construction and welded steel, stiffened where specifically

indicated in Door Schedule. .3 Longitudinal Edges: Mechanically interlocked, tack welded and filled with no visible edge seams. .4 Mortised, blanked, reinforced, drilled and tapped for templated hardware, in accordance with

templates provided by hardware supplier. .5 Reinforce for surface mounted hardware, anchor hinges, thrust pivots, pivot reinforced hinges, or

non-templated hardware. .6 Top and Bottom Channels: Inverted, recessed, welded steel channels. .7 Exterior Door: Flush PVC top caps.


Page 5


217073

February 2018

.8 Provide doors with provisions for glass and/or louvers as detailed. Provide closely fitted steel glass stops with mitred corners where required, set flush and true and weathertight for exterior locations. Drill and countersink fasteners symmetrically at 150 mm oc, and place on secure side of frame. Screw stops in place, or snap in place as applicable.

.9 Reinforce doors to ensure that the maximum corner-to-corner racking of doors does not exceed 1.5 mm.

.10 Factory prepare and reinforce doors for hardware as per frame requirements, including weatherstripping. Where pairs of doors occur, prepare meeting edge to form integral astragal at exterior locations, and to receive mortised flat bar astragal for interior locations, or where no astragal, to a 55 mm radius. Refer to Hardware Schedule for removable mullions, astragals and the like for fire-rated doors. Provide permanent astragals in accordance with ULC requirements and Door Schedule.

.11 Bevel strike edges of doors 1.5 mm maximum per 50 mm thickness.

.12 Clean doors of all deleterious substances and contaminants, sand, flood coat with air drying paste filler, and again sand to eliminate all unevenness or irregularities including dimpling resulting from welding.

.13 Provide factory-applied touch-up primer at areas where zinc coating has been removed during fabrication.

2.8 LAMINATED CORE CONSTRUCTION .1 Exterior Doors: Both face sheets 1.3 mm ( steel, with polystyrene core, laminated under pressure to

face sheets. .2 Interior Doors: Both face sheets 1.3 mm ( steel with honeycomb core and temperature rise rated

core where scheduled, laminated under pressure to face sheets.

2.9 WELDED STIFFENER CONSTRUCTION .1 Interior Doors: Both face sheets 1.3 mm (steel. .2 Reinforce doors with vertical stiffeners, welded to each face sheet at 150 mm on center maximum. .3 Fill voids between vertical stiffeners with fibreglass batt insulation.

2.10 FABRICATION - FRAMES .1 Exterior Frames: 1.6 mm ( thick base metal thickness.

.1 Frames: Welded type construction, thermally broken.

.2 Transom Frames, Sidelight and Window Assemblies: Welded type construction, thermally broken.

.2 Interior Frames: 1.6 mm ( thick base metal thickness. .1 Door Frames and Window Assemblies: Welded type construction. .2 Sidelight Assemblies: Welded type construction.

.3 Form profiles accurately to details indicated. All frames shall have mitred corners. Provide knock-down style frames for field assembly and installation where specifically indicated as knock-down style in the Door Schedule. Provide fully welded frames in all other locations.

.4 Mortised, blanked, reinforced, drilled and tapped for templated hardware, in accordance with templates provided by hardware supplier.

.5 At closer locations required, reinforce door frames with reinforcement plates. Supply removable portion of stop and frame where required for overhead concealed door closers, and properly connect to frame and prepare for attachment to closer prior to shipment.


Page 6


217073

February 2018

.6 Provide frames with 10ga hinge reinforcement welded to frame. Provide high frequency reinforcement (i.e. hinge reinforcement fabricated with additional stiffening bend) for top hinge reinforcement.

.7 Prepare frames for heavy weight oversize butt hinges, cylindrical locksets, rim and concealed vertical rod / mortise lock case exit devices, magnetic locks, surface door closers and concealed overhead stops. Conform to approved Finish Hardware Schedule.

.8 Furnish tightly fitted mortar boxes at all penetration points of frames, including those at electrical devices.

.9 Reinforce frames wider than 1 200 mm with roll formed steel channels fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top.

.10 Prepare frames for silencers. Provide three (3) single silencers for single doors and mullions of double doors on strike side. Provide two (2) single silencers on frame head at double doors without mullions.

.11 Attach fire rated label to each fire rated door unit.

.12 Fill all exposed surface depressions and all joints resulting from fabrication of frames with metallic filler and sand to a smooth, uniform finish.

.13 Ship each frame complete with easily removable metal channel or angle shaped spreaders.

.14 Terminate all door frames at top of concrete slab, or at sub-slab where such exists. Provide floor plates for anchorage to slab.

.15 For frames having a height exceeding 2500 mm, provide heavy duty, galvanized jamb reinforcement channels for each jamb in metal stud partitions, extending to and structurally connected to underside of structure, with provision for vertical adjustment and L/200 deflection of structure over.

.16 Provide continuous closure angles welded to frames as detailed.

.17 Include pressed steel frames for glazed screens throughout building, constructed as per steel door frames, except as follows: .1 Minimum thickness of frames: 1.6 mm (16 ga). .2 Utilize all-welded construction with mechanical field joints for oversized frames determined by

transportation limitations and accessibility to locations within building. .3 Equip glazed lites with removable stops accurately fitted weathertight for exterior locations and

secured in place from the secure side of room with countersunk, oval head screws. .4 Construct thermally broken frames in 2 separate sections, structurally joined and

simultaneously having metal surfaces separated with an integral PVC thermal break. The connecting of metal sections by use of mechanical through-fasteners such as screws, grommets, bolts or other similar fasteners is prohibited. Thermally broken frames shall meet or exceed requirements of CGSB 82-GP-5M.

.18 Fabricate exterior pressed steel window frames from galvanized sheet steel, and in thermally broken configuration similar to thermally broken door frames.

.19 Preparation for thermally broken frames: .1 Provide wall and floor anchors suitable for installation, purpose made not to permit thermal

conductivity. .2 Do not fix sections together with screws, grommets or other thermally conductive fastening

devices. .3 Provide full frame with drip caps. .4 Conform to accepted Shop Drawings.

.20 Fill all exterior frames with insulation and provide jamb anchors spaced at maximum 400mm o.c. up each jamb.


Page 7


217073

February 2018

.21 Mullions for Double Doors: Removable or Fixed type as indicated on door schedule, of same profiles as jambs.

.22 Transom Bars for Glazed Lights: Fixed type, of same profiles as jamb and head.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable; check floor area within path of door swing for

flatness. .2 Verify doors and frames are correct size, swing, rating and opening number. .3 Remove temporary shipping spreaders.

3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Install doors and frames to CSDMA. .2 Install fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with NFPA 80, and local authority having jurisdiction. .3 Coordinate with specified new or existing wall construction for anchor placement. .4 Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. .5 Coordinate installation of doors and frames with installation of hardware specified in Section 08 71 00. .6 Set frames plumb, square, level and at correct elevation. .7 Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction. .8 Ensure integrity of lead-lining between interior of frame and adjacent wall assembly. .9 Brace frames rigidly in position while building-in. Install wood spreaders at third points of frame

rebate height to maintain frame width. Provide vertical support at centre of head for openings exceeding 1 200 mm in width.

.10 Remove wood spreaders after frames have been built-in.

.11 Make allowance for deflection to ensure structural loads are not transmitted to frame product.

.12 Install doors, and hardware in accordance with hardware templates and manufacturer's instructions.

.13 Adjust operable parts for correct clearances and function.

.14 Install louvers, glazing and door silencers.

.15 Finish paint as specified in Section 09 91 10.

.16 Install roll formed steel reinforcement channels between two abutting frames. Anchor to structure and floor.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES .1 Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1.5 mm measured with straight edges, crossed corner to corner.

END OF SECTION

08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

Page 1


217073

February 2018

Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Flush wood doors; flush and flush glazed configuration; fire rated and non-rated.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry: Installation. .2 Section 08 11 13 - Standard Hollow Metal Frames. .3 Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware - General. .4 Section 08 80 50 - Glass and Glazing. .5 Section 09 91 10 - Painting: Site finishing of doors.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard Standard, Edition 12. .2 AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS) - 1st Edition, 2009. .3 CAN/ULC-S104-10 - Standard Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. .4 CAN/ULC-S105-09 - Standard Specification for Fire Door Frames Meeting the Performance Required by

CAN/ULC-S104. .5 ITS (Intertek Testing Services). .6 NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives, 2013 Edition. .7 NFPA 252 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, 2012 Edition. .8 ULC-FR-14 - Fire Resistance Directory (2014 Edition).


.1 Coordinate with other work having a direct bearing on work of this Section.

.2 Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and

characteristics. .2 Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required,

factory finishing criteria, special bevelin,g factory machining criteria and special blocking for hardware. Identify cutouts for louvres and glazing.

.3 Samples: .1 Submit two (2) samples of door construction, 300 x 300 mm in size cut from top corner of

door.



Page 2


217073

February 2018

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Perform work in accordance with AWMAC standards, Premium Grade. Maintain one (1) copy of

document on site. .2 Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this

Section with minimum three (3) years documented experience.

1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS .1 Fire Rated Door Assembly: Labeled and listed to CAN/ULC-S104. .2 Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as scheduled.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION .1 Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with AWMAC. .2 Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. .3 Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet

areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.

1.10 WARRANTY .1 Provide warranty to include coverage for failure to meet specified requirements, to the following term:

.1 Exterior Doors: Five (5) years.

.2 Interior Doors: Ten (10) years. .2 Include coverage for warping beyond specified installation tolerances telegraphing core construction

delamination of veneer defective materials.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MANUFACTURERS .1 Other acceptable manufacturers offering functionally and aesthetically equivalent products.

.1 Bollam.

.2 Baillargeon.

.3 Door-Lam.

.4 Jeld-Wen, Inc.

.5 Lambton Doors.

.6 Marshfield Door Systems.

.7 Masonite.

.8 Weyerhauser.

.9 Visser.

2.2 DOOR LEAF TYPES .1 Interior Doors: 44 mm thick; solid core construction, fire rated as indicated.

2.3 DOOR LEAF CONSTRUCTION .1 Solid Core Flush Wood Doors - Fire Rated: to ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A, Extra Heavy Duty. 44.5 mm thick;

45, 60 or 90 minute rating as scheduled; 5 Ply construction as follows: .1 Perimeter Construction: Solid lumber lock blocks, vertical stiles and top and bottom rails,

bonded to core material.


Page 3


217073

February 2018

.2 Core: homogeneous incombustible mineral core, ULC labelled.

.3 Face Assembly Adhesive: Type I - Waterproof.

.4 Core Assembly Adhesive: Type II - Water-resistant.

.5 Cross-banding: 1.6mm thick hardwood veneer.

.6 Glass Stop: metal, designed to ULC requirements.

.7 Door Faces (Opaque (Paint) Finished Doors): to AWMAC Architectural Premium Grade; 1.3mm thick High Density Fiberboard (HDF), primed, ready for paint finish.

.8 Edges for Opaque (Paint) Finished Face Doors: to AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Standards, Type A - Structural composite lumber laminated to 11 mm solid wood compatible with face veneer, to receive opaque finish.

.2 Solid Core Flush Wood Doors - Non Rated: to ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A, Extra Heavy Duty. 44.5 mm thick; 5 Ply construction as follows: .1 Perimeter Construction: Solid lumber lock blocks, vertical stiles and top and bottom rails,

bonded to core material. .2 Core: Particleboard core type, 448kg/m3 solid particleboard core to ANSI A208.1. .3 Face Assembly Adhesive: Type I - Waterproof. .4 Core Assembly Adhesive: Type II - Water-resistant. .5 Cross-banding: 1.6mm thick hardwood veneer. .6 Glass Stop: matching wood, flat bead type, designed to ULC requirements. .7 Door Faces (Opaque (Paint) Finished Doors): to AWMAC Architectural Premium Grade; 1.3mm

thick High Density Fiberboard (HDF), primed, ready for paint finish. .8 Edges for Opaque (Paint) Finished Face Doors: to AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Standards,

Type A - Structural composite lumber laminated to 11 mm solid wood compatible with face veneer, to receive opaque finish.

2.4 ADHESIVE .1 Facing Adhesive: Type II - water resistant.

2.5 ACCESSORIES .1 Metal Louvres:

.1 Material: Extruded aluminum.

.2 Finish: clear anodized.

.3 Louvre Blade: Inverted Y blade, sight proof.

.4 Frame: angle frame with surface fasteners.

.5 "Type CDL" Louvers as manufactured by K.N. Crowder

2.6 FABRICATION .1 Fabricate non-rated doors in accordance with AWMAC Standards requirements. .2 Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with AWMAC Standards and to ULC-FR requirements. Attach

fire rating label to door. .3 Provide solid blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement. .4 Vertical Exposed Edge of Stiles: Hardwood, suitable for high quality opaque paint finish. .5 Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing. .6 Bond edge banding to cores.


Page 4


217073

February 2018

.7 Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware. Provide solid blocking for through bolted hardware.

.8 Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings.

.9 Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWMAC.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. .2 Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment.

3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Install doors to manufacturer's instructions. .2 Install non-rated doors in accordance with AWMAC Standards requirements. .3 Install fire rated doors to NFPA 80. .4 Trim non-rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges. .5 Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 19 mm3/4 inch. Trim fire door height at

bottom edge only, in accordance with fire rating requirements. .6 Machine cut for hardware. .7 Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08 11 13 and hardware

specified in Section 08 71 00. .8 Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. .9 Install door louvres plumb and level.

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES .1 Conform to AWMAC requirements for fit and clearance tolerances. .2 Conform to AWMAC requirements for maximum diagonal distortion. .3 Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Warp): 3 mm measured with straight edge or taut string, corner to

corner, over an imaginary 915 x 2130 mm surface area. .4 Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 3 mm measured with straight edge or taut string, top to bottom,

over an imaginary 915 x 2130 mm surface area. .5 Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 3 mm measured with straight edge or taut string, edge to edge,

over an imaginary 915 x 2 130 mm surface area.

3.4 ADJUSTING .1 Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement. .2 Adjust closer for full closure.

END OF SECTION

08 41 13 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

Page 1


217073

February 2018

Section 08 41 13 - Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Aluminum doors and frames. .2 Vision glass and insulated metal infill panels. .3 Perimeter sealant.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: System perimeter sealant and back-up materials. .2 Section 08 51 13 - Aluminum Windows. .3 Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware - General: Mortised hardware reinforcement requirements

affecting framing members. .4 Section 08 80 50 - Glass and Glazing.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 AA (Aluminum Association) DAF 45-2003 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. .2 AAMA CW-DG-1-96 (R2005) - Aluminum Curtain Wall Design Guide Manual. .3 AAMA CWG-1-89 (R2004) - Installation of Aluminum Curtain Walls. .4 AAMA CW-10-12 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to Site. .5 AAMA 501-05 - Methods of Test for Exterior Walls. .6 AAMA 501.1-05 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors

Using Dynamic Pressure. .7 AAMA 611-12 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. .8 AAMA 2603-13 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. .9 AAMA 2605-13 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior

Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. .10 AAMA RPC-00 - Rain Penetration Control. .11 AAMA SFM-1-87 (Reissued 2002) - Aluminum Store Front and Entrance Manual. .12 ASTM A36/A36M-12 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. .13 ASTM A123/A123M-13 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products. .14 ASTM A653/A653M-13 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron

Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .15 ASTM B209-10 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. .16 ASTM B209M-10 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. .17 ASTM B221M-13 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,

Profiles, and Tubes. .18 ASTM B221-13 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,

Profiles, and Tubes. .19 ASTM E283-04(2012) - Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior

Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.


Page 2


217073

February 2018

.20 ASTM E330/E330M-14 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

.21 ASTM E331-00(2009) - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

.22 ASTM E1105-00 (2008) - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference.

.23 MPI (Master Painters Institute) - Architectural Painting Specifications Manual and Maintenance Repainting Manual.

.24 SSPC (The Society for Protective Coatings) - Steel Structures Painting Manual.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .1 Aluminum entrances and storefront system includes tubular aluminum sections with supplementary

internal support framing, shop fabricated, factory finished, vision glass, insulated metal panel infill, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.

.2 System Assembly: Site assembled.



.2 Coordinate the Work with installation of air barrier components or materials. .2 Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene one (1) week before starting work of this section.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage

and fasteners, glass and infill, door hardware. .2 Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected

related Work and expansion and contraction joint location and details.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS .1 Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in

Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Perform Work in accordance with [AAMA CW-DG-1] [AAMA SFM-1]. .2 Installer: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum three (3)

years documented experience.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION .1 Handle Products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10. .2 Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings

which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.


Page 3


217073

February 2018

1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 5 degrees C during and forty-eight (48)

hours after installation.

1.11 WARRANTY .1 Correct defective Work within a five (5) year period after Substantial Completion. .2 Warrant aluminum doors against defects for a period of ten (10) years from the date of Substantial

Completion. .3 Warranty: Include coverage for complete system for failure to meet specified requirements.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MATERIALS .1 Extruded Aluminum: B221MASTM B221. .2 Sheet Aluminum: B209M. .3 Sheet Steel: ASTM A653/A653M; galvanized to Z275 coating designation. .4 Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M; shaped to suit mullion sections. .5 Fasteners: Stainless steel.

2.2 COMPONENTS .1 Exterior Framing: extruded aluminum sections, 51 mm (2") wide by 114.3 mm (4 1/2") nominal

dimension; thermally broken with interior tubular section insulated from exterior with a continuous rigid PVC thermal separator, flush, snap-in glazing stops; drainage holes; internal weep drainage system. Reinforce mullions as required to meet structural criteria. .1 Trifab 451T framing by Kawneer Co. of Canada Ltd. .2 Flush Glaze BF3400 Series Insulframe framing by Alumicor Ltd. .3 Series 655 Framing by Windspec.

.2 Interior Framing: extruded aluminum sections, 45 (1.75") or 51 mm (2") wide by 114.3 mm (4 1/2") nominal dimension; flush, snap-in glazing stops. Reinforce mullions as required to meet structural criteria. .1 Trifab 450 framing by Kawneer Co. of Canada Ltd. .2 Flush Glaze TL1800 Series framing by Alumicor Ltd. .3 Series 630 Framing by Windspec.

.3 Interior Doors: 45mm thick frame rails and stiles formed from extruded aluminum sections, sizes as indicated on drawings with snap-in glazing stops. Door corner construction shall consist of both sigma deep penetration weld and mechanical fastening. .1 500 Series doors by Kawneer Co. of Canada Ltd. .2 Canadiana 600 Series doors by Alumicor Ltd. .3 500 Series doors by Windspec.

.4 Insulated Panels: prefabricated insulated panels, as manufactured by Mapes Industries or Citadel Architectural (GlazeGuard 1000) as distributed by SRP Building Products Inc. (705) 495-0927. .1 Exterior skin: minimum 0.016" (0.4mm) thick aluminum sheet with smooth surface, bonded to

1/8" (3mm) thick tempered hardboard stabilizer substrate. Finish: anodized to match framing. .2 Insulating Core: expanded polystyrene rigid insulation to CGSB-51-GP-20M Type 2. .3 Interior skin: 0.020" thick aluminum sheet with clear anodized finish, bonded to 1/8" thick

hardboard stabilizer substrate.


Page 4


217073

February 2018

.4 Overall thickness: 51mm (2") minimum. .5 Flashings: Aluminum; 1.27 mm thick, secured with concealed fastening method.

.1 Finish: To match framing sections where exposed.

2.3 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS .1 Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08 80 50.

2.4 SEALANT MATERIALS .1 Sealant and Backing Materials:

.1 Perimeter Sealant: Type as specified in Section 07 92 00.

.2 Sealant Used Within System (Not Used for Glazing): Type as specified in Section 07 92 00.

2.5 HARDWARE .1 Weather Stripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable. .2 Sill Sweep Strips: Neoprene compound, resilient seal type, retracting. .3 Balance of hardware as specified in Section 08 71 00.

2.6 FABRICATION .1 Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet

enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. .2 Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline and weatherproof. .3 Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. .4 Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. .5 Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware and door operator hinge

hardware. .6 Reinforce framing members for imposed loads.

2.7 FINISHES .1 Colour Anodic Coating: all exposed components, AAMA 611 , Class I, AA-M12C22A44.

.1 Colour: dark bronze.

.2 Location: Interior and exterior exposed aluminum surfaces. .2 Apply one (1) coat of bituminous paint to concealed steel and aluminum surfaces in contact with

cementitious or dissimilar materials. .3 Shop and Touch-Up Primer for Steel Components: SSPC-Paint 25, zinc oxide alkyd primer. .4 Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: MPI #18, inorganic zinc-rich primer. .5 Extent of Finish:

.1 Apply factory coating to all surfaces exposed at completed assemblies.

.2 Apply finish to surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in completed assemblies, including joint edges.

.3 Apply touch-up materials recommended by coating manufacturer for field application to cut ends and minor damage to factory applied finish.


Page 5


217073

February 2018

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. .2 Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapour seal materials are ready to receive work of this

Section.

3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Install wall system to manufacturer instructions. .2 Install wall system in accordance with AAMA CWG-1. .3 Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other

irregularities. .4 Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. .5 Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances,

aligning with adjacent work. .6 Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. .7 Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam. .8 Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapour barrier materials. .9 Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal

barrier. .10 Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure. .11 Install hardware using templates provided. Refer to Section 08 71 00 for installation requirements. .12 Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08 80 50. .13 Install perimeter sealant , backing materials, and installation criteria in accordance with Section 07 92

00.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES .1 Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1.5 mm/m non-cumulative or 1.5 mm per 3 m1/16 inches per 10

ft, whichever is less. .2 Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 0.8 mm1/32 inch.

3.4 ADJUSTING .1 Adjust operating hardware operating hardware for smooth operation.

3.5 CLEANING .1 Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces. .2 Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping

cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. .3 Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.

3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK .1 Protect finished Work from damage.

END OF SECTION

08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

Page 1


217073

February 2018

Section 08 51 13 - Aluminum Windows

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Removal and disposal of existing windows which are scheduled for replacement. .2 Supply and installation of all factory assembled and prefinished aluminum windows framing complete

with glass and glazing, insulated panels, hardware, weatherstripping, insect screens and all required anchorages, attachments and shims.

.3 Aluminum sills, capping interior and exterior trim, etc.

.4 Sealants.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 06 10 13 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood perimeter shims. .2 Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials. .3 Section 08 41 13 - Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts. .4 Section 08 80 50 - Glass and Glazing.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 AA (Aluminum Association) DAF 45-2003 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. .2 AAMA CW-10-12 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to Site. .3 AAMA CW-11-85 - Design Windloads for Buildings and Boundary Layer Wind Tunnel Testing. .4 AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-11 - NAFS - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for

Windows, Doors, and Skylights. .5 AAMA 611-12 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. .6 AAMA 1503-09 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of

Windows, Doors, and Glazed Wall Sections. .7 AAMA 2603-13 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. .8 AAMA 2605-13 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior

Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. .9 ASTM A123/A123M-13 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products. .10 ASTM B209M-10 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. .11 ASTM B209-10 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. .12 ASTM B221M-13 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,

Profiles, and Tubes. .13 ASTM B221-13 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,

Profiles, and Tubes. .14 ASTM E283-04(2012) - Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior

Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. .15 ASTM E330/E330M-14 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,

Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. .16 ASTM E331-00(2009) - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,

Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.


Page 2


217073

February 2018

.17 ASTM F588-07 - Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Forced Entry Resistance of Window Assemblies, Excluding Glazing Impact.

.18 CSA-A440S1-09 - Canadian Supplement to AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, NAFS - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for windows, doors, and skylights.

.19 CSA-A440.2-14/A440.3-14 - Fenestration Energy Performance/User Guide to CSA-A440.2-14, Fenestration Energy Performance.

.20 CAN/CSA-A440.4-07 (R2012) - Window, Door, and Skylight Installation.

.21 MPI (Master Painters Institute) - Architectural Painting Specifications Manual and Maintenance Repainting Manual.

.22 SMA 1201R-2012 - Specification for Insect Screens for Windows, Sliding Doors, and Swinging Doors.

.23 SSPC (The Society for Protective Coatings) - Steel Structures Painting Manual.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS .1 Windows: Conform to LC-PG30-FW (minimum), Product Designation Class CSA 101/I.S.2/A440; and

labeled by CSA. .2 Design assemblies to AAMA SFM-1. .3 Conform to the SB10 Supplement to the Ontario Building Code. .4 Forced Entry Resistance: ASTM F588, tested to performance Grade 30. .5 System Design: Design and size components to withstand dead loads and live loads caused by

positive and negative wind loads acting normal to plane of wall to AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/S.I.2/A440, Canadian Supplement, as measured in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M.

.6 Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to 1/175 of the longer dimension with full recovery of glazing materials.

.7 Assembly: To accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement between window and perimeter framing, deflection of lintel.

.8 Design system components to withstand dead loads and live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall as calculated to requirements of the Building Code.

.9 Air Infiltration/Exfiltration: Limit air infiltration/exfiltration for fixed units to "FIXED" level .

.10 Vapour Seal: Limit vapour seal with interior atmospheric pressure of 25 mm sp, 22 degrees C, 40% RH without seal failure.

.11 Condensation Resistance: Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF) of 50 when measured to AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S. 2/A440 and CSA-A440 S1.

.12 Water Leakage: to AAMA/WDMA/CSA/101/I.S.2/A440 and CSA-A440 S1.

.13 System Internal Drainage: Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to the exterior by a weep drainage network.

.14 Air and Vapour Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapour retarder throughout assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound.

.15 Windows Required to be "Guards" as Indicated on the Drawings: .1 The manufacturer shall submit shop drawings and or written confirmation verifying that

the aluminum framed windows/screens including framing, glazing and the anchoring system used to secure the frames to adjacent building construction, meet the requirements for guards as defined by the Ontario Building Code 2012, article 4.1.5.14 and SB-13 for glass in guards. Refer to Drawings and/ or Window Schedules for locations where applicable.

.2 Shop Drawings and accompanying letter shall bear the seal and signature of a professional engineer licensed in the Place of Work.


Page 3


217073

February 2018

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data: Provide component dimensions, anchorage and fasteners, glass, internal drainage

details and frame reinforcement. .2 Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, framed opening tolerances, affected related work;

installation requirements; and indicating materials and large scale details for head, jamb, and sill, profiles of components, elevations of units, anchorage details, hardware, description of related components and exposed finishes and fasteners. Clearly indicate location of thermal break relative to insulation in wall assembly.

.3 Submit Test Reports from approved independent testing laboratories, certifying compliance with performance requirements with respect to air leakage, water leakage, wind load resistance, condensation resistance and forced entry.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION .1 Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. .2 Maintenance Data and Demonstration:

.1 Provide service manual for cleaning, maintenance and adjustment of aluminum windows, doors and frames.

.2 In addition to service manual, supply to the Owner a standard parts and service kit for each type of window/door system.

.3 Upon completion of installation, provide operation and maintenance demonstration with Owner's building maintenance staff, on proper window and door operation, sash removal, re-glazing requirements, general maintenance procedures and cleaning requirements.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Comply with CSA 101/I.S.2/A440. .2 Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this

Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience. .3 Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum

five (5) years documented experience having adequate equipment and skilled personnel to expediently complete the work in an efficient and very best workmanlike manner.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION .1 Protect factory finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed

coatings that bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.

1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 5 degrees C . .2 Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of sealants.

1.10 WARRANTY .1 Correct defective Work within a five (5) year period after Date of Substantial Performance. .2 Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide ten (10) year manufacturer warranty:

.1 Finish: Include coverage repair or replacement of any unit for degradation of colour finish, such as but not limited to delamination, blistering or excessive fading.


Page 4


217073

February 2018

.2 Performance: replace or repair any unit with air leakage, water leakage, defects and malfunction under normal usage.

.3 Glazing: Provide ten (10) year manufacturer warranty for insulated glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same.

.3 Installer Warranty: for a period of two (2) years, protecting against leakage, operational defects and malfunction under normal usage.

1.11 JOB CONDITIONS .1 Co-ordinate the Work of this Section with the Owner to ensure a continuous uninterrupted sequence

of operations and in a manner maintaining building security. .2 Ensure all components including shims, vapour barrier, and flashing are installed to provide a

continuous air and vapour seal. .3 Protect finishes and glass during erection against disfiguration, contamination or damage by abuse or

harmful materials. Install protective cover where exposure to damage is critical.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MANUFACTURERS .1 Acceptable manufacturers offering functionally and aesthetically equivalent products.

.1 Fixed Window / Perimeter Framing System (minimum perimeter frame width - 152mm with 50.8mm bullnose) .1 AA 6600 Windows by Kawneer. .2 Shadowline 970 Series windows by Alumicor Ltd. .3 925RS windows by Windspec.

2.2 MATERIALS .1 Extruded Aluminum: B221M ; 6063-T5 alloy and temper. .2 Sheet Aluminum: B209M ; 6063-T5 alloy and temper. .3 Steel Sections: Profiled to suit mullion sections. .4 Fasteners: Stainless steel.

2.3 COMPONENTS .1 Frames: Aluminum, thermally broken, profile size as required; applied glass stops of snap-on type.

Formed from extruded aluminum sections with minimum base metal thickness of 1.57 mm for sash and frame components.

.2 Reinforced Mullion: Extruded aluminum profile, size as required with integral reinforcement of shaped steel structural section.

.3 Steel Reinforcement: CSA G40, Grade 300W.

.4 Isolation Coating: Black alkali-resistant bitumastic enamel, conforming to CGSB 1-GP-108M.

.5 Thermal Break: Extruded rigid PVC conforming to CGSB 41-GP-19Ma, or poured in polyurethane.

.6 Supports and anchors: Rigid, custom-formed to suit conditions, of aluminum or rust-proof primed steel.

.7 Sills: combination of brake formed sheet aluminum of minimum 1.27 mm (0.050") thickness and extruded aluminum; sloped for positive wash; fit under sash leg to 13 mm beyond wall face; one-piece full width of opening where possible.


Page 5


217073

February 2018

.8 Insulated Panels: prefabricated insulated panels, as manufactured by Mapes Industries or Citadel Architectural (GlazeGuard 1000) as distributed by SRP Building Products Inc. (705) 495-0927. .1 Exterior skin: minimum 0.4mm (0.016") thick aluminum sheet with smooth surface, bonded to

3 mm (1/8") thick tempered hardboard stabilizer substrate. Finish: dark bronze anodized. .2 Insulating Core: expanded polystyrene rigid insulation to CGSB-51-GP-20M Type 2. .3 Interior skin: 0.51 mm (0.020") thick aluminum sheet with dark bronze anodized finish,

bonded to 3 mm (1/8") thick hardboard stabilizer substrate. .4 Overall panel thickness: 38 mm (1.5 inches).

.9 Fasteners: Stainless steel with chromium content not less than 12%.

2.4 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS .1 Glass and Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08 80 50.

2.5 SEALANT MATERIALS .1 Sealant and Backing Materials: As specified in Section 07 92 00.

2.6 FABRICATION .1 Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet

enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. .2 Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline and weatherproof. .3 Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. .4 Arrange fasteners and attachments to ensure concealment from view. .5 Prepare components with internal reinforcement for operating hardware. .6 Provide internal reinforcement in mullions with galvanized steel members to maintain rigidity. .7 Permit internal drainage weep holes and channels to migrate moisture to exterior. Provide internal

drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes. .8 Assemble insect screen frame, mitre and reinforced frame corners. Fit mesh taut into frame and

secure. Fit frame with four (4), spring loaded steel pin retainers. .9 Double weatherstrip operable units. .10 Make allowances for deflection of structure. Ensure that structural loads are not transmitted to

aluminum work. .11 Fabricate windows to configuration, operations and glazing as shown on Drawings with insect screens

at each opening sash. .12 Construct frames to profiles and maximum face sizes as shown on drawings. .13 Take field measurements before starting fabrication. .14 Fabricate in strict conformance with reviewed shop drawings. .15 Do all fitting and assembly in shop. Field fabrication of window frames will not be allowed. .16 Trial fit units before shipment if permanent shop assembly not possible. .17 Provide rabbets for glazing of depths recommended by manufacturer of glazing units. .18 Fabricate all inner sections of frames and all joints to be permanently air-, water- and weather-tight. .19 Fabricate glazing stops and frame to accommodate glazing and insulated panels. .20 Fabricate metal sections drilled, tapped, welded, holed or slotted as may be required for proper

installation and fixing of components and accessories, and supplied complete with necessary anchors, clips, batts, screws and the like.

.21 Fabricate members with sharply defined profiles, straight, square and true with surfaces in proper planes and exposed finished surfaces and edges smooth and free from defects.


Page 6


217073

February 2018

.22 Fabricate framing, bracing, reinforcements, thermal breaks and anchors with structural properties adequate to safely sustain and withstand strains and stresses to which they will be subjected.

.23 Bolts where permitted, shall be tight and thread nicked to prevent loosening of nuts.

.24 Apply two shop coats of rust-inhibiting primer over all ungalvanized steel components and over galvanized steel components if damaged.

.25 Apply two shop coats of zinc chromate primer or bituminous paint to all surfaces where necessary to prevent corrosion or contact with dissimilar metals and other materials.

.26 Open spaces in frames shall be packed full with insulation.

.27 Fabricate all outer sections of frames with air pressure equalization vent holes while preventing full air circulation around glazing lite in frame. Fabricate for inside glazing of all windows using snap-in glazing beads.

.28 Opening sashes shall be welded at four corners, mounted in main frame in factory with all hardware fastened, and shall remain locked until glazed.

.29 Extruded flexible vinyl weatherstripping shall be keyed into grooves in the main frame at operable sashes, around entire perimeter of operable sashes, forming a double contact weathering joint.

.30 Factory glaze window units.

2.7 FINISHES .1 Colour Anodic Coating: AAMA 611 , Class I, AA-M12C22A44.

.1 Colour: #40 Dark Bronze.

.2 Location: Interior and exterior exposed aluminum surfaces. .2 Shop and Touch-Up Primer for Steel Components: SSPC-Paint 25, zinc oxide alkyd. .3 Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: MPI #18, inorganic zinc-rich primer. .4 Concealed Steel Items: Hot-dip galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M, appropriate grade for type and size

of steel material indicated. .5 Apply one (1) coat of bituminous paint to concealed steel and aluminum surfaces in contact with

cementitious or dissimilar materials.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapour seal materials are ready to receive work of this

Section.

3.2 INSTALLATION - WINDOWS .1 Remove existing windows scheduled for replacement. Take care when removing existing windows to

minimize damage to existing trims and other surrounding materials. Remove and replace any existing deteriorated rough opening wood blockings.

.2 Install window frames , glazing , hardware to manufacturer's written instructions.

.3 Install window assembly to CAN/CSA-A440.4.

.4 Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities.

.5 Align window plumb and level, free of warp, twist or superimposed loads. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. Do not force frames.

.6 Install sill and sill end angles. Set sills with uniform wash to exterior and level in their length. Provide and install any water bars. Seal watertight to window at interior sill edge.


Page 7


217073

February 2018

.7 Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Insulate between all frames and rough openings with expanding urethane foam insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier.

.8 Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air barrier and vapour retarder materials.

.9 Install operating hardware.

.10 Install glass and insulated panels as specified in Section 08 80 50, to glazing method required to achieve performance criteria.

.11 Secure Work in manner not restricting thermal movement and in accordance with manufacturer's details, to achieve weathertight installation with air/vapour/thermal barrier seal to building.

.12 Correctly locate, align and install flashings, deflectors and weep holes to ensure proper drainage of moisture to exterior. Assemble to hairline flush butt joints.

.13 All anchors and fitments to be concealed, use anchors that will permit sufficient adjustment for accurate alignment. Make full allowance for deflection of building structure.

.14 Adjust opening sash and hardware to operate smoothly.

.15 Sample Installation: .1 Install one sample window and obtain Consultant's review before proceeding with

further installation. .2 This installation will form the standard of acceptance for all other window installations. .3 Allow 48 hours for review of installation by Consultant.

.16 Install perimeter sealant, backing materials, and installation criteria as specified in Section 07 92 00.

3.3 INSTALLATION - GLAZING .1 Check all surfaces, materials to receive glass and ensure all is in readiness. .2 Ensure all wood backing, glass rebates, wood stops are primed and that flat surfaces are true without

projections or protrusions. .3 Nails, screws, fastenings, properly set to prevent contact with glass. .4 Ensure all stops, splines, glazing accessories and components provided by others are accurately cut to

length and of proper size and type for specific glazing being held. .5 Remove protective coatings and clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. .6 Apply primer-sealer to contact surfaces. .7 Place setting blocks as per manufacturer's instructions. .8 Install glass, rest on setting blocks, ensure full contact and adhesion at perimeter. .9 Install removable stops, without displacing tape or sealant. .10 Provide edge clearance of 3 mm minimum. .11 Apply cap bead of sealant at exterior void. .12 Lock strip gasket method:

.1 Unpack and lay out gaskets on flat warm area to permit recovery of shape.

.2 Install gaskets under compression from corners inward in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.4 INSTALLATION - SEALANT .1 Remove old caulking, dust, paint, loose mortar and other foreign matter. Dry joint surfaces. .2 Examine joint sizes and correct to achieve depth ration 1/2 of joint width with minimum width and

depth of 6 mm, maximum width 25 mm. .3 Install joint filler to achieve correct joint depth. .4 Perform work with tradesmen skilled in application of particular sealant.


Page 8


217073

February 2018

.5 Apply sealants, primers, joint fillers, bond breakers to manufacturer's written instructions. Apply sealant using gun with proper size nozzle. Use sufficient pressure to fill voids and joints solid. Superficial pointing with skin bead is not acceptable.

.6 Form surface of sealant with full bead, smooth, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets, embedded impurities. Neatly tool surface to a slight concave joint.

.7 Apply sealant to joints between window or door frames to adjacent building components, around perimeter of every external opening.

3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES .1 Material and Unit Size Tolerances: As specified in AAMA/WDMA/CSA/101/I.S.2/A440.

3.6 ADJUSTING .1 Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure.

3.7 CLEANING .1 Immediately prior to the final cleaning of the glass make good all damage and disfigurement to this

work, remove all protective coating, stains and foreign matter from all exposed exterior and interior surfaces of aluminum work supplied under this section and leave all in a uniform colour and in first class condition to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

.2 Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer; rinse and wipe surfaces clean.

.3 Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE

Page 1


217073

February 2018

Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware

PART 1 - General

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Conform to Division 01, General Requirements.

1.2 DESCRIPTION .1 Work Included:

.1 Supply and delivery of finish hardware for hollow metal doors and frames (Section 08 11 13), wood doors (Section 08 14 16), aluminum framed entrances and storefronts (Section 08 41 13).

.2 Hardware supplier shall supply, install and commission: .1 Power door operators, door operator push buttons. .2 Low voltage hardware devices.

.2 Related Work: .1 Installation of hardware supplied by this Section installed under Section 06 20 00 Finish

Carpentry. .2 Supply and installation of weather-stripping on aluminum frames/doors by Section 08 41 13

Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts. .3 Work by Division 16:

.1 Electrical power supply to electrically operate low voltage hardware.

.2 Power supply and fire alarm system interconnection for magnetic locks, magnetic door hold open hardware.

.3 Supply and installation of conduit/boxes and line voltage wiring for low voltage hardware devices, power door operators. Includes conduit/outlet boxes between and operator and push button control devices.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS .1 Standard hardware location dimensions in accordance with Canadian Metric Guide for Steel Doors and

Frames (Modular Construction) prepared by Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturers' Association.

1.4 MAINTENANCE DATA .1 Provide maintenance data, parts list, and manufacturer's instructions for each type door closers,

lockets, and door holders and for incorporation into maintenance manual.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCES .1 The company furnishing hardware shall be regularly engaged in the sale and distribution of builders

hardware for commercial projects. .2 Person responsible for scheduling, detailing, ordering and co-ordinating hardware for the project shall

be an experienced hardware consultant. Architectural Hardware Consultant membership in the Door & Hardware Institute is acceptable as an indication of the required experience.

.3 Hardware finished shall comply with the requirements of the Standards and Codes and as described in 1.3 of this Section.


Page 2


217073

February 2018

1.6 SUBMITTALS .1 Immediately after receipt of the approved finish hardware shop drawing, purchase, co-ordinate

approved shop drawings from affected trades. .2 After approval of Hardware Schedule, submit template information to related trades .3 Prepare and submit within 30 days of receipt of a purchase order the complete detailed Hardware

Schedule Shop Drawing for Review. Provide 5 copies. .4 If requested by Consultant, supply samples of hardware which will be retained for comparison with

hardware furnished. Samples to be returned in time for installation on the project. Tag for opening identification.

.5 Catalogue cuts of products proposed for substitution shall be furnished with the Hardware Schedule submissions.

.6 Keying Schedule - Submit 3 copies of complete keying schedule based on DHI keying procedures, system and nomenclature within 90 days of receipt of purchase order.

1.7 DELIVERY .1 Hardware shall be delivered to the job site in manufacturers original packages. Each item shall be

clearly marked with the opening number and scheduled item number to identify correct location. .2 Packing slips shall identify the quantity and item number of hardware shipped for ease of checking at

job site. .3 All hardware shall be ordered so that it will be available on time for job requirements.

1.8 WARRANTY .1 General Door Hardware shall be warranted against defects in material and manufacturer per hardware

manufacturer’s standard but not less than one year on all components. .2 Provide Manufacture published Warranty on products as follows, Locksets, Latch sets, Deadlocks, Exit

Devices, Door Closers. .3 Provide Limited Lifetime warranty on products as follows, mortise hinges, magnetic locks.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MATERIAL .1 Refer to the Hardware Schedule appended to this Section for a list of specified hardware. .2 Where specified as product manufacturer number only on sized product, hardware supplier is to

include for material, as required, to complete door opening. This is typical for Exit Device, Weather seals, Flatware sized products.

.3 Acceptable alternates to exceed as noted above in conformance with BHMA/ANSI certified testing and design, function, finish, application to that specified.

.4 Screws and Fasteners: .1 Screws to be matching finish to their product and to be manufacturer’s standard. Door closers,

door holders and exit devices installed on fire rated wood doors and hollow metal doors to be attached with the appropriate fasteners to meet code requirements.

2.2 FINISHES .1 Finishes: identified in Schedule appended to this Section.


Page 3


217073

February 2018

2.3 KEYING .1 Key new hardware to existing building keying system. .2 Meet with the Owner to finalize keying requirements and obtain keying instructions in writing.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 INSPECTION .1 Examine doors, frames and related items for conditions that would prevent the proper application of

finish hardware. Do not proceed until defects are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Hardware shall be installed by carpenter mechanics skilled in the application of commercial grade

hardware. .2 A schedule of mounting heights for items of hardware shall be included in the Hardware Schedule

Shop Drawing for approval. .3 Degree of opening for doors with overhead holders, closers and other affected hardware shall be

included in the Hardware Schedule Shop Drawing for approval. .4 The hands of doors shall be shown in the Hardware Schedule Shop Drawing.

3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING .1 Hardware shall be adjusted for correct operation. .2 After installation of hardware and before the building is accepted, inspect the installation and certify

that the hardware is correctly installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. .3 After installation of hardware, and before acceptance of the building check each locked door against

keying schedule to assure proper cylinder are on proper doors. For any incorrectly located cylinders, tag and relocate to proper location.

3.4 PROTECTION .1 Hardware shall be protected against field painting, finishing, cleaning and all other related work

performed at job site.

3.5 EXTRA STOCK .1 Supply 2 each of special adjusting tools furnished with hardware. .2 Supply 10 each of typical fasteners used to install hardware. .3 Extra finish hardware components as listed in the Hardware Groups.

3.6 HARDWARE SCHEDULE .1 Refer to Hardware Schedule appended to this Section.

END OF SECTION

08 80 50 GLASS AND GLAZING

Page 1


217073

February 2018

Section 08 80 50 - Glass And Glazing

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Glass and glazing for doors and windows.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Sealant and back-up material. .2 Section 08 13 13 - Standard Hollow Metal Doors: Glazed doors and frames. .3 Section 08 41 13 - Aluminum Framed Entrances . .4 Section 08 51 13 - Aluminum Windows: Glazed windows. .5 Section 10 28 14 - Toilet and Bath Accessories: Premanufactured framed mirrors.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ANSI Z97.1-2009 - Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and

Methods of Test. .2 ASTM C542-05(2011) - Standard Specification for Lock-Strip Gaskets. .3 ASTM C864-05(2011) - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting

Blocks, and Spacers. .4 ASTM C920-14 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. .5 ASTM C1036-11e1 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass. .6 ASTM C1172-09e1 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass. .7 ASTM C1193-13 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. .8 ASTM D412-06a(2013) - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers -

Tension. .9 ASTM D1149-07(2012) - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Deterioration-Cracking in an Ozone

Controlled Environment. .10 ASTM D2240-05(2010) - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness. .11 ASTM E84-13a - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. .12 ASTM E283-04(2012) - Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior

Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. .13 ASTM E330/E330M-14 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,

Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. .14 CAN/CGSB 12.1-M90 - Tempered or Laminated Safety Glass. .15 CAN/CGSB 12.2-M91 - Flat, Clear Sheet Glass. .16 CAN/CGSB 12.3-M91 - Flat, Clear Float Glass. .17 CAN/CGSB 12.8-97 - Insulating Glass Units. .18 CAN/CGSB 12.11-M90 - Wired Safety Glass. .19 CAN/CGSB 12.20-M89 - Structural Design of Glass for Buildings. .20 GANA (Glass Association of North America).

.1 GANA Glazing Manual (2008).

.2 GANA Laminated Glazing Reference Manual (2009).

.3 GANA Sealant Manual (2008). .21 IGMA (Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance).


Page 2


217073

February 2018

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS .1 Provide glass and glazing materials for continuity of building enclosure vapour retarder and air barrier:

.1 In conjunction with materials described in Section 07 92 00.

.2 To utilize the inner pane of multiple pane sealed units for the continuity of the air barrier and vapour retarder seal.

.3 To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapour retarder throughout the glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant.

.2 Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of glass as calculated in accordance with the Ontario Building Code.

.3 Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less.

1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS .1 Preinstallation Meetings: Convene one (1) week before starting work of this section.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size

limitations, special handling or installation requirements. .2 Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental

characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colours.

1.7 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION .1 Certificates: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. .2 Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that sealed insulated glass, meets or exceeds specified

requirements.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Perform Work in accordance with GANA for glazing installation methods. Maintain one (1) copy of

documents on site. .2 Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum

three (3) years documented experience and approved by the manufacturer.

1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 10 degrees C . .2 Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and twenty-four (24) hours after installation of

glazing compounds.

1.10 WARRANTY .1 Provide a ten (10) year warranty to include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane

dusting or misting, and replacement of same.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 FLAT GLASS MATERIALS .1 Float Glass: CAN/CGSB 12.3, Clear, annealed, glazing quality.


Page 3


217073

February 2018

.2 Safety Glass (non-rated, aluminum doors and screens): CAN/CGSB 12.1, clear, tempered; minimum 6 mm thick.

.3 Low Emissivity (Low E) Glass: Float type, annealed clear, hard, pyrolitic coating on AGC Energy Select 73 or equivalent .

.4 Wired Glass: CAN/CGSB 12.11, polished both sides (transparent), woven stainless steel wire, mesh style square of 13 mm grid size; minimum 6 mm thick.

.5 Ceramic Glazing (oversized lites in fire rated doors and screens): fire rated and impact resistant, polished, clear ceramic glazing, laminated construction with overall thickness of 8 mm, "FireLite Plus Standard Grade" as manufactured by Technical Glass Products.

2.2 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS .1 Manufacturers having glass Products generally considered acceptable for use. Proposed Alternates

from the list of manufacturers below, other than those specified as the basis for performance, must meet or exceed the specified performance criteria. .1 AFG Glass Inc. .2 AGC Flat Glass North America. .3 Libbey-Owens Ford. .4 Pilkington North America Ltd. .5 PPG Industries. .6 Guardian Industries.

.2 Insulated Glass Units .1 To minimum of CAN/CGSB 12.8. .2 Performance Criteria

.1 Visible Light Transmittance: 74 %.

.2 Solar Light Transmittance: 55 %.

.3 Shading coefficient: 0.79.

.4 U-Value: winter 0.29 maximum. .3 Unit composition by application/location:

.1 Vision Glass - Aluminum Windows: .1 Exterior Glass Pane: 5 mm thick, grey tinted, float glass, with Low-E coating on #2

surface within unit. .2 Interior Glass Pane: 5 mm thick, clear, float glass. .3 Air space: 13 mm interpane space filled with argon gas. .4 Spacer: non-metallic, warm edge closed cell polymer foam, SUPER SPACER by Edgetech

I.G. ltd., HELITHERM SPACER by Helvetion, or Approved Alternate. .5 Overall unit thickness: 25 mm.

2.3 GLAZING COMPOUNDS .1 Butyl Sealant: ASTM C920, single Component; Shore A hardness of 10 to 20, colour black;

non-skinning. .2 Polysulfide Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS; two component; chemical curing, non-sagging

type; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; colour as selected. .3 Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS; single component, chemical curing,

non-staining, non-bleeding, Shore A Hardness Range 20 to 35; colour as selected.


Page 4


217073

February 2018

.4 Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS; single component; chemical curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non-staining cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; colour as selected.

2.4 GLAZING ACCESSORIES .1 Setting Blocks: ASTM C864, Neoprene; 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness tested to ASTM D2240,

length of 25 mm for each sq m of glazing or minimum 100 mm x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1.5 mm x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.

.2 Spacer Shims: ASTM C864, Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness tested to ASTM D2240, minimum 75 mm long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application self adhesive on one face.

.3 Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness tested to ASTM D2240; coiled on release paper; black colour.

.4 Glazing Tape: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride foam, coiled on release paper over adhesive on two sides, maximum water absorption by volume of 2%, designed for compression of 25% to effect an air barrier and vapour retarder seal.

.5 Glazing Gasket Splines: ASTM C864, Resilient polyvinyl chloride extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; black colour.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. .2 Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede

moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.

3.2 PREPARATION .1 Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. .2 Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. .3 Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. .4 Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND GASKET SPLINE GLAZING) .1 Cut glazing tape to length; install on glazing pane. Seal corners by butting tape and sealing junctions

with butyl sealant. .2 Place setting blocks at 1/3 points with edge block no more than 150 mm from corners. .3 Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full contact. .4 Install removable stops without displacing glazing spline. Exert pressure for full continuous contact. .5 Trim protruding tape edge.

3.4 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR WET/DRY METHOD (PREFORMED TAPE AND SEALANT) .1 Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, 5 mm below sight line. Seal corners by

butting tape and dabbing with butyl sealant. .2 Apply heel bead of butyl sealant along intersection of permanent stop with frame ensuring full

perimeter seal between glass and frame to complete the continuity of the air and vapour seal. .3 Place setting blocks at 1/3 points with edge block no more than 150 mm from corners.


Page 5


217073

February 2018

.4 Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape and heel bead of sealant with sufficient pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of pane or glass unit.

.5 Install removable stops, with spacer strips inserted between glazing and applied stops, [6 mm ] below sight line.

.6 Place glazing tape on glazing pane or unit with tape flush with sight line.

.7 Fill gap between glazing and stop with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glazing, but not more than 10 mm below sight line.

.8 Apply cap bead of sealant along void between the stop and the glazing, to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth.

3.5 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE) .1 Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1.5 mm above sight line. .2 Place setting blocks at 1/3 points with edge block no more than 150 mm from corners. .3 Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit. .4 Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above. .5 Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous

contact. .6 Knife trim protruding tape.

3.6 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR WET/DRY METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT) .1 Cut glazing tape to length and install against permanent stops, projecting 1.5 mm above sight line. .2 Place setting blocks at 1/3 points with edge block no more than 150 mm from corners. .3 Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape to ensure full contact at perimeter of pane or unit. .4 Install removable stops, spacer shims inserted between glazing and applied stops at 600 mm intervals,

6 mm below sight line. .5 Fill gaps between pane and applied stop with sealant to depth equal to bite on glazing, to uniform and

level line. .6 Trim protruding tape edge.

3.7 CLEANING .1 Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. .2 Remove labels after Work is complete. .3 Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.

3.8 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK .1 After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. Do not mark heat

absorbing or reflective glass units.

END OF SECTION

09 03 95 TERRAZZO RESTORATION

Page 1


217073

February 2018

Section 09 03 95 - Terrazzo Restoration

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Cleaning and repair of existing terrazzo finishes. .2 Resurfacing of existing Portland cement terrazzo finishes. .3 Sealing of existing terrazzo finishes.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section <>09 66 13 - Portland Cement Terrazzo: New terrazzo finishes.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ASTM C33/C33M-13 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. .2 ASTM C150/C150M-12 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. .3 CSA-A3000-13 - Cementitious Materials Compendium (Consists of A3001, A3002, A3003, A3004 and

A3005). .4 TTMAC - Specification Guide 09 30 00, Tile Installation Manual 2012-2014.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data: Descriptive data and application instructions for cleaner and sealer. .2 Samples: Provide two (2) terrazzo samples, 300 x 300 mm size, in each color specified.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION .1 Qualification Statement: Installer qualifications, including previous projects.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Restorer Qualifications:

.1 Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three (3) years documented experience.

.2 Successful completion of at least three (3) projects of similar scope and complexity within past five (5) years.

1.7 |SITE CONDITIONS .1 Ambient Conditions:

.1 Do not resurface terrazzo at ambient temperatures below 10 degrees C or above 32 degrees C .

.2 Maintain this temperature range for 24 hours prior to, during, and for 72 hours after completion of terrazzo resurfacing.


Page 2


217073

February 2018

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MATERIALS .1 Portland Cement: CSA-A3000, Type GU, colour White. .2 Sand: CSA-A3000, sharp, coarse, screened, clean, and free of deleterious matter, colour to match

existing terrazzo. .3 Colour Pigments: Alkali-resistant, non-fading mineral pigments. .4 Water: Potable, clean, and free of organic matter.

2.2 ACCESSORIES .1 Curing Materials: Heavy kraft paper or polyethylene sheeting. .2 Terrazzo Cleaner: Specifically produced for use on terrazzo, pH factor between 7 and 10;

biodegradable and phosphate free. .3 Paint Stripper: Capable of removing paints with damage to terrazzo. .4 Sealer: Penetrating type specifically produced for use on terrazzo, pH factor between 7 and 10,

slip-resistant.

2.3 MIXES .1 Terrazzo Surfacing: Proportions to match existing terrazzo. .2 Thoroughly mix dry materials prior to adding water. Add water and mix to workable consistency.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 PREPARATION .1 Remove damaged and deteriorated terrazzo without damage to adjacent terrazzo. .2 Clean substrate; remove loose and foreign matter that could impair adhesion.

3.2 CLEANING TERRAZZO .1 Remove paints using strippers applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Rinse surfaces

with clean water. .2 Clean with cold water and detergent solution using fibre brush. .3 If detergent solution proves ineffective, clean with terrazzo cleaner:

.1 Wet surfaces with clean water.

.2 Apply terrazzo cleaner to manufacturer's written instructions by brush or roller. Allow to stand on surface for period recommended by manufacturer.

.3 Rinse thoroughly with clean water.

.4 Repeat cleaning procedure when required, but do not apply cleaner more than twice. .4 Remove paint using paint remover applied to manufacturer's written instructions. Rinse surfaces with

clean water.

3.3 PATCHING .1 Thoroughly saturate surfaces to be patched with clean water. .2 Where terrazzo has been completely removed down to substrate, coat substrate with neat cement

paste. Do not allow to dry before placing terrazzo.


Page 3


217073

February 2018

.3 Fill holes and voids with terrazzo mix to height of existing terrazzo. Where depth of new terrazzo exceeds 13 mm , place terrazzo in multiple layers.

.4 Trowel smooth and mixture level with existing surfaces.

.5 Cover terrazzo with paper or sheeting for minimum seven (7) days or until patches develop sufficient strength to prevent lifting and pulling of chips during grinding.

.6 Grind with 24 or finer grit stones or with comparable diamond plates.

.7 Grind again with 80 or finer grit stones until grout is removed from surface and terrazzo shows percentage of surface aggregate to match existing.

.8 Wash floor with clean water and rinse thoroughly. Remove excess rinse water. Apply grout using identical cement and color pigments used in topping; fill voids.

3.4 RESURFACING TERRAZZO .1 Thoroughly saturate subfloor with clean water. .2 Coat substrate with neat cement paste; broom into substrate. Do not allow to dry before placing

terrazzo. .3 Seed troweled surface with additional chips in same proportions as contained in terrazzo mix, and

trowel. .4 Roll seeded surface with heavy roller until excess water has been extracted. .5 Trowel to uniform, smooth, and level surface. .6 Cover terrazzo with paper or sheeting for minimum seven (7) days or until topping develops sufficient

strength to prevent lifting and pulling of chips during grinding. .7 Grind with 24 or finer grit stones or with comparable diamond plates. .8 Grind again with 80 or finer grit stones until grout is removed from surface and terrazzo shows percent

of surface aggregate to match existing. .9 Wash floor with clean water and rinse thoroughly. Remove excess rinse water. Apply grout using

identical cement and colour pigments used in topping; fill voids.

3.5 SEALING .1 Thoroughly wash surfaces with neutral cleaner. Rinse with clean water and allow to dry. .2 Apply sealer to manufacturer's instructions.

3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK .1 Provide temporary protection for completed work using non-staining coverings.

END OF SECTION

09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

Page 1


217073

February 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Gypsum board and joint treatment. .2 Cementitious backer board. .3 Light gauge metal stud wall framing. .4 Metal channel ceiling framing.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping. .2 Section 09 22 16 - Non-Structural Metal Stud Framing. .3 Section 09 30 00 - Tiling. .4 Section 09 51 13 - Acoustic Panel Ceilings. .5 Section 09 91 10 - Painting.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ANSI A118.9 - Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units. .2 ASTM C475/C475M-15 - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing

Gypsum Board. .3 ASTM C645-14 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members. .4 ASTM C754-17 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive

Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products. .5 ASTM C840-17a - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. .6 ASTM C1002-16 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of

Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs. .7 ASTM C1047-14a - Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer

Base. .8 ASTM C1278/C1278M-17 - Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panel. .9 ASTM C1288-17 - Standard Specification for Discrete Non-Asbestos Fiber-Cement Interior Substrate

Sheets. .10 ASTM C1325-17a - Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cementitious Backer

Units. .11 ASTM C1396/C1396M-17 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board. .12 ASTM C1629/C1629M - Standard Classification for Abuse-Resistant Nondecorated Interior Gypsum

Panel Products and Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels. .13 CAN/ULC-A82.27-M91 - Gypsum Board. .14 CAN/ULC-A82.31-M91 - Gypsum Board Application. .15 CAN/ULC-S101-14 - Standard Methods of Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction and Materials. .16 CAN/ULC-S102-10 - Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

and Assemblies. .17 CAN/ULC-S114 Standard Method of Test for Determination of Non-Combustibility in Building Materials. .18 CGC Inc.: CGC Gypsum Construction Handbook. .19 Ceiling & Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA): Ceiling Systems Handbook. .20 Gypsum Association GA-214-10 - Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. .21 Gypsum Association GA-216-13 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products.


Page 2


217073

February 2018

.22 Gypsum Association GA-600-15 - Fire Resistance Design Manual.

.23 Gypsum Association GA-801-17 - Handling and Storage of Gypsum Panel Products: A Guide for Distributors, Retailers, and Contractors.

.24 UL - Fire Resistance Directory.

.25 ULC-FR-14 - Fire Resistance Directory (2014 Edition).

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data:

.1 Provide data on gypsum board, cementitious backer board, joint tape, corner casing beads, reveal and edge trims.

.2 Provide 300 mm long samples of corner beads, edge trims and insulating strip.

.3 Provide MSDS on all products within the shaft wall assembly. .2 Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing, acoustic seal for openings, and

firestopping seal for openings.


1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Perform Work in accordance with GA-214, GA-216, and GA-600 as applicable. Maintain one (1) copy

on site. .2 Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum

three (3) years documented experience. .3 Handling Gypsum Board: Comply with GA-801.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS .1 Conform to applicable code for assemblies in conjunction with Sections as follows:

.1 Fire-Resistance Rated Assemblies: Provide Products and construction identical to those tested in the listed assemblies; to CAN/ULC-S101.

.2 Sound Rated Assemblies: Provide Products and construction identical to those tested in the listed assemblies; to ASTM E90.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MANUFACTURERS .1 Manufacturers of gypsum board having Product considered acceptable for use:

.1 CertainTeed Gypsum, Canada Inc.

.2 CGC Inc.

.3 G-P Gypsum Corporation.

2.2 FRAMING MATERIALS .1 Metal Studs and Tracks: Specified in Section 09 22 16. .2 Metal Furring, Framing, and Accessories: Specified in Section 09 22 16. .3 Fasteners: to ASTM C1002 and GA-216. .4 Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit

application; to rigidly secure materials in place.


Page 3


217073

February 2018

2.3 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS .1 Gypsum Board (GB): ASTM C1396/C1396M, paper-faced; 1220 mm wide, maximum available practical

length in place; tapered edges, ends square cut. Thickness as indicated on Drawings. .2 Gypsum Board - Fire-Rated (GB-R): ASTM C1396/C1396M, Type X, ULC labeled, paper-faced; 1220 mm

wide, maximum available practical length in place; tapered edges, ends square cut. Thickness as indicated on Drawings.

.3 Gypsum Non-Rated Ceiling Board (GB-C): ASTM C1396/C1396M, paper-faced, regular core, sag resistant, 13 mm thick; 1220 mm wide, maximum available length in place; tapered edges, ends square cut. Sheetrock Brand Interior Ceiling Board - Sag Resistant by CGC Inc., Easi-Lite Gypsum Baord by CertainTeed, or ToughRock Span 24 Lite-Weight Ceiling Board by G-P Gypsum Corp.

.4 Water Resistant Gypsum Board (GB-WR): ASTM C1278/C1278M, Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, Type X where required, glass fibre-reinforced, paperless face, moisture and mould resistant core; maximum available length in place; tapered edges, ends square cut. maximum available length in place; square edges, ends square cut. Provide fire rated board for rated wall applications. Sheeetrock Brand Mould Tough Panels (Firecode X) by CGC inc., M2Tech (Type X) by CertainTeed, or ToughRock (Fireguard X) Mould Guard by G-P Gypsum Corp.

.5 Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board (GB-AR): ASTM C1396/C1396M, Type X, paper-faced, impact resistant, fibre reinforced; maximum available practical length in place; tapered edges, ends square cut. Thickness as indicated on Drawings. Sheetrock Brand AR Firecode X by CGC Inc., Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board by CertainTeed, or ToughRock Fireguard X Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board by G-P Gypsum Corp.

.6 Cementitious Backer Board (CBB): ASTM C1325, high density, fibre reinforced cementitious board, wet strength, thickness as indicated on Drawings; maximum available size in place; smoothed edges, ends square cut. Durock Cementboard by CGC Inc., or PermaBase Cement Board by CertainTeed.

2.4 ACCESSORIES .1 Corner Beads: GA-216 and ASTM C1047, Zinc coated steel sheet, minimum 0.023" overall thickness

coating Z275 (25 ga), V-shaped designed for finishing with joint compound. Model D-100 Corner Bead, as manufactured by Bailey Metal Products.

.2 Edge Trim: GA-216 and ASTM C1047; Zinc coated steel sheet, minimum 0.023" overall thickness, zinc coating Z275 (25 ga), L-shaped designed for finishing with joint compound. Model D-200 Edge Trim or Model 4411 Channel Trim (type as required to suit application) as manufactured by Bailey Metal Products.

.3 Joint Materials: GA-216 and ASTM C475/C475M. .1 Reinforcing tape, adhesive, and water. .2 Joint Tape: strong cross laminated fibre tape as recommended by gypsum board

manufacturer based on application type. .3 Joint compound: Asbestos-free, dust-controlled, by application as noted below:

.1 Standard Joint compound: to ASTM C475/C475M, sandable compound, for use as approved by board manufacturer. Sheetrock Dust Control Drywall Compound.

.2 Setting Type Joint Compound: to ASTM C475/C475M, non-sandable, setting compound, for applications listed below. Durabond '90' by CGC Inc., High Density 90 by CertainTeed, or ToughRock Setting Compound. .1 Embedding tape in abuse resistant gypsum board; .2 First two (2) coats of corner bead, 'J' moulds, edge trims, casing beads; .3 laminating gypsum board to substrates;


Page 4


217073

February 2018

.4 for filling large voids or gaps. .3 Tile Backer Board: shall be taped and filled by Section 09 31 00, including junction with

dissimilar materials. .4 Gypsum Board Fasteners: ASTM C1002, Type S for installation on steel framing or Type W for

application on wood framing, self-drilling, self-tapping gypsum board screws, length to suit application. .5 Cementitious or Water Resistant Board Fasteners: Board manufacturer's purpose made screws,

corrosion resistant steel, self-drilling points, counter-sink heads to prevent strip-out, for wood or steel substrate.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as instructed by the

manufacturer and as indicated on shop drawings. .2 Ensure all blocking required to be installed by other Sections is installed prior to commencing board

installation.

3.2 STUD/FRAMING INSTALLATION .1 Stud and framing systems installation by Section 09 22 16.

3.3 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION .1 Install gypsum board to ASTM C840, GA-216 and GA-600. .2 Do not apply gypsum board until bucks, anchors, blocking, insulation, electrical and mechanical work

are approved. .3 Erect single layer standard gypsum board in most economical direction and as recommended by

manufacturer, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. .4 Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over firm bearing. .5 Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing. Maximum screw spacing of

200 mm on centre, unless indicated otherwise in ULC or Sound Rated test assembly. .6 Use screws when fastening gypsum board to wood furring or framing. Maximum screw spacing of

[200 mm ] on centre, unless indicated otherwise in ULC or Sound Rated test assembly. .7 Double Layer Applications: Use gypsum backing board for first layer, placed parallel to framing or

furring members. Use fire rated gypsum backing board for fire rated partitions and ceilings. .8 Double Layer Applications: Secure second layer to first with fasteners. .9 Place second layer parallel to first layer, unless indicated otherwise in ULC tested assembly. Offset

joints of second layer from joints of first layer. Offset/stagger lap joints at corners in double layer applications.

.10 In rated column enclosures provide metal corner trims to the requirements of the ULC listed assembly or in accordance with OBC SB-2 requirements where they are referenced.

.11 Construct fire rated assemblies where indicated, and as detailed. Ensure the integrity of the specified fire separation is maintained.

.12 Erect exterior gypsum soffit board perpendicular to supports, with staggered end joints over supports. Support edges of board.

.13 Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board or exterior gypsum soffit board with sealant.

.14 Laminate gypsum board to substrate, where indicated, using laminating adhesive.


Page 5


217073

February 2018

.15 Apply water resistance gypsum to all walls and gypsum ceilings in washrooms and other rooms enclosing water supplies. Apply water-resistant sealants to edges, ends and cut outs to manufacturer's recommendations. Do not apply joint treatment to areas to receive tile.

.16 Apply tile backer board to areas where ceramic tile finish is specified, of the same thickness as surrounding panels.

.17 Install backing board over studs to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS AND BULKHEADS .1 Use ceiling type gypsum wallboard panels for all ceilings except where fire rated assemblies specified. .2 Provide bulkheads where indicated on drawings and where level changes occur between gypsum

ceiling finish and ceiling finishes of other Sections. Bulkhead to return to a minimum of 150 mm above the adjacent finished ceiling, as indicated or as detailed.

3.5 ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION .1 Erect accessories straight, plumb or level, rigid and at proper plane. Use full length pieces where

practical. Make joints tight, accurately aligned and rigidly secured. Mitre and fit corners accurately, free from rough edges. Secure at 150 mm o.c. using contact adhesive for full length.

.2 Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as directed by Consultant.

.3 Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated.

.4 Place reveal trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials as indicated.

.5 Install edge or reveal trims around perimeter of suspended ceilings as indicated.

.6 Install edge or reveal trims where gypsum board butts against surfaces having no trim concealing junction and where indicated. Seal joints with sealant.

.7 Install insulating strips continuously at edges of gypsum board and edge trims beads abutting metal window and exterior door frames, to provide thermal break.

.8 Install column covers and associated supporting stud assemblies in locations shown on drawings. Erect plumb and true.

.9 Sound attenuating insulation: install sound attenuating insulation full height in all stud cavities where partitions are specified to be insulated. Carefully fill all voids. Pay special attention to filling around pipe, outlet box or other wall penetration.

3.6 ACCESS DOORS .1 Install access doors/panels when and where directed for electrical and mechanical equipment or

fixtures specified in respective Sections. Coordinate with affected Subcontractors. .2 Rigidly secure frames to furring or framing systems.

3.7 JOINT TREATMENT .1 Finish to ASTM C840 and GA-214, Level as indicated below. .2 Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive

finishes.


Page 6


217073

February 2018

.3 Interior Gypsum Wallboard: .1 Completed installation to be smooth, level or plumb, free from waves and other defects and

ready for surface finish. Finish to Level 4. .1 Finish face panel joints and internal angles with joint system consisting of joint

compound, joint tape and taping compound installed according to manufacturer's directions and feathered out onto panel faces.

.2 Finish corner beads, control joints, joints in column covers, and trim as required with two coats of joint setting compound and one coat of taping compound, feathered out onto panel faces. Feather coats on to adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum [0.8 mm ].

.3 Fill screw head depressions with joint and taping compounds to bring flush with adjacent surface of gypsum board so as to be invisible after surface finish is completed.

.4 Sand lightly to remove burred edges and other imperfections. Avoid sanding adjacent surface of board.

.2 Where wall washing lights are illuminating a wall with gypsum board finish provide Level 5 finish.

.3 Fill and tape joints of gypsum board located above finished ceilings. Do not fill screw heads. Finish to Level 1.

.4 Tile Backing Board: Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind applied ceramic tile. Taping and filling by Section 09 30 00.

3.8 TOLERANCES .1 Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 3 mm in 3.6 m in any

direction.

END OF SECTION

09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING

Page 1


217073

February 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Formed metal framing of studs and furring, at interior locations. .2 Framing accessories.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum board on metal studs for partitioning. .2 Section 09 51 13 - Acoustic Panel Ceilings.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ASTM A123/A123M-13 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products. .2 ASTM A653/A653M-13 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron

Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .3 ASTM C645-13 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members. .4 ASTM C754-11 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive

Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products. .5 ASTM C1002-07(2013) - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application

of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs. .6 ASTM E90-09(2016)- Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound

Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. .7 CGC Gypsum Construction Handbook. .8 ULC Design Manual.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .1 Exterior Wall: Load bearing stud framing assembly infill, with exterior sheathing on exterior side,

insulation, air and vapour barriers, interior gypsum board on the interior side, and accessories where indicated. These assemblies contain an assembly fire resistance rating or sound rating requirement.

.2 Interior Walls/Partitions: Metal stud framing assembly with wall board, mechanically fastened or adhered on one or both sides, and including batt type acoustic insulation and including accessories where indicated. These assemblies contain an assembly fire resistance rating or sound rating requirement.

.3 Shaft Walls: Metal stud framing assembly, with integrated channel to receive shaft wall gypsum board on the concealed side, insulation and accessories where indicated and gypsum board on the exposed side. These assemblies contain an assembly fire resistance rating or sound rating requirement.

.4 Walls/Partitions acting as guards: Metal stud framed wall assembly, whether full or partial height, forming part of a guard as defined by Part 4 of the OBC, typically adjacent to an opening in the floor assembly or change in level exceeding 600 mm. These assemblies contain an assembly fire resistance rating or sound rating requirement.

.5 Suspended Ceilings: Metal stud or furring channel framed horizontal assembly carrying mechanically-fastened ceiling boards, and including acoustic ceiling hangers, insulation and accessories as indicated, suspended from the floor or roof assembly above. These assemblies contain an assembly fire resistance rating or sound rating requirement.


Page 2


217073

February 2018

.6 Bulkheads: Metal stud or furring channel framed assembly with both horizontal and vertical components, carrying mechanically-fastened ceiling boards, and including acoustic ceiling hangers, insulation and accessories as indicated, framed from the wall, floor or roof assembly above the bulkhead level. These assemblies contain an assembly fire resistance rating or sound rating requirement.

.7 A non-load bearing (non-structural) member is defined as a member in a steel-framed system which is limited to transverse (out-of-plane) load of not more than 480 PA, a superimposed axial load, exclusive of sheathing materials, of not more than 1460 N/m, or a superimposed axial load of not more than 890 N.

.8 A load bearing (structural) stud may be used in a non-load bearing application; however, non-load bearing members (studs or track) may never be used in a load bearing (axial and/or wind loading) applications.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS .1 Be responsible for the integrity and stability of all steeel stud partitions, and ensure that provisions are

made to prevent the transference of vertical structural loads onto partitions, and framing covered by this Section.

.2 Wall Dead and Live Loads: Design and size components to withstand loads caused by positive and negative pressure of wind acting normal to plane of wall to a design pressure of [0.24 kPa ].

.3 Maximum Allowable Deflection: .1 Metal framed wall assemblies: L:360. .2 Metal framed ceiling assemblies: L:240.

.4 Wall Assembly: .1 Design to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue

stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges.

.2 Design assembly to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings.

.3 Fire-Resistance Rated Assemblies: Provide Products and construction identical to those tested in the listed assemblies; to CAN/ULC-S101. Refer to Drawings and Construction Data for locations, ratings and ULC listings.

.4 Sound Rated Assemblies: Provide Products and construction identical to those tested in the listed assemblies; to ASTM E90. Refer to Drawings and Construction Data for locations and STC ratings.



.2 Coordinate the placement of components within the stud framing assembly specified in other Sections.


.1 Provide data describing standard framing member materials and finish, product criteria, load charts, bridging and fastening requirements to manufacturer's recommendations, limitations and Product labeling/colour coding references.


Page 3


217073

February 2018

.2 Provide list of wall assemblies with size and gauge of metal framing, including bridging requirements.

.3 ULC listed assembly submission sheets for each rated assembly.

.4 Provide MSDS information for all products. .2 Shop Drawings:

.1 Assemblies requiring Shop Drawing submission, complete with professional stamp and signature, include: .1 Walls exceeding [4.66 m ] in height. .2 Walls adjacent to floor openings acting as guards. Design to include for guard loads

outlined in Part 4 of the OBC. .3 Walls adjacent to elevator shafts or vertical service shafts. Design to include for pressure

loads and guard loads. .4 All suspended metal framed ceiling assemblies exceeding 1.22 m in any dimension. .5 Ceiling bulkheads exceeding 1.0 m in width for a length greater than 3.0 m.

.2 Shop drawings shall show in as large a scale as possible, details and erection diagrams, indicate member sizes, locations, thicknesses exclusive of coating, coatings, materials, provision for expansion and contraction, details of other pertinent components of work, and adjacent constructions to which work of this Section shall be attached. Include connection details for attaching framing to itself and for attachments to structure. Show splice details where details permitted. Indicate dimensions, openings, requirements of related work and critical installation procedures. Show temporary bracing required for erection purposes.

.3 Describe method for securing studs to tracks, bridging, splicing and for blocking and reinforcement to framing connections.

.4 Shop drawings shall bear professional stamp and signature of professional engineer licensed to design structures and registered in Province of Ontario.

.5 If requested, where Shop Drawings require a Engineer's seal, provide calculations for loadings and stresses of under the Professional Structural Engineer's seal. Indicate design loads on shop drawings.


1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Perform Work to ASTM C754. .2 Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this



PART 2 - Products

2.1 MANUFACTURERS .1 Manufacturers of metal framing having Product considered acceptable for use:

.1 Bailey Metal Products Ltd.

.2 CGC Inc.

.3 Dietrich Metal Framing.


Page 4


217073

February 2018

2.2 STUD FRAMING MATERIALS .1 Non-Lad Bearing channel framing (Studs): ASTM A653/A653M, non-load bearing rolled steel,

galvanized or galvalum finished, C channel shaped with a minimum flange width of 32 mm, flange dimpled faces, punched for utility access, size as indicated. Gauge and flange width to be adjusted to ensure conformity with the performance criteria and height limits based on manufacturer's literature. .1 For interior use only:

.1 Walls up to 2730 mm in height, provide a minimum of 25 gauge base metal thickness.

.2 Walls up to 4880 mm in height, provide a minimum of 20 gauge base metal thickness. .2 For use with tile backer board or abuse resistance gypsum board, provide a provide a minimum

of 20 gauge base metal thickness. .2 Tracks and Headers: Same material and thickness as studs, bent leg retainer, in widths to suit studs.

.1 Provide deflection headers, with U-shaped long legs, designed to accommodate structural deflections; depth of deflection as indicated on Drawings.

.3 Ceiling Runners: With extended leg retainer.

.4 Furring Channels: galvanized cold rolled steel, 22 mm deep, minimum 13 mm flange width, and a minimum of 25 gauge base metal thickness, unless otherwise noted. Shapes include C-channels, Hat channels and Z- shaped furring as indicated on Drawings.

.5 Bridging/Stiffening Channels: galvanized cold rolled steel, to size as recommended by stud manufacturer to meet framing performance criteria.

.6 Fasteners: to ASTM C1002, self drilling, self tapping screws.

.7 Suspension Systems: .1 Carrying Channels: to ASTM C754, minimum 1.37 mm ( thick cold rolled steel with galvanized

or galvalume finish; minimum yield strength of 228Mpa; C shaped with minimum 13 mm flange width, 38 mm deep, unless increased size, gauge or strength is noted otherwise in Approved Shop Drawings or as required to support intended loads.

.2 Furring Channels: galvanized cold rolled steel, 22 mm deep, minimum 13 mm flange width, and a minimum of 25 gauge base metal thickness, unless otherwise noted. Shapes include C-channels, Hat channels and Z- shaped furring as indicated on Drawings.

.3 Hangar wire: to ASTM A641/A641M, zinc-coated, soft-annealed, to minimum 3.77 mm OD wire; Increase size as indicated in Approved Shop Drawings or as required to support intended loads.

.4 Tie wire: to ASTM A641/A641M, zinc-coated, soft-annealed, to minimum 1.21 mm OD wire; Increase size as indicated in Approved Shop Drawings or as required to support intended loads.

.5 Anchors: shall be fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, to anticipated loads or as indicated on Approved Shop Drawings.

.6 Fasteners: to ASTM C1002, self drilling, self tapping screws, or as indicate on Approved Shop Drawings.

.8 Anchorage Devices: Power actuated, Drilled expansion bolts, or Screws with sleeves.

.9 Acoustic Sealant: As specified in Section 09 21 16.

.10 Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: MPI #18, inorganic zinc-rich primer.

.11 Isolation Strip: Foam gasket: adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 3.2 mm thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

2.3 FABRICATION .1 Fabricate assemblies of framed sections to sizes and profiles required. .2 Fit, reinforce, and brace framing members to suit design requirements.


Page 5


217073

February 2018

.3 Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation.

2.4 FINISHES .1 Studs, Tracks and Headers: Galvanize to a minimum of Z120 zinc coating designation. .2 Studs: Electro-galvanize. .3 Accessories: Same finish as framing members.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify that rough-in utilities are in proper location. .2 Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames,

cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. .1 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

.3 Suspended Assemblies: coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure and components of other Sections. .1 Ensure inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to

receive hangers at the required spacing. .2 Supply concrete inserts and other devices to other related Sections for installation in advance.

3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL .1 Installation Standard: ASTM C754 and the CGC Gypsum Handbook, except comply with framing sizes

and spacing indicated. .1 Gypsum Board Assemblies: also comply with requirements in ASTM C840 that apply to framing

installation. .2 Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab

bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. .3 Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. .4 Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load bearing steel framing members.

Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.3 INSTALLATION - FRAMED ASSEMBLIES .1 Install metal wall framing in accordance with ASTM C754 and the CGC Gypsum Handbook. .2 Erect framing level and plumb. .3 Where wall assembly forms part of a fire rating or sound rating conform to the ULC listed assembly

requirements. .4 Utilize heavy gauge studs framing when supporting abuse resistant gypsum board or tile backer board,

or other locations as recommended by the board manufacturer or the metal framing manufacturer to obtain performance criteria and maximum deflection requirements.

.5 Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls, or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

.6 Install isolation strip or dampproof course under stud shoe tracks of partitions installed on slab-on-grade.

.7 Align and secure top and bottom runners at 600 mm on centre.


Page 6


217073

February 2018

.8 Place two (2) beads of acoustic sealant between runners and substrate, studs and adjacent construction to achieve an acoustic seal around the perimeter of walls indicated to be constructed as sound separations having an STC rating.

.9 Achieve an air tight seal between runners and substrate with acoustic sealant in conjunction with Section 07 27 00.

.10 Fit runners under and above openings; secure intermediate studs to same spacing as wall studs.

.11 Install studs vertically at spacing 400 mm on centre, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings and Construction Data.

.12 Align stud web openings horizontally.

.13 Install studs such that flanges within the same framing system point in the same direction.

.14 Secure studs to tracks using fastener method. Do not weld.

.15 Stud Splicing: Not permissible.

.16 Fabricate corners using a minimum of three studs.

.17 Co-ordinate erection of studs with installation of door/window frames and special supports or anchorage for work specified in other Sections.

.18 Provide two studs extending from floor to ceiling at each side of openings wider than stud centres specified. Secure studs together, [50 mm ] apart using column clips or other approved means of fastening placed alongside frame anchor clips.

.19 Door Openings: screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips to door frames; install track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. .1 Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. .2 Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum [13 mm ] clearance

from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. .20 Other Framed Openings: frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door

openings, unless otherwise indicated. Erect tracks at head and sills of openings, securing to studs at each end. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

.21 Frame openings and around built-in equipment, cabinets, access panels, on four sides. Extend framing into reveals. Check clearances and coordinate locations with equipment suppliers.

.22 Coordinate locations of studs with control joints in gypsum board with Consultant. Provide framing each side of control joints.

.23 Install steel studs or furring channel between studs for attaching electrical and other boxes.

.24 Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

.25 Ceiling bulkheads: .1 Furr for gypsum board faced vertical bulkheads within and at termination of ceilings. .2 Furr above suspended ceilings for gypsum board fire and sound stops and to form plenum

areas as indicated. .3 Provide bulkheads where indicated on drawings and where level changes occur between

gypsum ceiling finish and ceiling finishes of other Sections. Bulkhead to return to a minimum of [150 mm ] above the adjacent finished ceiling, as indicated or as detailed.

.4 Coordinate locations of studs with control joints in gypsum board with Consultant. Provide framing each side of control joints.

.5 Space framing members at a minimum of 400 mm on centre, unless otherwise noted in Approved Shop Drawings.

.6 Frame and support bulkheads as required to support intended loads.


Page 7


217073

February 2018

.26 Double stud at wall openings, door and window jambs, not more than [50 mm ] from each side of openings. Continue framing around ducts and other openings.

.27 Brace stud framing assembly rigid.

.28 Coordinate erection of studs with requirements of door frames, window frames, and other openings including for mechanical equipment and required clearances; install supports and attachments.

.29 Coordinate installation of wood bucks, anchors, and wood blocking with electrical and mechanical work to be placed within or behind stud framing.

.30 Blocking: Coordinate installation of blocking for support of components by other Sections, including but not limited to, plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, hardware, opening frames.

.31 Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending to finished ceiling only and for partitions extending through the ceiling to the structure above. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. Provide extended leg ceiling runners. Where partitions only extend to the underside of finished ceiling, attach ceiling runner securely to acoustic ceiling track or ceiling framing to manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate with other Sections as required.

.32 Coordinate placement of insulation in stud spaces after stud frame erection.

3.4 INSTALLATION - WALL FURRING .1 Wall furring:

.1 Install wall furring for gypsum board wall finishes in accordance with CSA A82.31-M1991, except where specified otherwise.

.2 Erect furring with a maximum spacing of 400 mm on centre, not more than 100 mm from floor and ceiling lines, or abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 600 mm on centre.

.3 Furr openings and around built-in equipment, cabinets, access panels, on four sides. Extend furring into reveals. Check clearances with equipment suppliers.

.4 Furr duct shafts, beams, columns, pipes and exposed services where indicated, or where constructed in occupied spaces.

.2 Install furring as required for fire resistance ratings indicated and to GA-600 requirements.

3.5 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEMS .1 Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Approved Shop Drawings,

but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated.

.2 Install ceiling framing independent of walls, columns, and above ceiling work.

.3 Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

.4 Suspended hangers from building structure as follows: .1 Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling

plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. .2 Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within

performance limits and as indicated in the Approved Shop Drawings.


Page 8


217073

February 2018

.3 Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

.4 Wire Hangers: secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structure or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

.5 Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck unless otherwise approved.

.6 Do not attach hangers to permanent mental forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms.

.7 Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.

.8 Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. .5 For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, wire tie furring channels to supports as indicated in the ULC listed

assembly. .6 Support light fixtures by providing additional ceiling suspension hangers within 150 mm of each corner

and at maximum 600 mm around perimeter of fixture. .7 Frame with furring channels, perimeter of openings for access panels, light fixtures, diffusers, grilles,

etc. .8 Install furring channels parallel to, and at exact locations of steel stud partition header track. .9 Installation Tolerances: install suspension systems that are level to within 3 mm in 3.6 m measured

lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.

.10 Laterally brace entire suspension system.

3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES .1 Maximum Variation From True Position: 3 mm in 3.6 m. .2 Maximum Variation From Plumb: 3 mm in 3.6 m.

END OF SECTION

09 30 00 TILING Page 1


217073

February 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Ceramic tiling. .2 Tile accessories. .3 Mortar and Grout.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Mildew resistant sealant. .2 Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum board and cementitious backer board wall

substrate. .3 Division 15 – Mechanical: Plumbing Fixtures.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ANSI A108/A118/A136.1-2013 - Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile - Version 2013.1..

.1 ANSI A108.5 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.

.2 ANSI A108.10 - Installation of Grout in Tilework.

.3 ANSI A118.1 - Specifications for Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar.

.4 ANSI A118.6 - Specifications for Standard Cement Grouts for Tile Installation.

.5 ANSI A118.9 - Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units.

.6 ANSI A137.1 - Specification for Ceramic Tile. .2 CAN/CGSB 51.34-M86 - Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet for Use in Building Construction. .3 CAN/CGSB 25.20-95 - Surface Sealer for Floors. .4 CSA-A3000-13 - Cementitious Materials Compendium (Consists of A3001, A3002, A3003, A3004 and

A3005). .5 TTMAC - Specification Guide 09 30 00, Tile Installation Manual 2012-2014.



.2 Coordinate requirements for floor recesses, accounting for mortar bed, bond coat and tile thickness where finished tile surfaces are installed flush with adjacent floor finishes.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each type of product specified. .2 Shop Drawings: Indicate movement joints, transitions and intersections with dissimilar materials,

colour arrangement, tile layout, patterns and edging details. .3 Samples for Initial Selection: Submit the following samples for initial selection:

.1 Tile: Submit samples of actual tiles or sections of tiles showing manufacturer's full range of colours, textures, and patterns available for each type and composition of tile indicated. Include samples of accessories involving colour selection.

.2 Grout: Manufacturer's standard colours using actual sections of grout showing full range of colours available for each type of grout indicated.



217073

February 2018

.3 Trims: Submit samples of specified trims and transitions showing manufacturer's full range of colours.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION .1 Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed the requirements of the

performance criteria as specified. .2 Installation Data:

.1 Manufacturer's recommended and special installation requirements.

.2 Written instructions for using adhesives and grouts.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS .1 Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit copies of TTMAC Maintenance Guide and additional

information as follows. .1 Manufacturer’s maintenance data sheets for floor sealers and other non-tile maintenance

materials and accessories. .2 Warning of maintenance practices or materials that may damage or disfigure finished Work.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Conform to ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 and TTMAC. .2 Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this


three (3) years documented experience and having completed tile installations similar in material, design and extent to this Project.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION .1 Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact. .2 Store materials to prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter,

and other causes; store cementitious materials in a dry area, and raised off floor and ground surfaces.

1.10 SITE CONDITIONS .1 Ambient Conditions:

.1 Apply tile after completion of Work by other sections, to dry, clean, firm, level and plumb surfaces, free from oil or wax or any other material detrimental to tile adhesion.

.2 Maintain tile materials and substrate temperature between TTMAC and manufacturer's recommended minimum and maximum temperature range whichever is more stringent.

.3 Maintain temperature range for minimum forty-eight (48) hours before and during installation and until materials are fully set and cured to manufacturer’s recommendations.

.4 Maintain adequate ventilation where Work generates toxic gases or where there is a risk of raising relative humidity to levels detrimental to building finishes and assemblies.



217073

February 2018

PART 2 - Products

2.1 CERAMIC TILE MATERIALS .1 Ceramic wall tile: to CAN2-75.1-M77, Type 1, class MR1. 105 x 105 mm size, glazed surface c/w

matching radiused edge trim, "Maple Leaf" by Olympia Tile, or approved alternate. Up to two (2) colours as later selected by Consultant from manufacturer’s standard colour range.

.2 Ceramic Floor Tile and Base: to ANSI A137.1; moisture resistance less than 0.5%, chemical resistance passing ISO 10545, unglazed porcelain, for heavy traffic, 300 x 600 mm size tiles, 100 mm high for floor base, matte finish; "Regal Series" as distributed by Olympia Tile International or approved alternate, Colour as later selected from full colour range.

2.2 TRIMS AND EDGING .1 Trims: Shapes and profiles to match colour and finish of adjoining field tile; coordinate with size and

coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. .2 Premanufactured Edging and Transition Strips: Extruded clear satin anodized aluminum edge strips,

'L' shape; height as required to suit tile installation; with integral perforated anchoring leg. .1 Product: Jolly, manufactured by Schluter.

2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS .1 Floor and Wall Tile Mortar:

.1 Latex-Portland Cement (interior thin set): ANSI A118.1, fast-setting, non-sagging water, latex modified, retentive Portland cement mortar. .1 Product: C-Crylic 200 with Permabond, manufactured by C-Cure. .2 Product: Kerabond with Keralstic, manufactured by Mapei. .3 Product: Laticrete 272 Mortar with Laticrete 333, manufactured by Laticrete

.2 Tile Grout: .1 Portland Cement Grout - Unsanded:

.1 ANSI A118.6 , factory blended latex-portland cement grout, specifically formulated for joints maximum 3 mm wide.

.2 Colour: As selected from manufacturer¢s standard range.

.3 Products: .1 Product: MP Non-Sanded 923, manufactured by C-Cure. .2 Product: Keracolor 'U', manufactured by Mapei. .3 Product: Laticrete 1600 with Laticrete 1776 Grout Admix Plus, manufactured by

Laticrete. .2 Portland Cement Grout - Sanded:

.1 ANSI A118.6 , factory blended dry-set stain resistant, latex modified portland cement and graded silica sand, formulated for joints greater than 3 mm wide.

.2 Colour: As selected from manufacturer's standard range.

.3 Products: .1 Product: MP Sanded 924, manufactured by C-Cure. .2 Product: Keracolor 'S', manufactured by Mapei. .3 Product: Laticrete 1500 with Laticrete 1776 Grout Admix Plus, manufactured by

Laticrete.



217073

February 2018

2.4 ACCESSORIES .1 Joint Sealant: As specified in Section 07 92 00.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Examine surfaces and verify that surfaces are ready to receive tile installation.

.1 Concrete substrates have cured minimum of ninety (90) days to TTMAC requirements.

.2 Substrates are dry; clean; free from oil, waxy films, and curing compounds.

.3 Grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of Work in or behind tile have been installed.

.4 Joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations. .2 Verify tile subject to colour variations has been factory blended and packaged. If not factory blended,

blend tiles at site before installing.

3.2 PREPARATION .1 Protect surrounding work from damage or disfiguration. .2 Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. .3 Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to flatness tolerances

specified. .4 Install backing board over metal studs to board manufacturer's written instructions. Tape joints and

corners.

3.3 INSTALLATION .1 Install tile to TTMAC and manufacturer’s written instructions. .2 Request tile pattern. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. .3 Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete

covering without interruptions: .4 Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations through tile. Form corners neatly. Align wall joints. .5 Install premanufactured metal edge trim to all exposed tile edges which are field cut and/or do not

have a factory bullnose profile. .6 Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints

watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar or grout. .7 Adjust tile layout to minimize tile cutting. Maintain minimum tile width of one-third unit size unless

indicated otherwise on Drawings. .8 Form internal angles square and external angles square. .9 Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. .10 Keep control joints joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. .11 Allow tile to set for a minimum of forty-eight (48) hours prior to grouting. .12 Install grout to TTMAC and manufacturer’s written instructions. .13 Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and planes.



217073

February 2018

3.4 LIPPAGE TOLERANCES .1 Field Verification of Finished Installation: To TTMAC lippage limits as follows:

TILE TYPE TILE SIZE JOINT WIDTH ALLOWABLE LIPPAGE Glazed Wall/Mosaics 25 x 25 mm to 150 x 150

mm 1.5 mmto 3 mm 0.78 mm

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Provide inspection of the following:

.1 Tiles are set flush and level with adjacent tiles, meeting lippage requirements.

.2 Identify broken, cracked, damaged or hollow sounding tiles.

.3 Accessories are correctly installed.

.4 Grouting and sealant are correctly installed.

.5 Installation is complete to TTMAC.

3.6 CLEANING .1 Clean tile and grout surfaces with manufacturer's recommended cleaning methods.

3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK .1 Protect finished areas from traffic until setting materials have sufficiently cured to TTMAC

requirements. .2 Protect finished floor areas from foot and wheel traffic from floors for a minimum of twenty-four (24)

hours after completion of grouting.

END OF SECTION

09 51 13 ACOUSTIC PANEL CEILINGS

Page 1


217073

February 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Suspended metal grid ceiling system and perimeter trim. .2 Acoustic tile.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Division 15 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning (HVAC): Air diffusion devices in ceiling system. .2 Division 16 – Electrical: Light fixtures in ceiling system. .3 Division 16 – Electronic Safety and Security: Fire alarm components in ceiling system.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ASTM C635/C635M-13a - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of

Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. .2 ASTM C636/C636M-13 - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels. .3 ASTM E580/E580M-11be1 - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions. .4 ASTM E1264-08e1 - Standard Classification of Acoustical Ceiling Products. .5 Ceiling & Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA): Ceiling Systems Handbook. .6 UL - Fire Resistance Directory. .7 ULC-FR-14 - Fire Resistance Directory (2014 Edition).

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS .1 Installed System: Conform to UL or ULC Listed Assembly Designs indicated on the Drawings and

Construction Data. .2 Suspension System: Maximum deflection of 1:360 for acoustic ceiling system including integral

mechanical and electrical components.

1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS .1 Division 01: Project management and coordination procedures. .2 Sequencing:

.1 Sequence work to ensure acoustic ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved.

.2 Install acoustic units after interior wet work is dry.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Division 01: Submission procedures. .2 Product Data: Provide data on metal grid system components, acoustic units and trims. .3 Samples:

.1 Submit one (1) sample of each type of lay-in tile specified, 150 x 300 mm in size, illustrating, texture, pattern, edge profile, colour, material and finish of acoustic units.

.2 Submit one (1) samples of each, 300 mm long, of suspension system main runner, cross runner, perimeter molding, or profile edge moulding.


Page 2


217073

February 2018

1.7 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION .1 Division 01: Submission procedures. .2 Installation Data: Manufacturer's special installation requirements, including perimeter conditions

requiring special attention.

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS .1 Division 01: Maintenance and extra material requirements. .2 Extra Stock Materials: for each lay in tile ceiling Product, colour and pattern, clearly marked to

identify: .1 Manufacturer's name; .2 Product name; .3 Product colour and pattern.

.3 Provide minimum of two (2) full, unopened bundles for each of extra ceiling tile to Owner.

.4 Provide letter from Owner's representative acknowledging receipt of this material.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Conform to CISCA requirements. .2 Grid Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in

this section with minimum three (3) years documented experience. .3 Acoustic Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products

specified in this section with minimum three (3) years documented experience.

1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS .1 Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies and combustibility requirements for materials.


.1 Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 16 degrees C , and maximum humidity of 40% prior to, during, and after acoustic unit installation.

1.12 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .1 Deliver materials in their original wrappings or containers with manufacturer's labels and seals intact

and store in a dry area under cover and clear of the ground. .2 Ship grid members and mouldings in rigid crates and avoid damage. Bent or deformed material will

be rejected.

1.13 WARRANTY .1 Provide One (1) Year Written Warranty against sagging of acoustical ceiling tiles. .2 Provide Ten (10) Year Written Warranty against rusting and other manufacture defects for grid system.


Page 3


217073

February 2018

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MANUFACTURERS - SUSPENSION SYSTEM .1 Manufacturers offering functionally and aesthetically equivalent products.

.1 Armstrong World Industries.

.2 CGC Inc.

2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM / CEILING GRID MATERIALS .1 Fire Rated Grid: ASTM C635/C635M, heavy duty, listed by ULC for use in a 1 or 2 hour assembly,

double webbed, hot dipped galvanized, cold rolled steel, non rated; main tees, cross tees and grid adapters with components die cut and interlocking; shop finished. .1 Profile: exposed T, with 43 mm depth. .2 Exposed Grid Surface Width: 24 mm. .3 Grid Finish: Colour White. .4 Product: Basis of Design Prelude XL 15/16" Fireguard by Armstrong Ceilings or Donn

BrandDX/DXL 15/16" by CGC inc. .2 Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips required for

suspended grid system. .3 Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, ceiling system

flatness requirement specified. .4 Hanger Wire: to ASTM A641/A641M, zinc coated, soft annealed, minimum 3.77 mm OD steel wire. .5 Tie Wire: to ASTM A641/A641M, zinc coated, soft annealed, minimum 1.21 mm OD steel wire.

2.3 MANUFACTURERS - ACOUSTIC UNIT MATERIALS .1 Manufacturers offering functionally and aesthetically equivalent products.

.1 Armstrong World Industries.

.2 CGC Inc.

2.4 ACOUSTIC / LAY-IN TILE MATERIALS .1 Acoustic Ceiling Tile - Fire Rated: UL listed fire rating, wet formed mineral fiber and fire-rated core,

non-sagging, lay-in tile to ASTM E1264, Type III, Form 2, Pattern C, E; complete with anti-mould and mildew treatment and sag resisting treatment; conforming to the following: .1 Size: 610 x 1220 mm. .2 Thickness: 16 mm minimum as required to meet UL Des and weight requirements. .3 Composition: Mineral. .4 Weight: minimum 5.3 kg/s m (1.1 lbs/sq.ft). .5 Light Reflectance: 84% or greater. .6 NRC Range: 0.55 or greater. .7 CAC Range: 33 or greater. .8 Fire Hazard Classification CAN/ULC S102: Class A, Flame spread 25 or less, Smoke

Development 50 or less. .9 UL Design Listing: UL-FR-83 or to comply with requirements of UL Design G205. .10 Edge: Square. .11 Surface Colour: White. .12 Surface Finish: Non-directional fissured.


Page 4


217073

February 2018

.13 Basis of Design: Radar Climaplus FC 5/8" by CGC inc. or Fine Fissured Fire Guard w/ Humi-Guard by Armstrong.

2.5 ACCESSORIES .1 Hold Down Clips: Fire rated hold down clips as required by manufacturer and UL Design. .2 Fire Rated Light Fixture Enclosure: site constructed from fire rated acoustic panel material as indicated

in UL Design. .3 Touch-up Paint: Type and colour to match acoustic and grid units.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Division 01: Verify existing conditions before starting work. .2 Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.

3.2 INSTALLATION - LAY-IN GRID SUSPENSION SYSTEM .1 Install suspension system to ASTM C636/C636M, manufacturer's written instructions, UL Design, and as

supplemented in this section. .2 Install system to ASTM E580/E580M. .3 Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 maximum. .4 Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan. .5 Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other

work. .6 Provide hanger clips during steel deck erection. Provide additional hangers and inserts as required. .7 Hang suspension system directly from structural elements, independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes

and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.

.8 Space hangers at minimum of 1200 mm on centre along main tees, and not more than 150 mm from ends. Do not place hangers in front of access panels.

.9 Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.

.10 Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within [150 mm ] of each corner; or support components independently.

.11 Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners.

.12 Install additional hangers and reinforcing as required to accommodate loads being carried.

.13 Install main tees suspended at maximum 1200 mm on centre and maximum 600 mm from walls. Ensure when main tees are cut to suit room length the thermal expansion punch out is provided in the cut piece of main tee.

.14 Install cross tees and adapters perpendicular to main tees, and interlock with main tees.

.15 Frame around fixtures and openings.

.16 Design system to accommodate movement caused by thermal expansion or contraction.

.17 Design hangers and carrying members to support the entire ceiling system including lighting fixtures, diffusers and equipment openings in location shown on Drawings.

.18 Perimeter Molding: .1 Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces with continuous gasket.


Page 5


217073

February 2018

.2 Use longest practical lengths.

.3 Mitre corners.

.4 Provide molding at junctions with other interruptions. .19 Form expansion joints as detailed. Form to accommodate plus or minus [25 mm ] movement.

Maintain visual closure. .20 Install light fixture boxes constructed of acoustic panel above light fixtures to UL/ULC assembly

requirements and light fixture ventilation requirements.

3.3 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTIC UNITS .1 Install acoustic units to manufacturer's written instructions. .2 Fit acoustic units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and

function. .3 Lay directional patterned units as indicated on drawings. Fit border trim neatly against abutting

surfaces. .4 Install units after above ceiling work is complete. .5 Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. .6 Cutting Acoustic Units:

.1 Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim.

.2 Double cut and field paint exposed edges of tegular units. .7 Where bullnose concrete block corners or round obstructions occur, provide preformed closures to

match perimeter molding. .8 Install hold-down clips to retain panels tight to grid system where UL listed assembly indicates clips are

required, and/or within 6 m20 ft of an exterior door.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES .1 Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 3 mm in 3.6 m. .2 Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.

END OF SECTION

09 66 13 PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO FLOORING

Page 1


217073

February 2018

Section 09 66 13 - Portland Cement Terrazzo Flooring

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Terrazzo flooring. .2 Divider strips and edging.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 09 03 95 - Terrazzo Restoration.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ASTM A1064/A1064M-13 - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire

Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete. .2 ASTM C33/C33M-13 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. .3 ASTM C150/C150M-12 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. .4 ASTM C309-11 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. .5 CSA-A3000-13 - Cementitious Materials Compendium (Consists of A3001, A3002, A3003, A3004 and

A3005). .6 Specification Guide 09 66 00, Terrazzo Installation Manual 2006-2007.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS .1 Coordination: Coordinate with other work having a direct bearing on work of this section.

.1 Coordinate the work with mechanical and electrical access cover placement in relation to terrazzo divider strips.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data: Provide data for divider strips sealer. .2 Samples: Submit two (2) samples, 150 x 150 mm in size illustrating colour, chip size / variation and

mortar colour.


1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS .1 Operation and Maintenance Data: Include procedures for stain removal, stripping, and sealing.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Perform Work in accordance with TTMAC. .2 Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum


1.9 MOCK-UP .1 Provide mock-up including floor and divider strips.


Page 2


217073

February 2018

.2 Locate where directed by Consultant.

.3 Approved mock-up may remain as part of the Work.


.1 Do not install terrazzo when temperature is below 10 degrees C or above 32 degrees C.

.2 Maintain this temperature range 24 hours before, during, and 72 hours after installation of terrazzo.

.3 Provide lighting level of 860 lx measured at floor surface.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MATERIALS .1 Portland Cement: CSA-A3000, Type TTMAC; GU colour for topping mix; grey colour for underbed;

modified to white higher compressive strength requirements; obtained from single source. .2 Colour Pigments For Topping: Non-fading mineral type. .3 Terrazzo Sand: Sharp, coarse, clean, screened, and free of deleterious material. .4 Water: Potable. .5 Surface Aggregate: Type, colour, and size to match existing.

2.2 ACCESSORIES .1 Divider Strips: zinc exposed top strip to match existing. .2 Curing Compound: ASTM C309. .3 Cleaner: Neutralizing liquid type, pH of 7 - 10. .4 Sealer: Colourless, penetrating liquid type to completely seal cementitious matrix surface; not

detrimental to terrazzo components.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. .2 Do not begin terrazzo work until concrete substrate has cured 28 days, minimum.

3.2 PREPARATION .1 Clean substrate of foreign matter. .2 Remove surface water and thoroughly brush in neat cement slurry bond coat. .3 Prepare wood subfloor, tape joints, and apply subfloor filler. Isolate terrazzo installation from wood

subfloor with slip sheet, lap edges and ends.

3.3 INSTALLATION - MONOLITHIC TERRAZZO .1 Saw cut underbed to install divider strips as required. .2 Install strips straight and level to match existing patterns. .3 Install terminating cap strip at top of base; attach securely to wall substrate. .4 Place terrazzo topping mix over slurry coated substrate to a nominal thickness of 25 mm.


Page 3


217073

February 2018

3.4 CURING .1 Cure terrazzo topping seven (7) days by the liquid membrane curing method. .2 Use curing method to TTMAC. .3 Close area to allow undisturbed curing.

3.5 SURFACE FINISHING .1 Brush apply terrazzo topping mix slurry to topping surface. .2 Finish terrazzo to TTMAC. .3 Produce terrazzo finish surface to match approved mock-up with minimum 70% chip exposed. .4 Grind terrazzo surface with power disc machine; successively sequence using coarse to fine grit

abrasive, using a wet method. .5 Apply grout mix to match matrix over ground surfaces to fill honeycomb exposed during grinding. .6 After grout has sufficiently cured, grind, using a fine grit abrasive.

3.6 TOLERANCES .1 Maximum Variation from Flat Surface: 3 mm in 1 m. .2 Maximum Variation from Level (Except Surfaces Sloping to Drain): 3 mm.

3.7 CLEANING .1 Scrub and clean terrazzo surfaces with cleaner to TTMAC. Let dry. .2 Immediately when dry, apply sealer to manufacturer's written instructions. Let dry. .3 Seal and polish surfaces to manufacturer's written instructions written instructions.

3.8 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK .1 Do not permit traffic over finished terrazzo surfaces.

END OF SECTION

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 1


217073

February 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Surface preparation. .2 Painting.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies. .2 Division 26 - Electrical.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 MPI (Master Painters Institute) - Architectural Painting Specifications Manual and Maintenance

Repainting Manual. .2 CAN/CGSB-85.100-93: Painting. .3 SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council): Painting Manual, Volume 2 - Systems and Specifications.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS .1 Coordination: Coordinate with other Work having a direct bearing on Work of this section. .2 Scheduling:

.1 Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of and by other trades.

.2 Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of occupants in and about building.


.1 Submit Product data on all specified finishing products.

.2 Submit copies of WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets.

.3 A list of materials proposed for use on the Work, prepared by paint manufacturer, shall be submitted in writing to the Consultant for approval 60 days before the materials are required. The list shall bear the manufacturer's official certification that the materials listed thereon are of the best quality made by the company.

.2 Samples: .1 Prepare and submit samples of each of the various finishes to the Consultant for approval at

least 30 days prior to material being required. Submit samples in triplicate on [300 x 300 mm ] material. Identify each sample as to job, finish, colour schedule identifier, formula, name of manufacturer, colour name, number, sheen name and gloss values, date and name of Contract and Sub-Contractor.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION .1 Installation Data: Manufacturer's special installation requirements including special surface

preparation procedures and substrate conditions requiring special attention. .2 Schedule:

.1 If requested, submit Work schedule for various stages of Work when painting occupied areas for Consultant's review and Owner's approval.

.2 Submit schedule minimum of forty-eight (48) hours in advance of proposed operations.

.3 Obtain written authorization from Consultant for changes in Work schedule.

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 2


217073

February 2018

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS .1 Record Documentation: Upon completion, provide itemized list of products used including the

following: .1 Manufacturer's name. .2 Product name, type and use. .3 Colour coding number. .4 Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS .1 Extra Stock Materials: Provide properly packaged maintenance material as follows.

.1 Minimum 1 L of each coating type and colour to Owner.

.2 Label each container with colour, type, texture in addition to manufacturer's label.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this

section with minimum five (5) years documented experience. .2 Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section. All work is to

be completed by skilled workers with minimum five (5) years documented experience. .3 Conform to MPI Painting Manual requirements for materials, preparation and workmanship. .4 Paint Products: Paint manufacturers and paint Products listed under the Approved Product List

section of the MPI Painting Manual. .5 Notify General Contractor in writing of defects or problems, prior to commencing painting work, or

after prime coat shows defects in substrate condition or preparation.

1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS .1 Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for finishes, storage, mixing,

application and disposal of paint and related waste materials.

1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION .1 Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers showing manufacturer's name, type of paint,

brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, colour designation, and written instructions for mixing and reducing.

.2 Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 10 degrees C and a maximum of 32 degrees C, in dry, ventilated area and as required by manufacturer's written instructions.

.3 Provide adequate fireproof storage lockers and warnings as required by authorities having jurisdiction for storing toxic and volatile/explosive/flammable materials.

.4 Provide CO2 fire extinguisher of minimum 9 kg capacity in storage area.

.5 Protection: .1 Provide metal pans or adequate tarpaulins to protect floors in areas assigned for the storage

and mixing of paints. .2 Use sufficient drop cloths and protective coverings for the full protection of floors, furnishings

and work not being painted. Protect mechanical, electrical and special equipment, hardware, and all other components of the building which do not require painting, from paint spotting and other soiling during painting process.

.3 Leave above areas clean and free from evidence of occupancy upon completion of painting.

.4 Protect paint materials from fire and freezing.

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 3


217073

February 2018

.5 Keep waste rags in metal drum containing water and remove from building at end of each working shift.


.1 Do not perform painting or decorating Work when ambient air and substrate temperatures are below 10 degrees C for both interior and exterior work, or as required by paint product manufacturer.

.2 Do not perform painting or decorating Work when relative humidity is above 85% or when dew point is less than 3 degrees C variance between the air/surface temperature required by paint Product manufacturer.

.3 Provide suitable weatherproof covering and sufficient heating facilities to maintain minimum ambient air and substrate temperatures for twenty-four (24) hours before, during and after paint application.

.4 Do not perform painting and decorating Work when maximum moisture content of substrate exceeds: .1 Wood: 15%. .2 Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 %. .3 Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12%. .4 Concrete Floors: 8%.

.5 Conduct moisture tests using a properly calibrated electronic Moisture Meter, except test concrete floors for moisture using a simple cover patch test.

.6 Test concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces for alkalinity as required.

.7 Provide minimum lighting level of 323 lux is provided on surfaces to be painted or decorated.

1.13 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL .1 Paint, stain and wood preservative finishes and related materials (thinner, solvents, etc.) are regarded

as hazardous products and are subject to regulations for disposal. Obtain information on these controls from the authorities having jurisdiction.

.2 Dispose of waste materials in accordance with local and provincial authorities having jurisdiction.

.3 Where paint recycling is available, collect waste paint by type and provide for delivery to recycling or collection facility.

.4 Place non-reusable materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive tubes and containers, in containers or areas designated for hazardous waste.

.5 To reduce contaminants entering waterways, sanitary/storm drain systems or into the ground, adhere to the following procedures: .1 Retain cleaning water for water-based materials to allow sediments to be filtered out. In no

case shall equipment be cleaned using free draining water. .2 Retain cleaners, thinners, solvents and excess paint and place in designated containers and

ensure proper disposal. .3 Return solvent and oil soaked rags used during painting operations for contaminant recovery,

proper disposal, or appropriate cleaning and laundering. .4 Dispose of contaminants in an approved legal manner in accordance with hazardous waste

regulations. .5 Dry out empty paint cans prior to disposal or recycling.

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 4


217073

February 2018

.6 Close and seal tightly partly used cans of materials including sealant and adhesive containers and store protected in well ventilated fire-safe area at moderate temperature.

.6 Set aside and protect surplus and uncontaminated finish materials and deliver or arrange collection for verifiable re-use or re-manufacturing.

1.14 WARRANTY .1 Provide two (2) year warranty on interior and exterior paint or varnish finishes, unless noted otherwise.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MATERIALS .1 Use only materials (primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers, fillers) listed in the latest

edition of the MPI Approved Product List (APL) on this project. .2 Ancillary materials such as linseed oil, shellac, thinners, solvents to be of highest quality product and

provided by an MPI listed manufacturer, and compatible with paint materials being used. .3 Where possible, all materials to be lead and mercury free with low VOC content. Use ECOLOGO

paints and coatings with volatile organic compound (VOC) contents less than 150 g/L for non-flat sheen coatings and 50 g/L for flat sheen coatings.

.4 Provide all material for each system from a single manufacturer.

.5 Fire Hazard: Flame spread and smoke developed ratings in accordance with applicable code and local authorities having jurisdiction.

.6 Patching Materials: filler as recommended by the paint manufacturer for the specific application and finish system.

.7 Fastener Head Cover Materials: filler as recommended by the paint manufacturer for the specific application and finish system.

.8 Bonding primer: For use on all previously finished surfaces specified to receive new finish. Premium quality, waterborne, acrylic urethane, low odor/low VOC, bonding primer. .1 Product: "Stix®" as manufactured by Benjamin Moore.

.9 Where required, use only materials having a minimum MPI "Environmentally Friendly" E3 rating based on VOC (EPA Method 24) content levels.

.10 Where indoor air quality (odour) is an issue, use only MPI listed materials having a minimum E3 rating.

2.2 MIXING AND TINTING .1 Coatings: Ready-mixed and pre-tinted; re-mix all paint in containers prior to and during application

to ensure break-up of lumps, complete dispersion of settled pigment, and colour and gloss uniformity to a complete homogeneous mixture.

.2 Paste, Powder or Catalyzed Paint: Mixed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

.3 Carefully mix and prepare paints and coating materials according to manufacturer's instructions.

.4 Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary strain before using.

.5 Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the colour of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each coat, but not create an issue with coverage.

.6 Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality.

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 5


217073

February 2018

.1 Use thinners only where approved by paint or coating system manufacturer.

.2 Do not exceed paint manufacturer's recommendations for addition of thinner. Do not use kerosene or any such organic solvents to thin water-based paints.

.3 Thin paint for spraying in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions.

2.3 FINISH AND COLOUR .1 Finish: To MPI Premium Grade finish requirements. .2 Colours and Finishes: to be provided after award of Contract. .3 General:

.1 Finish all exposed, non-prefinished materials/surfaces, as indicated on the Drawings, and as described in herein.

.2 Exposed means visible in the complete work. In the case of closets, cabinets and drawers, it included the interiors.

.3 In instances where materials specified are not suitable for a particular job application or are contrary to the manufacturer's recommendations for use on a particular surface, such condition shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Consultant for clarification and instruction.

.4 Finishes shall match approved samples, but Consultant reserves the right to make reasonable changes to finish specifications to obtain desired results without additional cost or obligation to the Owner.

.5 A colour chart giving colour schemes and gloss values for various areas will be prepared after tendering by the Consultant. The final selection of colours and surface textures of all finishes throughout, transparent (natural) or opaque (paint), shall rest solely with the Consultant.

.6 Do not paint baked enamel, chrome plated, stainless steel, aluminum or other surfaces finished with a final factory finish. All primed surfaces shall be finish painted under this Section. Exception: pre-painted mechanical grilles where directed by the Consultant.

.7 Paint all non-prefinished miscellaneous metal, doors, frames, mechanical and electrical items.

.8 Paint all radiators in occupied spaces.

.9 Previously painted surfaces are assumed to be finished with alkyd based paint. Apply bonding primer over all previously finished surfaces prior to applying new paint coatings.

2.4 GLOSS/SHEEN RATINGS .1 Paint gloss is defined as the sheen rating of applied paint with the following values:

Gloss Level

Description Gloss @ 60 degrees Sheen @ 85 degrees

G1 Matte Finish (flat) 0 to 5 10 max. G2 Velvet-Like Finish 0 to 10 10 to 35 G3 Eggshell Finish 10 to 25 10 to 35 G4 Satin-Like Finish 20 to 35 35 min. G5 Traditional Semi-Gloss Finish 35 to 70 G6 Traditional Gloss 70 to 85 G7 High Gloss Finish More than 85

.2 Gloss level ratings of painted surfaces as specified.

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 6


217073

February 2018

2.5 MANUFACTURERS .1 Manufacturers: Use only manufacturers and Products listed in the MPI Architectural Painting

Specification Manual. .2 Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoats produced by the same manufacturer

as the finish coats.

2.6 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS .1 Interior Finishes: The following specifications apply to the finishing of all surfaces required to be

painted or varnished or stained or sealed, as indicated in the Room Finish Schedule located in the Drawings. All finishes shall comply with the following MPI Painting Manual requirements. For ALL existing surfaces to be repainted, utilize specified bonding primer in lieu of or in addition to listed primer.

.2 Concrete Masonry Units: .1 INT 4.2D: High performance architectural latex, G5 finish

.1 Primer: bonding primer as specified under 2.1.8.

.2 Top coat: MPI product code #141 .3 Dressed Lumber - Paint Finish: (including doors, door and window frames, casings, molding, etc.).

.1 INT 6.3A: High performance architectural latex. .1 Primer: MPI product code #39. .2 Top Coats: MPI product code #141.

.4 Gypsum Board: (walls) .1 INT 9.2B: High performance architectural latex, G5 finish.

.1 Primer: MPI product code #50.

.2 Top coat: MPI product code #141. .5 Galvanized Metal: (doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, pipes, overhead decking, ducts, etc.).:

.1 INT 5.3M: High performance architectural latex, G5 finish. .1 Primer: MPI product code #134. .2 Top coat: MPI product code #141.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify that substrate conditions and surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product

manufacturer. .2 Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition

that may potentially affect proper application. .3 Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.

.1 Apply paint finish in areas where dust is no longer being generated by related construction operations or when wind or ventilation conditions are such that airborne particles will not affect quality of finished surface.

.2 Apply paint to adequately prepared surfaces and to surfaces within moisture limits.

.3 Apply paint when previous coat of paint is dry or adequately cured. .4 Conditions and Surfaces:

.1 Check all surfaces with electric moisture meter and do not proceed if reading is higher than 12-15%, without written permission from the Consultant.

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 7


217073

February 2018

.2 Proceed with work only when surfaces and conditions are satisfactory for production fo a first class job.

.3 Remove dust, grease, rust and extraneous matter from surfaces (except rust occurring on items specified to be primed under other Sections shall be remove and work re-primed by those Sections).

.4 A representative of the product manufacturer will inspect the surfaces to be painted prior to application, arrange for such inspection and provide written report to the Consultant.

3.2 PREPARATION .1 Prepare surfaces in accordance with MPI requirements. .2 Remove and store miscellaneous hardware and surface fittings such as electrical plates, hardware,

light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to painting. Clean and replace upon completion of painting Work in each area. Remove doors before painting to paint bottom and top edges and re-hang.

.3 Protect adjacent surfaces and areas, including rating and instruction labels on doors, frames, glass, aluminum surfaces, equipment, piping, from painting operations with drop cloths, shields, masking, templates, or other suitable protective means.

.4 Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Start of finish painting of defective surfaces indicates acceptance of substrate and making good defects will be at no cost to Owner.

.5 Confirm preparation and primer used with fabricator of steel items.

.6 Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and finish system.

.7 Erect barriers or screens and post signs to warn of, or limit, or direct traffic away or around work areas as required.

.8 Seal with shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes.

.9 Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

.10 Aluminum Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning.

.11 Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton.

.12 Gypsum Board Surfaces: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.

.13 Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.

.14 Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Finish: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Test surfaces for alkalinity with litmus paper or other recognized method. Remove alkalinity, oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.

.15 Plaster Surfaces: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces.

.16 Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs.

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 8


217073

February 2018

.17 Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Prime metal items including shop primed items.

.18 Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats.

.19 Wood and Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer.

.20 Preparation for Previously Finished Surfaces .1 Clean existing surfaces to be repainted or varnished to provide bond. Ensure compatibility of

existing finishes with specified new finishes. .2 Remove rust, scale, oil, grease, mildew, chemicals and other foreign matter. Remove loose paint

and fill flush with suitable patching material. Clean off bubbled, cracked, peeling or otherwise defective paint by stripping with suitable environmental strippers or by burning. Do not burn off paints suspected of having lead content. Treat residue from stripping as Hazardous Waste.

.3 Flatten gloss paint and varnish with sandpaper and wipe off dust.

.4 If previous coatings have failed so as to affect proper performance or appearance of coatings to be applied, remove previous coatings completely and prepare substrates properly and refinish as specified for new work.

.5 Previously painted surfaces are assumed to be finished with alkyd based paint. Apply bonding primer over all previously finished surfaces prior to applying new paint coatings.

.6 Leave entire surface suitable to receive designated finishes and in accordance with finish manufacturer's instructions.

3.3 APPLICATION .1 Apply paint or stain in accordance with CAN/CBSG 85.100 and the MPI Painting Manual Premium Grade

finish requirements. .2 Apply products to adequately prepared surfaces, within moisture limits and acceptable environmental

conditions. .3 Apply paint finish in areas where dust is no longer being generated or when wind or ventilation

conditions will not affect quality of finished surface. .4 Apply Products under adequate illumination. .5 Use methods best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. .6 Spraying will not be allowed unless specified herein or recommended by the paint manufacturer.

Obtain prior approval by Consultant. .7 Apply each coat to uniform finish. Spread finishes evenly and flow on smoothly without runs or sags. .8 Apply Products no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spread rate. Provide total dry film

thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. .9 Tint each coat of paint progressively lighter to enable confirmation of number of coats. .10 Unless otherwise approved, apply a minimum of four (4) coats of paint where deep or bright colours

are used to achieve satisfactory results. .11 Sand and dust between each coat to provide an anchor for next coat and to remove defects visible

from a distance up to 1000 mm. .12 Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. Use tack cloth just prior to applying next coat. .13 Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. .14 Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set.

Wipe excess from surface.

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 9


217073

February 2018

.15 Continue paint finish behind wall-mounted items such as chalk and tack boards, and washroom accessories.

.16 Prime concealed surfaces of exterior woodwork with primer paint.

.17 Prime concealed surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25% with mineral spirits.

.18 Prime/seal wood doors, re-seal all cut edges of wood to be painted or finished, if the material was cut subsequent to initial sealing. Seal tops and bottoms of wood doors with minimum 3 coats of sealer. Apply primer/sealer coats by brush or roller method. Permit paint to dry before applying succeeding coats, touch up suction spots and sand between coats with No. 100 sandpaper.

.19 Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: completely cover substrate to a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, colour, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness , or other surface imperfections will not be accepted.

.20 Transparent (Clear) Finishes: use multiple coats to produce a smooth surface film of even luster to gloss level indicated by finish system. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness , or other surface imperfections will not be accepted.

.21 Match approved samples of colour, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not complying with specified requirements.

.22 Any area exhibiting incomplete or unsatisfactory coverage shall have the entire plane painted.

3.4 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT .1 Refer to Division 21 through Division 28 for schedule of colour coding and identification banding of

equipment, duct work, piping, and conduit. .2 Unless otherwise specified, paint all unfinished conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other

mechanical and electrical equipment with colour and texture to match adjacent surfaces in the following areas: .1 Exposed-to-view exterior and interior areas. .2 High humidity interior areas. .3 Boiler room, mechanical and electrical rooms.

.3 In unfinished areas leave exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and electrical equipment in original finish; touch up scratches and marks.

.4 Touch up scratches and marks on factory painted finishes and equipment with paint as supplied by manufacturer of equipment.

.5 Do not paint over nameplates.

.6 Paint inside of ductwork and convector and baseboard heating cabinets where visible behind louvers, grilles and diffusers for a minimum of 460 mm18 inch or beyond sight line, whichever is greater, with primer and one (1) coat of matt black (non-reflecting) paint.

.7 Paint the inside of light valances gloss white.

.8 Paint disconnect switches for fire alarm system and exit light systems in red enamel.

.9 Paint red or band all fire protection piping and sprinkler lines in accordance with mechanical specification requirements. Keep sprinkler heads free of paint.

.10 Paint yellow or band all natural gas piping in accordance with mechanical specification requirements.

.11 Backprime and paint face and edges of plywood service panels for telephone and electrical equipment before installation to match adjacent wall surface. Leave equipment in original finish except for touch-up as required, and paint conduits, mounting accessories and other unfinished items.

.12 Remove and reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings as required for finishing.

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 10


217073

February 2018

.13 Paint exterior steel electrical light standards. Do not paint outdoor transformers and substation equipment.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Acceptance of Surfaces - Painted surfaces may be rejected if any of the following are evident under

natural lighting in for exterior surfaces and final lighting source (including daylight) for interior surfaces: .1 Visible defects are evident on vertical surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles from a

distance of not less than 1000 mm. .2 Visible defects are evident on horizontal surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles from a

distance of not less than 1000 mm. .3 Visible defects are evident on ceiling, soffit and other overhead surfaces when viewed at normal

viewing angles. .4 Final coats on any surface exhibit a lack of uniformity of colour, sheen, texture, and hiding

across full surface area. .2 Painted surfaces shall be considered to lack uniformity and soundness if any of the following defects

are apparent to the inspector: .1 Brush/roller marks, streaks, laps, runs, sags, drips, heavy stippling, hiding or shadowing by

inefficient application methods, skipped or missed areas, and foreign materials in coatings. .2 Evidence of poor coverage at fastener heads, plate edges, lap joints, crevices, pockets corners

and re-enterant angles. .3 Damage due to touching before paint is sufficiently dry or other contributory cause. .4 Damage due to application on moist surfaces or caused by inadequate protection from

weather/moisture. .5 Damage or contamination of paint due to blown contaiminants (dust, spray, other paints, etc.).

.3 Make good rejected surfaces. Small areas may be touched up; large areas without sufficient dry film thickness of coatings shall be repainted. Runs, sags or damaged paint shall be removed by scrapper or sanding prior to reapplication. Acceptance of repair and method is at the sole discretion of the Consultant.

3.6 CLEANING .1 Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove

daily from site. Dispose of materials in accordance with the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction.

.2 Remove paint where spilled, splashed, splattered or sprayed using means and materials that are not detrimental to affected surfaces.

.3 Keep work areas free from any unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris.

END OF SECTION

10 21 14 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS

Page 1


217073

February 2018

Section 10 21 14 - Metal Toilet Compartments

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Metal toilet compartments, floor mounted and head rail braced. .2 Urinal screens; wall mounted with floor to ceiling pilaster brace.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 10 28 14 - Toilet and Bath Accessories.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ASTM A167-99(2009) - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel

Plate, Sheet, and Strip. .2 ASTM A424/A424M-09a - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, for Porcelain Enameling. .3 ASTM A653/A653M-13 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron

Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .4 CSA-B651-12 - Accessible Design for the Built Environment.


.1 Coordinate with other Work having a direct bearing on work of this Section.

.2 Coordinate the Work with placement of support framing and anchors in wall.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. .2 Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevations, dimensions, details of wall supports, door swings. .3 Samples: Submit two (2) samples of partition panel colours available for selection.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION .1 Installation Data: Manufacturer's special installation requirements, including perimeter conditions

requiring special attention.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS .1 Conform to CSA-B651 for accessibility requirements for the handicapped.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MANUFACTURERS .1 Hadrian; Product: Powder Coated (standard). .2 Other acceptable manufacturers offering functionally and aesthetically equivalent products.

.1 Shanahans.

.2 Global Partitions.

.3 ASI Group Canada.

.4 Global Storage Systems.


Page 2


217073

February 2018

2.2 MATERIALS .1 Steel Sheet: ASTM A424/A424M, Type I, commercial quality.

2.3 ACCESSORIES .1 Pilaster Shoe: Formed ASTM A167, Type 304 stainless steel, 75 mm high, with adjustable screw jack. .2 Head Rails: Hollow aluminum tube, 25 x 41 mm size, with anti-grip strips. .3 Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel; tamper proof type .4 Pilaster Wall Attachment: continuous length, stainless steel or prefinished steel 'U' channel. .5 Panel to Panel Brackets: manufacturer's standard cast metal, stainless steel or aluminum. .6 Hardware: Chrome plated non-ferrous cast metal.

.1 Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning.

.2 Nylon bearings.

.3 Thumb turn door latch with exterior emergency access feature.

.4 Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper.

.5 Coat hook: NOT REQUIRED - NOT PERMITTED.

.6 Door pull for out-swinging doors.

2.4 FABRICATION .1 Fabricate components of steel sheet as follows:

.1 Panel and Door Faces: 0.8 mm (20 gauge).

.2 Pilaster Faces: 1.2 mm (18 gauge).

.3 Reinforcement: 2.5 mm (12 gauge). .2 Doors and Panels:

.1 Thickness: 25 mm.

.2 Door Width: 600 mm.

.3 Door Width for Handicapped Use: 915 mm, out-swinging.

.4 Height: Nominal 1,800 mm. .3 Pilasters: 32 mm thick, of sizes required to suit cubicle width and spacing. .4 Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Sheet steel face, pressure bonded to sound deadening core,

form and close edges, mitre and weld corners, grind smooth. .5 Internal Reinforcement: Provide in areas of attached hardware and fittings. Mark locations of

reinforcement for partition mounted washroom accessories.

2.5 FINISHES .1 Clean, degrease, and neutralize panels. .2 Follow immediately with a phosphatizing treatment, prime coat and two finish coats baked enamel. .3 Single Colour: Colour as later selected by Consultant from manufacturer's standard colour range. .4 Stainless Steel Surfaces: No. 4 finish. .5 Exposed Steel Surfaces: Chrome plated, Polished finish. .6 Aluminum: Anodized, clear. .7 Non-ferrous Surfaces: Polished chrome plated.


Page 3


217073

February 2018

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings and as instructed by the

manufacturer. .2 Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures. .3 Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing.

3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Install partitions to manufacturer's written instructions. .2 Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level. .3 Maintain 10 to 13 mm space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. .4 Attached panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. .5 Attach panels and pilasters to brackets with tamper proof through bolts and nuts. Locate head rail

joints at pilaster centre lines. .6 Anchor urinal screen panels to walls with continuous fastening channel and vertical upright consisting

of pilaster anchored to floor and ceiling. .7 Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with pilaster.

Conceal floor fastenings with pilaster shoes. .8 Equip each door with two (2) hinges, one (1) door latch. Out-swinging doors to be equipped with

barrier free accessible pull. .9 Install door strike and keeper with door bumper on each pilaster in alignment with door latch. .10 Field touch-up of scratches or damaged enamel finish will not be permitted. .11 Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES .1 Maximum Variation From True Position: 6 mm. .2 Maximum Variation From Plumb: 3 mm.

3.4 ADJUSTING .1 Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 5 mm. .2 Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out swinging

doors to closed position. .3 Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane.

END OF SECTION

10 26 13 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION

Page 1


217073

February 2018

Section 10 26 13 - Wall And Door Protection

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Corner guards.

1.2 REFERENCES .1 CSA-B651-12 - Accessible Design for the Built Environment.



.2 Coordinate the work with wall or partition sections for installation of concealed blocking or anchor devices.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data: Indicate physical dimensions, features, anchorage details.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION .1 Installation Data: Manufacturer's special installation requirements including special procedures,

perimeter conditions requiring special attention.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Perform Work to CSA-B651 requirements for the physically handicapped.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MANUFACTURERS .1 Acrovyn; Product: model #CO-8 (corners) and model #SCO-8 (u-shaped for wall ends). .2 Other acceptable manufacturers offering functionally and aesthetically equivalent products.

.1 Pawling; Product: CG-50.

2.2 COMPONENTS .1 Corner Guard - Surface Mounted:

.1 Material: Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, 1.6mm (16ga) base metal thickness.

.2 Size: typical corner 89 x 89 mm or 'U' shaped with 89mm return legs.

.3 Length: One (1) piece, 1219 mm.

.4 Design for surface mount attachment with adhesive only. Attachment with exposed fasteners is not permitted.

10 26 13 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION

Page 2


217073

February 2018

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. .2 Verify that rough-in for components are correctly sized and located.

3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Install components to manufacturer's written instructions. .2 Install components level and plumb, secured rigidly in position to wall framing members only. .3 Field de-bur stainless steel corner guards prior to installation. .4 Position corner guard directly above finished floor and install in single piece to height(s) as specified or

indicated on the drawings. .5 Apply bead of clear sealant at top, all edges and junction of corner guard and floor.

END OF SECTION

10 28 14 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

Page 1


217073

February 2018

Section 10 28 14 - Toilet and Bath Accessories

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Toilet, washroom accessories. .2 Grab bars. .3 Attachment hardware.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 10 21 14 - Metal Toilet Compartments.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ASTM A123/A123M-13 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products. .2 ASTM A167-99(2009) - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel

Plate, Sheet, and Strip. .3 ASTM A269-13 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for

General Service. .4 ASTM A1008/A1008M-13 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,

High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.

.5 ASTM B456-11e1 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium.

.6 CSA-B651-12 - Accessible Design for the Built Environment.

.7 NEMA LD3-2005 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates (HPDL).



.2 Coordinate the work with the placement of reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment

methods.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION .1 Installation Data: Manufacturer's special installation requirements including special procedures.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS .1 Conform to CSA-B651 for accessibility requirements for the handicapped.


Page 2


217073

February 2018

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MANUFACTURERS .1 Toilet and bath accessories listed in Fixtures section are manufactured by Frost unless otherwise

noted. .2 Other acceptable manufacturers offering functionally and aesthetically equivalent products. The

supplier is solely responsible for ensuring that proposed equivalent accessories meet or exceed the requirements/specifications of the products listed. Lesser products will be rejected during construction and an equivalent or better product will be required at no additional cost to the Owner. .1 ASI - Watrous. .2 Bobrick. .3 Twin-Cee.

2.2 MATERIALS .1 Sheet Steel: ASTM A1008/A1008M. .2 Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304. .3 Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel. .4 Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof. .5 Expansion Shields: Fibre, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for

component and substrate.

2.3 FABRICATION .1 Weld and grind joints of fabricated components, smooth. .2 Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints. Form surfaces flat without

distortion. Maintain surfaces without scratches or dents. .3 Fabricate grab bars of tubing, free of visible joints, return to wall with end attachment flanges. Form

bar with [<Insert Option> mm ] clear of wall surface. Knurl grip surfaces. .4 Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. .5 Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.

2.4 FIXTURES .1 Fixtures listed below correspond to Frost model numbers, unless otherwise noted. Letters in

brackets correspond to the Washroom Accessory Schedule at the end of this Section, which indicate fixture quantities by room.

.2 Toilet Tissue Dispenser (TTD): supplied and installed by Owner's service provider.

.3 Paper Towel Dispenser (PTD): supplied and installed by Owner's service provider.

.4 Soap Dispenser: (SD) supplied and installed by Owner's service provider.

.5 Grab Bars: model code 1001 NP, 38 mm outside diameter x 1.6 mm wall tubing, Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, wall flanges secured to wall mounting flanges with stainless steel set screws, concealed screw attachment, flanges welded to tubular bar, provided with steel back plates and all accessories. Knurl/peen bar at area of hand grips. Grab bar material and anchorage to withstand downward pull of 2.2 kN. Provide the following grab bars as indicated. .1 Type 1 (GB1): 610 mm long .2 Type 2 (GB2): 760 x 760 mm 'L' shaped.

.6 Fixed Mirrors: 941-TG Series, sizes as indicated in 3.4 Schedule, fixed 6mm tempered glass mirror, No. 4 finish, stainless steel frame.


Page 3


217073

February 2018

.7 Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit: model code 622, surface mounted, 203 x 336 x 114mm, fabricated from 22 gauge stainless steel type 304 no. 4 brushed finish, self closing lid.

.8 Coat Hook: model code 1150, front mounted, surface mounted, security clothes hook, wall plate fabricated from 14ga stainless steel, 10mm diameter spring loaded stainless steel hook mounted with swivel trip ball.

2.5 KEYING .1 Supply 2 (two) keys for each accessory to Owner. .2 Master key all accessories.

2.6 FINISHES .1 Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M, appropriate grade for type and size of steel

material indicated. Galvanize ferrous metal and fastening devices. .2 Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pre-treat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake. .3 Enamel: Pre-treat to clean condition, apply one (1) coat primer and minimum two (2) coats

electrostatic baked enamel. .4 Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, Type SC 2, polished finish. .5 Stainless Steel: No. 4 Satin finish. .6 Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify that field measurements are as indicated on product data. .2 Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as instructed by the

manufacturer. .3 Verify exact location of accessories for installation.

3.2 PREPARATION .1 Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation. .2 Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.

3.3 INSTALLATION .1 Install accessories to manufacturer's written instructions. .2 Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. .3 Upon completion of installation, adjust all components for proper operation and straight alignment. .4 Instruct Owner's personnel in adjustment, operation and refilling procedures. .5 Remove all protective films and clean accessories, touch up all scratches and abrasions to be invisible.

3.4 SCHEDULES .1 Mens Washrooms #2 and #4 (quantities per washroom).

.1 1 - Fixed Mirror (457 x 760 mm). .2 Womens Washrooms #2 and #4 (quantities per washroom).

.1 1 - Fixed Mirror (457 x 760 mm).

.2 4 - Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit.


Page 4


217073

February 2018

.3 Mens Washroom #3. .1 1 - Fixed Mirror (457 x 760 mm). .2 1 - Grab Bar Type 1. .3 1 - Grab Bar Type 2. .4 1 - Coat Hook (install on door of B/F stall)

.4 Womens Washroom #3. .1 2 - Fixed Mirror (457 x 760 mm). .2 5 - Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit. .3 1 - Grab Bar Type 1. .4 1 - Grab Bar Type 2. .5 1 - Coat Hook (install on door of B/F stall).

END OF SECTION

Northern Secondary School 15010 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6119

Piotrowski Consultants Ltd.

North Bay, Ontario February 2018

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL

1. This section covers items common to all sections of Division 15 and is supplementary to requirements of Division 1.

2. Division 1, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here.

3. Coordinate all requirements with General Contractor.

1.2. CODE OF STANDARDS

1. Do complete installation in compliance with latest editions and all amendments of the following Codes and Standards. Where conflicts in requirements occur, the higher standard shall apply:

1. ASHRAE

2. CSA

3. Ontario Building Code

4. All governing municipal requirements

5. ULC

1.3. DEFINITIONS

1. “Provide” means supply and install.

2. “Approved” means approved in writing by Consultant.

3. “Consultant” means designated qualified professional engineer acting as representative of Owner for monitoring of work.

4. “Manual” means Operations and Maintenance manual.

1.4. CARE, OPERATION, START-UP AND INSTRUCTION TO OWNERS

1. Provide certified personnel to instruct Owner of operation mechanical equipment. Provide maintenance specialist personnel to instruct on maintenance and adjustment of mechanical equipment and any changes or modification equipment must be under terms of guarantee.

2. Provide instruction during regular work hours prior to acceptance and turn over to Owner's staff for regular operation.




3. Provide these services for such period, and for as many visits as necessary to put equipment in operation, and ensure that operating personnel are conversant with all aspects of its care and operation.

4. Use operation and maintenance data manual for instruction purposes. On completion of instruction, turn three manuals over to the Owner.

5. Operation and maintenance manual to be approved by and final copies deposited with Consultant before final inspection.

6. Arrange and pay for services of manufacturer's factory service engineer to supervise start-up of installation, check, adjust, balance and calibrate components and instruct operating personnel.

1.5. PERMITS, CERTIFICATES, FEES AND INSPECTIONS

1. Submit to the Building Department the necessary number of drawings and specifications for examination prior to commencement of work to obtain a building/plumbing permit.

2. Submit Notice of Project to Ministry of Labour.

3. Contractor shall be responsible to pay associated fees.

4. Notify Consultant of changes required by Building Department prior to making changes.

5. Notify Consultant upon completion of work.

1.6. EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS AND INSTALLATION

1. Permit equipment maintenance and disassembly by use of unions or flanges to minimize disturbance to connecting piping and duct systems and without interference from building structure or other equipment.

2. Provide accessible means for lubricating equipment including permanent lubricated "lifetime" bearings.

3. Pipe drain lines to drains.

4. Line-up equipment, rectangular cleanouts and similar items with building walls wherever possible.

5. Provide equipment commissioning and preliminary balancing and confirm the proper operation of all equipment and related systems.

1.7. RESPONSIBILITY FOR TRIAL USAGE

1. Obtain written permission to start and test permanent equipment and systems prior to acceptance by Consultant.




2. Consultant may use plumbing equipment and systems for testing.

3. Protect equipment and systems' openings from dirt, dust and other foreign materials during test usage.

1.8. ELECTRICAL

1. Division 15 shall supply and install motors, controls and control wiring, VFD, supply starters, switches and relays, for all motor driven equipment under Division 15. Starters, switches, VFD and relays shall be handed over to Division 16 for installation and wiring.

2. Electrical equipment not supplied by Division 15 is listed on the drawings or elsewhere in the Specification for quality of material and workmanship.

3. Safety disconnect switches shall be supplied for each rotating equipment unless within viewing distance for motor control but max 6 m (20') supplied by Division 15 and installed by Division 16.

4. Wiring and controls for connections below 50 V, which are related to control systems are the responsibility of Division 15. Refer to Division 16 for quality of materials and workmanship.

1. Control cables, type LVT, soft annealed copper conductors with thermoplastic insulation and colour coding. Installation in EMT conduit.

2. Two conductors parallel with an overall thermoplastic jacket; three or more conductors twisted with an overall thermoplastic jacket.

3. Cable to be installed in EMT conduit or to be plenum rated FT6 type.

1.9. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

1. See Section 15140 – Hangers and Supports for Piping.

1.10. DRAIN VALVES

1. Locate at low points and at section isolating valves unless otherwise specified.

2. Minimum NPS 3/4 unless otherwise specified: bronze, with hose end male thread and complete with cap and chain.

1.11. SLEEVES

1. Provide pipe sleeves at points where pipes pass through masonry or concrete.

2. Provide sleeves of minimum 1.0 mm (20 GA) galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints or use PVC pipe in non rated walls.

3. Use cast iron or steel pipe sleeves with annular fin continuously welded at mid-point.




1. Through foundation walls.

2. Where sleeve penetrates fire rated wall or floor ceiling assembly.

4. Sizes:

1. Provide 5 mm (1/4") clearance all around, between sleeves and pipes or between sleeve and insulation.

2. Where piping passes below footings, provide min clearance of 50 mm (2") between sleeve and pipe. Fill void with elastic, water proof material. Backfill up to underside of footing with concrete of same strength as footing.

5. Fill voids around pipes. Remove plastic sleeves.

1. Caulk between sleeve & pipe in foundation walls and below grade floors with oakum that lead between sleeve and pipe.

2. Where sleeves pass through walls or floors, caulk space between insulation and sleeve or between pipe and sleeve with waterproof fire retardant non-hardening mastic.

3. Ensure no contact between copper tube or pipe and ferrous sleeve.

4. Coat exposed exterior surfaces of ferrous sleeves with heavy application of zinc rich paint.

6. Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, floors and partitions, maintain fire rating integrity assembly in compliance with OBC. Submit shop drawings and details on all products.

7. Temporarily plug all openings during construction.

1.12. ESCUTCHEONS AND PLATES

1. Provide on pipes passing through finished walls, partitions, floors and ceilings.

2. Use split type chrome plated brass, with set screws for ceiling or wall mounting.

3. Inside diameter shall fit around finished pipe. Outside diameter shall cover opening or sleeve.

4. Where sleeve extends above finished floor, escutcheons or plates shall clear sleeve extension.

5. Secure to pipe or finished surface but not insulation.

1.13. TESTS

1. Provide the following supplementary requirements to tests specified:




1. Give 48 h notice of date when tests will be made.

2. Do not insulate or conceal work until tested and approved.

3. Conduct tests in presence of Consultant.

4. Bear costs including retesting and make good.

5. Pipe pressure:

1. Hydraulically test water supply systems at 1-1/2 times system operating pressure or minimum 1050 kPa (150 psig).

2. Maintain test pressures without loss of 4 h unless otherwise specified.

1.14. PAINTING

1. Apply at least one coat of corrosion resistant primer paint to supports, and equipment fabricated from ferrous metals.

2. Restore to new condition, finishes which have been damaged too extensively to be merely primed and touched up.

1.15. SPECIAL TOOLS

1. Provide one set of special tools required to service equipment as recommended by manufacturers.

1.16. DIELECTRIC COUPLINGS

1. Provide wherever pipes of dissimilar metals are joined.

2. Provide felt or rubber gaskets to prevent dissimilar metal contact.

1.17. CUTTING AND PATCHING

1. All cutting and patching shall be by Division 2 and coordinated by Division 15. Coordinate with other trades. Notify Structural Engineer before cutting any structural members and obtain written permission.

1.18. EXISTING SYSTEMS

1. Before submitting tender price verify on job site location of all accessible existing systems affecting execution of this contract. Difficulties arising during construction will not be considered as grounds for additional payment.

2. Where work involves breaking into or connecting to existing systems, carry out work at times




directed by governing authorities, with minimum of disturbance to pedestrian traffic.

3. Submit schedule to and obtain approval from Consultant for any shut down or closure of active service or facility. Adhere to approved schedule and provide notice to affected parties.

4. Where unknown services are encountered, immediately advise Consultant and confirm findings in writing.

1.19. INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNERS

1. Provide certified personnel to instruct Owner of operation mechanical equipment. Provide maintenance specialist personnel to instruct on maintenance and adjustment of mechanical equipment and any changes or modification equipment must be under terms of guarantee.

2. Training plans to be submitted prior to the execution of the training. At a minimum, training plans to include the list of systems and equipment which are to be trained on. Instructor’s name and qualifications and allotted time for training. Training plans to be reviewed and approved by Owner and Consultant prior to commencement of training.




1.20. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS

1. Provide one (1) paper copy and one “PDF” format on USB stick of Mechanical Operation and Maintenance Manuals complete with As-built Drawings, in accordance to the following and Section 01 78 00 “Closeout Submittals”.

2. Mechanical Operation and Maintenance Manuals to be delivered to the Engineer’s office 60-days prior to the completion of the Contract.

3. Manuals to be bound in hard cover neatly labeled: “OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS”.

4. The Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be divided into sections with neatly labeled and tabbed dividers between each section. The sections to be included in the manual are:

1. Section I – General

2. Section II – Piping and Plumbing Systems

5. The following information shall be contained within the sections:

1. SECTION I: A list giving name, address and telephone number of the Consultant,




Engineers, Construction Manager, Mechanical Trade and Controls Trade. Written guarantees for the Mechanical Systems. A copy of the Valve directory giving number, valve location, normal valve position, and purpose of valve. A framed copy of valve directory to be hung in Mechanical Room. Equipment lists and certificates shall be provided. Certificates shall be signed and sealed by the appropriate suppliers. All major equipment including but not limited to boilers, cooling towers, chillers, air handling units, isolators, silencers, pumps and humidifiers are to be inspected by the manufacturer to ensure the equipment has been installed in accordance with their recommendations.

2. SECTION II and III: A copy of all pressure tests and operational tests for plumbing system. A list giving name, address and telephone number of all suppliers. A copy of all approved Shop Drawings. Copies of warranties.

6. MAINTENANCE MATRIX

1. A maintenance matrix is to be provided in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. The matrix shall indicate each piece of equipment and the required maintenance tasks and the frequency at which they are to be carried out.

1.21. OWNER OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE

1. The existing building may remain occupied during construction - summer time.

2. Provide temporary protection for all finishes, appliances or equipment in the existing building.

3. Protect and maintain electrical room operations during the work.

1.22. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

1. Site records:

1. One set to be kept on site and all changes to be recorded on daily basis. At the completion of the project, all changes shall be transferred to clean set, signed and passed to the Consultant. Provide “PDF” format of As-Built Drawings on USB stick with Maintenance Manuals at completion of project.

2. Make these drawings available for reference purposes and to inspection at all times.

2. Submit 2 copies of as-built marked up prints with final TAB report.

3. As-built drawings must be delivered before system acceptance.

1.23. SPARE PARTS

1. Three (3) sets of each type and size of valve (up to 2”).

2. Leave on site and coordinate with the Owner.




1.24. TRAINING

1. Provide minimum of four 6 hour training sessions on systems.

1.25. SCOPE OF WORK

1. Domestic Water Piping Upgrades - Corridor Areas (Level 100)

1. Remove T-bar ceiling tiles and grid (Division 2) as required complete with lighting fixtures, fire alarm devices, exit lighting, lighting control, P.A. speakers, security devices and reinstall all after work completion and ceiling restoration. Provide fire alarm, lighting control, P.A. and security testing and verification reports.

2. Remove all domestic water piping from corridor areas/some spaces - complete with insulation, clevis hangers, etc.

3. Replace all piping and shut-off valves as identified on the drawings.

4. Remove all asbestos from domestic water piping insulation / elbows as per asbestos consultant’s report.

5. Install new domestic water piping complete with clevis hangers, shut-off valve, new piping insulation.

6. Upgrade existing incoming water plumbing assemblies as per drawing.

7. Perform any other mechanical work as required by this contract.

2. Washroom Upgrades

1. Remove all old plumbing fixtures, cap and make safe all services.

2. Remove water piping, venting from renovated areas.

3. Install new plumbing fixtures, new drainage (as required), water piping, new venting (majority in piping chases).

4. Upgrade exhaust fans in two washrooms.

5. Modify exhaust air ductwork to suite new ceiling layouts.

6. Perform any other mechanical work required by this contract.

END OF SECTION 15010

Northern Secondary School 15130 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6119



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA

1. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

2. Indicate on manufacturer's catalogue literature the following:

1. Thermometers.

2. Pressure gauges.

3. Stop cocks.

4. Wells.

1.3. MAINTENANCE DATA

1. Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. GENERAL

1. Thermometers and pressure gauges to operate at mid point of scale or range.

2.2. DIRECT READING THERMOMETERS

1. Industrial, variable angle type, liquid in glass, cast aluminum case, lens front, 225 mm (9”) scale length, dual °F and °C range. Stem lengths to be 50% of pipe i.d. Thermometers to meet: CAN/CGSB 14.4, ASME B40.4.

2.3. REMOTE READING THERMOMETERS

1. 100 mm diameter activated dial type, accuracy within one scale division, brass movement, stainless steel capillary, stainless steel spiral armour, stainless steel bulb and polished brass or stainless steel case for wall mounting. Capillary to have an extra length of at least 5 ft. Thermometers to meet: CAN/CGSB 14.4, ASME B40.




2.4. THERMOMETER WELLS

1. Copper pipe: copper or bronze.

2. Steel pipe: brass or stainless steel.

3. Provide extension necks where insulation is present.

4. Acceptable Product: WIKA TI.901; Winters TIM.

2.5. PRESSURE GAUGES

1. 112 mm, dial type, grade A, 1% accuracy full scale unless otherwise specified. Wetted parts to be of phosphor bronze bourdon tube. Dual scale PSI/Kpa.

2. Acceptable Material: WIKA 213.53.

3. Provide liquid fill on all pump systems, supply and return hot water headers, heat exchangers.

4. Provide siphons for steam service

5. Provide bronze stop cocks for isolation

6. Provide diaphragm seals for corrosive services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. GENERAL

1. Install so they can be easily read from floor or platform. If this cannot be accomplished, install remote reading units.

2. Install engraved lamicoid nameplates as specified in Section 15190 - Identification, identifying medium.

3. Install between equipment and first fitting or valve.

3.2. THERMOMETERS

1. Install in wells on all piping. Provide heat conductive material for inside of well.

2. Install in locations as indicated and on:

1. On each return and supply.

2. In other locations as indicated.




3. Use extensions where thermometers are installed through insulation.

4. Provide well in supply water system from controller temperature sensors.

3.3. PRESSURE GAUGES

1. Install in following locations:

1. In other locations as indicated.

2. Use extensions where pressure gauges are installed through insulation.


Northern Secondary School 15140 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6119



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. REFERENCES

1. ASME B31.1-2012, (SI), Power Piping, (SI Edition).

2. MSS-SP-58-2009, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture.



2. Indicate on manufacturer's catalogue literature the following:

1. Upper attachment.

2. Middle attachment.

3. Pipe attachment.

4. Riser clamps.

5. Shields and saddles.

6. Sway braces.


1. Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01300 - Submittals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. GENERAL

1. Fabricate hangers, supports and sway braces in accordance with ANSI B31.1 and MSS-SP-58.




2. Support from structural members. Where structural bearing does not exist or inserts are not in suitable locations, provide supplementary structural steel members.

2.2. UPPER ATTACHMENTS

1. Concrete:

1. Anchors for existing concrete roof structure, heavy duty anchors Hilti HSL.

2. Steel beam (bottom flange):

1. Cold piping NPS 2 and under: malleable iron C clamp to MSS-SP-58, type 19. ULC listed.

2. Cold piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger and all hot piping: malleable iron beam clamp to MSS-SP-58, type 28 or 29. ULC listed.

3. Steel beam (top):

1. Cold piping NPS 2 and under: malleable iron "top of beam" C clamp to MSS-SP-58, type 19. ULC listed.

2. Cold piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger and all hot piping: steel jaw, hook rod with nut, spring washer and plain washer, to MSS-SP-58, type 25. ULC listed.

4. Steel joist:

1. Cold piping NPS 2 and under: steel washer plate with double locking nuts.

2. Cold piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger and all hot piping: steel washer plates with double locking nut, carbon steel clevis and malleable iron socket.

5. Steel channel or angle (bottom):

1. Cold piping NPS 2 and under; malleable iron C clamp to MSS-SP-58, type 23. ULC listed.

2. Cold piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger and all hot piping; universal channel clamp. ULC listed.

2.3. MIDDLE ATTACHMENT (ROD)

1. Carbon steel threaded rod black finish.

2.4. PIPE ATTACHMENT

1. Cold piping, steel or cast iron: hot piping steel, with less than 25 mm, 1" horizontal movement; hot piping, steel, with more than 300 mm, 12" middle attachment rod length:




adjustable clevis to MSS-SP-58, type 1. ULC listed.

2. Cold copper piping; hot copper piping with less than 25 mm, 1" horizontal movement; hot copper piping with more than 300 mm, 12" middle attachment rod length: adjustable clevis to MSS-SP-58, type 1. Copper plated.

3. Suspended hot piping, steel and copper, with horizontal movement in excess of 25 mm, 1"; hot steel piping with middle attachment rod 300 mm, 12" or less; pipe roller to MSS-SP-58, type 43.

4. Bottom supported hot piping, steel and copper: pipe roller stand to MSS-SP-58, type 45.

2.5. RISER CLAMPS

1. Steel or cast iron pipe: black carbon steel to MSS-SP-58, type 42. ULC listed.

2. Copper pipe: carbon steel copper finished to MSS-SP-58, type 42.

2.6. SADDLES AND SHIELDS

1. Cold piping NPS 1-1/4 and over: protection shield with high density insulation under shield with uninterrupted vapour barrier.

2. Hot piping NPS 1-1/4 and over: protective saddle with insulation under saddle.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. HANGER SPACING

1. Spacing and middle attachment rod diameter as specified in paragraphs below or as in table below, whichever is more stringent.

1. Plumbing piping: most stringent requirements of Ontario Building Code, or authority having jurisdiction.

2. Fire protection: to applicable fire code.

3. Gas piping: up to NPS 1/2: every 6', 1.8 m

4. Copper piping: up to NPS 1/2: every 5' 1.5 m

5. Flexible joint roll groove pipe: in accordance with table below, but not less than one hanger at joints.

6. Within 12" of each horizontal elbow.

Pipe Rod Maximum Spacing




Size Diameter Steel Cooper (Nominal) NPS 1/2 10 mm 3/8" 1.8m 6' 5' 1.5m NPS 3/4, 1 10 mm 3/8" 2.1m 7' 6' 1.8m NPS 1-1/4 10 mm 3/8" 2.1m 7' 8' 2.4m NPS 1-1/2 10 mm 3/8" 2.7m 9' 8' 2.4m NPS 2 10 mm 3/8" 3.0m 10' 9' 2.7m NPS 2-1/2 10 mm 3/8" 3.0m 10' 10' 3.0m NPS 3 to 4 10 mm 3/8" 4.6m 15' 12' 3.6m

NPS 6 19 mm 3/4" 5.1 m 17' --

3.2. HANGER INSTALLATION

1. Offset hanger so that rod is vertical in operating position.

2. Adjust hangers to equalize load.


Northern Secondary School 15190 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, IDENTIFICATION Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6119



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. REFERENCES

1. CGSB 1-GP-60M, Enamel, Interior, Gloss, Alkyd Type.

2. CGSB 24-GP-3a Identification and Classification of Piping Systems.

1.3. SAMPLES

1. Submit samples in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

2. Submit samples and lists of proposed wording for approval before engraving.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1. MANUFACTURERS NAMEPLATES

1. Provide metal nameplate on each piece of equipment, mechanically fastened complete with raised or recessed letters.

2. Indicate size, equipment model, manufacturer's name, serial number, voltage, cycle, phase and power of motors.

2.2. SYSTEM NAMEPLATES

1. Colour:

1. Hazardous: red letters, white background.

2. Elsewhere: black letters, white background (except where required otherwise by applicable codes).

2. Construction:

1. 3 mm thick, laminated plastic or white anodized aluminum, matte finish, square corners, letters accurately aligned and machine engraved into core.

3. Sizes:




1. Conform to following table:

Size Dimensions No. of Letter # (mm) (in) Lines Height (mm) (in) 1 10 x 50 3/8 x 2 1 3 1/8 2 13 x 75 1/2 x 3 1 5 1/4 3 13 x 75 1/2 x 3 2 3 1/8 4 20 x 100 3/4 x 4 1 8 3/8 5 20 x 200 3/4 x 8 1 8 3/8 6 20 x 100 3/4 x 4 2 5 1/4 7 25 x 125 1 x 5 1 12 1/2 8 25 x 125 1 x 5 2 8 3/8 9 35 x 200 1-1/4 x 8 1 20 3/4

2. Use average of 25 letters/numbers (maximum) per nameplate.

3. Use size #6 for terminal cabinets and control panels.

4. Use size #9 for equipment in mechanical rooms.

5. Facilities Inspection Program (FIP) identification:

1. General: use system of Main Identifier, Source Identifier, Destination Identifier.

2. Equipment and Mechanical Rooms: Main Identifier: size #9; Source and Destination Identifiers: size #5.

3. Elsewhere: Sizes as appropriate.

2.3. PIPING

1. General

1. To CGSB 24-GP-3a.

2. Identify medium by lettered legend, classification by primary and secondary colours, direction of flow by arrows.

2. Sizes:

1. Legend: block capitals to following table:

Outside Dia. of Size of Pipe or Insulation Letters mm in mm in 30 1-1/4 13 1/2 50 2 19 3/4 150 6 32 1-1/4 250 7 63 2-1/2 Over 250 8 88 3




2. Primary colour bands:

1. At valves and fittings: 460 mm, 18" long.

2. Elsewhere: 1.8 m, 42" long.

3. Secondary colour bands: 50 mm, 2" wide, 75 mm, 3" in from one end of primary colour band.

3. Arrows:

1. Outside diameter of pipe/insulation 75 mm and greater: 150 mm, 6" long x 50 mm, 2" high.

2. Outside diameter of pipe/insulation less than 75 mm, 3": 100 mm, 4" long x 50 mm, 2" high.

3. Use double headed arrows where flow is reversible.

3. Material:

1. Paint: to CGSB 1-GP-60M.

2. Legend markers, arrow colour bands: plastic coated cloth material with protective overcoating and waterproof contact adhesive undercoating, suitable for 100% RH and continuous operating temperature of 150°C (300°F). Apply to prepared surfaces. Wrap tape around pipe or pipe covering with ends overlapping one (1) pipe diameter.

3. Waterproof and heat resistant plastic marker tags: for pipes and tubing 3/4" nominal and smaller.

4. Acceptable material: Brady

4. Colours:

1. Where not covered by table below, submit legend, primary and secondary classification colours to Consultant for approval.

5. Table:

1. Pipe and valve identification.

Pipe Marker Valve Tag Primary Secondary Legend Legend Colour Colour Cold Water C.W. Green None Hot Water H.W. Green None Recirc. Hot Water R.H.W. Green None

2. Legend and arrows:




1. Black or white to contrast with primary colour.

2. Fire protection: white on red background.

3. Low voltage control wiring installed by Division 15.

2.4. VALVES AND CONTROLLERS

1. Brass tags with 1/2" stamped code lettering and numbers filled with black paint.

2. Furnish Consultant with six identification flow diagrams of approved size for each system. Include valve tag schedule, designating number, service, function and location of each tagged item and normal operating position of valves.

2.5. CONTROLS IDENTIFICATION

1. Identify all systems, equipment, components, controls and sensors.

2. Inscription to identify function and fail-safe position.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. GENERAL

1. Do identification work in accordance with CGSB 24-GP-3a except where specified otherwise.

2. Provide ULC and/or CSA registration plates, as required by respective agency.

3. Identify systems and equipment to conform to PWC, FIP.

3.2. LOCATION OF NAMEPLATES

1. In conspicuous location to facilitate easy reading from operating floor and to properly identify equipment and/or system.

2. Provide stand-offs for nameplates on hot surfaces and insulated surfaces.

3. Do not insulate or paint over plates.

3.3. PIPING

1. Locations:

1. On long straight runs in open areas in boiler rooms, mechanical room, and tunnel so that at least one is clearly visible from any one viewpoint in operating areas or walking aisles and not at more than 15 m, 50' intervals.




2. Adjacent to all changes in direction.

3. At least once in each small room through which piping passes.

4. On both sides of visual obstruction or where run is difficult to follow.

5. On both sides of any separation such as walls, floors and partitions.

6. Where piping is concealed in pipe chase, ceiling space, or other confined space, at entry and leaving points and adjacent to each access opening.

7. At beginning and end points of each run and at each piece of equipment in run.

8. At point immediately upstream of major manually operated or automatically controlled valves. Where this is not possible, place identification as close to valve as possible, preferably on upstream side.

9. Legend to be easily and accurately readable from usual operating areas and all readily accessible points.

10. Plane of legend to be approximately at right angles to most convenient line of sight with consideration of operating positions, lighting conditions, reduced visibility of colour or legends caused by dust and dirt and risk of physical damage.

3.4. VALVES AND CONTROLLERS

1. Secure tags with non-ferrous chains or closed "S" hooks for valves and operating controllers except at plumbing fixtures and radiation.

2. Install one copy of flow diagram and valve schedule mounted in frame with non-glare glass where directed by Consultant. Provide one copy in each operating and maintenance instruction manual.

3. Consecutively number valves system.


Northern Secondary School 15260 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6119



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. REFERENCES

1. Do thermal insulation in accordance with ACNBC, ASTM E96-66(1972) and ASTM C411-61 (1975).

2. Fire hazard rating:

1. Meet NFPA 90A-2002, NFPA 225-1984 and CAN4-S102-M83 for all components of insulation system.

1.3. DEFINITIONS

1. “CONCEALED” - insulated mechanical services in chases, furred spaces, pipe shafts or hung ceilings.

2. “EXPOSED” - will mean “not concealed” as defined herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. FORMED FIBROUS GLASS TO 200°C

1. Application: insulation system for piping, valves, fittings, etc. maximum temperature 200°C. On domestic hot water and recirculating piping and fittings.

2. Materials:

1. CGSB 51-GP-9M, rigid mineral fibre sleeving for piping, including foilcraft laminate packet with open mesh fibre scrim reinforcing.

2. Acceptable materials: Knauff; Fibreglass Rigid-Wrap pipe insulation.

3. Thickness:

1. Domestic hot water and recirculating lines – located in conditioned spaces:

Line Size Nominal Thickness Nominal Up to NPS 1 1/4" 25 mm (1")

NPS 1 1/2" and larger 40 mm (1 1/2") Run-outs to fixtures

For max. of 2.4 m (8') 25 mm (1")




2.2. FORMED FIBROUS GLASS WITH V.B. -14 TO 37°C

1. Application: insulation system for piping, valves, heat exchangers, headers, fittings, etc., for temperature range - 14 to 37°C. On domestic cold water, rain water leaders, above grade storm and condensate lines.

Media Temperature 41 to 56°F / 5 to 13°C Line Size Nominal Thickness Nominal Up to NPS 1 1/4” 13 mm (1/2") NPS 1 1/2 and over 25 mm (1")

2. Materials:

1. CGSB 51-GP-9M, rigid mineral fibre sleeving for piping, and CGBS 51-GP-52M vapour barrier jacket. Complete with factory applied foil laminate, reinforced with open mesh fibre scrim.

3. Thickness – Media temperature <41°F/<5°C:

Line Size Nominal Thickness Nominal Up to NPS 3/4” 13 mm (1/2") Up to NPS 1” - 6” 25 mm (1”) NPS 8” and larger 38 mm (1 ½")

2.3. FASTENINGS

1. Self-adhesive tape and 100% coverage lagging adhesives.

1. Self-adhesive tape rated under 25 for flame spread and under 50 for smoke development.

2. For vapour barrier:

1. Quick-setting adhesive for joints and lamps sealing of vapour barriers. Flame spread 10 smoke development 0.

2.4. JACKETS

1. Fire retardant PVC jackets.

1. Apply in exposed areas (mechanical, boiler, storage rooms, corridors and other areas with exposed ceiling): compact, firm ULC listed, fire rated.

2. On concealed valves and fittings use ULC listed, fire rated, plain weave cotton fabric at 120 g/m

2 (0.38 oz/Sq. Ft.)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. APPLICATION




1. Apply insulation after required tests have been completed and approved by Consultant. Insulation and surfaces shall be clean and dry when installed and during application of any finish. Apply insulation materials, accessories and finishes in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as specified herein.

2. On piping with insulation and vapour barrier, install high density calcium silicate black under hanger shield and metal saddle. Maintain integrity of vapour barrier over full length of pipe without interruption at sleeves, fittings and supports.

3.2. INSTALLATION

1. Install in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 90A and ANSI/NFPA 90B.

2. Perform insulation work using qualified insulation applicators, in accordance with latest trade application methods and to the Consultant’s approval.

3. Work to begin only when building is enclosed preventing insulation from getting wet due to elements such as rain, snow, construction, etc. All damaged or wet insulation to be replaced.

4. All piping (Section 15260) insulation to be continuous except at fire barriers.

5. Preformed: sectional up to NPS 12, sectional or curved segmented above NPS 12.

6. Multi-layered: staggered butt joint construction.

7. Vertical pipe over NPS 3: insulation supports welded or bolted to pipe directly above lowest pipe fitting. Thereafter, locate on 3 m, 15' centres.

8. Expansion joints in insulation: terminate single layer and each layer of multiple layers in straight cut at intervals recommended by manufacturer. Leave void of 25 mm, 1" between terminations. Pack void lightly with flexible mineral insulation.

9. Seal and finish exposed ends and other terminations with insulating cement.

10. Expansion joints in piping: provide for adequate movement of expansion joint without damage to insulation or finishes.

11. Orifice plate mounting flanges, flanges and unions at equipment, expansion joints, valves, other components requiring regular maintenance.

12. Insulation is not required for:

1. Chrome plated piping, valves and fittings.

3.3. FASTENINGS

1. Secure pipe insulation by tape at each end and centre of each section, but not greater than 1 m (36") on centres.


Northern Secondary School 15412 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY PIPING: COPPER Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6119



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


2. All brass, bronze fittings and valves shall be “Lead Free Design”.

1.2. REFERENCE STANDARDS

1. Do the work in accordance with Ontario Building Code and local authority having jurisdiction except where specified otherwise.

1.3. SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Submit product data in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

2. Indicate the following: valves.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. PIPING

1. Domestic hot, cold and recirculating tubing, within building.

1. Above ground: copper tube, hard drawn, type L: to ASTM B88M-05 (2011).

2. Buried: soft copper tube, type K soft, with silfoss soldered joints: to ASTM B88M-05 (2011).

2.2. FITTINGS

1. Brass or bronze flanges and flanged fittings: to ASME B16.24-2011.

2. Brass or bronze threaded fittings: to ASME B16.15-2011.

3. Cast bronze to ASME B16.18-2012 or wrought copper and bronze to ASME B16.22-2013.

2.3. JOINTS

1. Solder, tin antimony, 95:5 to ASTM B32-08 or approved type lead free up to 2” dia., or Viega Propress for copper.




2. Grooved ends on piping larger than 2 1/2” dia. and up or Viega ProPress for copper sizes 2 1/2” to 4” dia.

2.4. VALVES

1. For Sizes 50mm (2”) and under 1034KPA (150psig) 600 WOG,

1. Brass Body to ASM C49300 (Lead Free Brass) Full Port, PTFE Seats, Double ”O” Ring or Teflon packing. TEA Plated Forged Brass C49300 Vented Solid Ball, Blowout Proof Stem, Lever handle.

2. Standard of Acceptance:

1. Kitz 859 (Solder) Kitz 858 ( NPT) or approved Equal

2. NPS 2 1/2 and over, grooved ends:

1. Epoxy Coated Cast Iron Body Grooved ends, Teflon Fused Solid Ball, Full Port Rated 200 WOG @200F Class VI shutoff, 100% Lead Free,Ansi,NSF61-8

2. Acceptable material: American 3700V or Approved Equal

1. Option American 3700 Flanged end connection 2” to 8” or Approved Equal

2.5. SWING CHECK VALVES

1. Check Valves- Back Flow Prevention

1. For sizes 50mm (2”) and under, 860kPa (125psig) 200WOG. Bronze body to ASTM C89530 (Lead Free Bronze) Screwed Cap C49300 (Lead Free Brass) Integral Seat, PTFE Disc.

1. Swing “ Y” Pattern

2. Screwed Ends Kitz 822T

3. Soldered Ends Kitz 823T

2.6. BALL VALVES

1. NPS 2 and under:

1. Bronze body, screwed ends, TFE seal, bronze hard chrome plated ball, 4 MPa WOG.

2. Acceptable Material: Watts 6000, Red-White 5044A, NIBCO TFP600; Kitz 58.

PART 3 - EXECUTION




3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Connect to fixtures and equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install tubing close to building structure to minimize furring, conserve head room and space. Group exposed piping and run parallel to walls.

3. Cut square, ream and clean tubing and tube ends, clean recesses of fittings and assemble without binding.

4. Isolate equipment, fixtures and branches with gate valves.

5. Provide necessary chemicals and equipment and disinfect system to requirements of authority having jurisdiction.

6. Coordinate with the Building Inspector to witness tests and inspect work.

7. Provide ball valves at each plumbing lines take-off and each plumbing fixtures and on isolation.


Northern Secondary School 15413 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, DRAINAGE WASTE AND VENT PIPING - Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades CAST IRON AND COPPER Project Number: 6119 Page 1



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

1. Above ground sanitary and vent Type DWV to: ASTM B306-13 up to 2 1/2".

1. Fittings.

1. Cast brass: to CSA B158.1-1976.

2. Wrought copper: to ANSI B16.29-2012.

2. Solder: tin-lead, 50:50, to ASTM B32-08, type 50A.

2.2. CAST IRON PIPING AND FITTINGS

1. Above ground sanitary storm and vent: to CAN3-B70-M86 3" and larger.

1. Joints.

1. Mechanical joints.

1. Neoprene or butyl rubber compression gaskets with stainless steel clamps.

2. Cast iron couplings.

1. Complete with neoprene gaskets and stainless steel bolts and nuts.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

Northern Secondary School 15413 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, DRAINAGE WASTE AND VENT PIPING - Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades CAST IRON AND COPPER Project Number: 6119 Page 2



1. Install piping parallel and close to walls and ceilings to conserve headroom and space, and to grade indicated.



Northern Secondary School 15414 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, DRAINAGE WASTE AND VENT PIPING: PLASTIC Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6119



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. PIPING AND FITTINGS

1. For buried sanitary storm and vent piping up to NPS3 to:

1. CAN3-B181.2-M87 for PVC DWV with solvent weld joints.

2. For buried sanitary and storm piping NPS 4 and larger to:

1. CAN/CSA-B182.1 and B182.2, BNQ 3624-130DR35. With Ring-Tite joints or glue type joints - IPEX - System 15.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Install buried pipe on 6" bed of washed clean sand, shaped to accommodate fittings, to line and grade as indicated. Backfill with washed clean sand.

2. Please pipe referenced in this section for below grade only. For above grade refer to Section 15413.

3. Provide ULC or Warnock Hersey listed and labelled fire seals at penetration of fire rated walls, ceilings, etc.

4. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and building code.



Northern Secondary School 15430 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6119



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL




1.3. SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

1.4. PRODUCT DATA


2. Indicate dimensions, construction details and materials for the following: floor drains, backflow preventers, hose bibbs, strainers, traps, trap seal primer.



2. Data to include:

1. Description of plumbing specialties and accessories, giving manufacturers name, type, model, year and capacity.

2. Details of operation, servicing and maintenance.

3. Recommended spare parts list.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. BACK FLOW PREVENTERS

1. Reduced pressure principle type: to CSA B64.10-11.




2. Double check valve assembly: to CAN3-B64.6/B64.7.

3. Back flow preventer with intermediate atmospheric vent: to CSA B64 Series-2011.

2.2. VACUUM BREAKERS

1. Atmospheric vacuum breaker: to CSA B64 Series-2011.

2. Hose connection vacuum breaker: to CSA B64 Series-2011.

2.3. STRAINERS

1. 100 psi, Y type with 20 mesh, monel, bronze or stainless steel removable screen.

2. NPS 2 and under, bronze body, screwed ends, with brass cap.

1. Acceptable material: Watts 7775

3. NPS 2 1/2 and over, cast iron body, flanged ends, with bolted cap.

1. Acceptable material: Watts, Zurn

2.4. TRAP SEAL PRIMERS

1. All brass, with integral vacuum breaker, NPS 1/2 solder ends, NPS 1/2 drip line connection.

2. Acceptable material: Watts, Zurn, Enpoco.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified.


3.2. BACK FLOW PREVENTORS

1. Install and test in accordance with CSA B64.10-01, where indicated and elsewhere as required by code. Submit Certification.

2. Pipe discharge to over nearest drain or service sink.

3.3. STRAINERS




1. Allow sufficient room to remove basket.

3.4. TRAP SEAL PRIMERS

1. Install on cold water supply to nearest plumbing fixture, in concealed space.

2. Install soft copper tubing to floor drain.

3.5. COMMISSIONING

1. After start-up, test and adjust to suit site conditions.


Northern Secondary School 15440 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6119



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. RELATED WORK

1. See Section 15430 - Plumbing Specialties and Accessories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM

1. Plumbing fixtures shall be product of one manufacturer, and of same colour in any one washroom or location, unless listed otherwise.

2. Materials:

1. Vitreous china to CSA B45.1-02.

2. Stainless steel fixtures to CSA B45.04-02 Class II, type 302 unless otherwise stated.

3. Plumbing fittings to CSA B125-01.

4. Exposed plumbing brass and metal work shall be heavy triple chromium plated.

5. Faucets for counter sinks, lavatory, bubblers to be “lead-free” design.

6. Acceptable manufacturers of same quality, appearance and colour as selected fixtures:

7. Crane, Kohler, Fiat, Kindred Industries, Bradley, Symmons, American Standard, AMI, Acudor-Acorn, Zurn, Chicago Faucets.

2.2. WATER CLOSETS

1. WC#1: Flush valve, floor mounted, barrier-free.

1. Bowl: vitreous china, water closet with elongated rim, siphon jet, whirlpool flush action, 4.8 LPF flush, 432 mm (17”) high, Crane Hymont II 3-338.

2. Seat: white molded plastic, open front with cover, complete with s.s. hinges, plate and solid brass insert post. Olsonite 46.

3. Flush Valve:

1. Exposed, quiet diaphragm-type, chrome plated, low flush 4.8 LPF Zurn Z6000AV-1.

2. WC #2: Flush valve, floor mounted.




1. Bowl: vitreous china, water closet with elongated rim, siphon jet, whirlpool flush action, 4.8 LPF flush. Crane ULF Commercial 3-310.

2. Seat: white molded plastic, open front less cover, complete with s.s. hinges, plate and solid brass insert post. Olsonite 46.

3. Flush Valve:

1. Exposed, quiet diaphragm-type, chrome plated, low flush 4.8 LPF Zurn Z6000AV-1.

3. WC #3: Flush tank, floor mounted.

1. Bowl: vitreous china, water closet bowl with elongated rim complete with lined tank, 4.8 litre ultra low flush toilet. Crane Radcliffe 3-405.

2. Seat: white molded plastic, open front with cover, complete with s.s. hinges, plate and solid brass insert post. Olsonite 46.

2.3. WALL HUNG LAVATORY

1. L#1: Wall hung vitreous china, self-rimming - existing to remain, to be cleaned and washed.

1. Trim: Two wrist handles, heavy duty cast brass chrome plated finish, 8” centre, complete with gooseneck spout, quaturn ceramic disk cartridge. Chicago Faucet 895-317E2805-5CP-XL.

2. Waste: 1 ¼” tailpiece with s.s. steel strainer.

3. Supplies: 3/8” angle with stops. Crane C-1151.

4. Trap: chrome plated adjustable brass with escutcheon.

2.4. URINALS

1. U#1: vitreous china, washout wall urinal with extended shield, complete with integral trap top spud and steel hangers, 0.5 Gal. per flush. Crane Embassy 7397.

.1 Valve: automatic sensor operated. Exposed, quiet diaphragm-type, chrome plated,

flushometer with a polished exterior, chloramine resistant, dual seal diaphragm with a clog resistant, triple filtered by-pass, manual push-button override, high back pressure vacuum breaker, one piece hex coupling nut, adjustable tailpiece, spud coupling and flange for top spud connection. Courtesy flush button. Control stop has internal siphon-guard protection, vandal resistant stop cap, sweat solder kit, and a cast wall flange with set screw. Internal seals are made of chloramine resistant materials. Valve – 6V DC motor actuator complete with power converter.

Zurn ZEMS 6000AV-15-WS1.

2.5. WASH FOUNTAIN




1. WF#1: Acorn 3 Station ‘TRI-LAV WASHFOUNTAIN’ barrier-free #3603-ADA-2-SO-MXT, electronic Operated Unit, 26" x 36" x 33" (660mm x 914mm x 838mm), floor mounted, factory pre-assembled, ADA compliant bowl design to OBC, with individual sectional control. Bowl, pedestal, and spray head to be of ‘Precast Terrazzo’ (colour - Palomino Tan) Pedestal to have front panel of 16 (1.5mm) heavy gauge stainless steel access plate, all exposed fasteners for access plate to be vandal-resistant. Spray nozzles to be vandal-resistant with 1.9 LPM (0.5 GPM) flow controls, electronic sensor operation, power transformer. Fixtures with splashback anchored to wall and housing framework anchored to floor. Thermostatic Balancing Mixing Valve and strainers in 1/2" (12.7mm) H & CW supplies and field set water temperature at 105 deg. F (41 deg.C). Provide Supplies with angle stops. Provide Cast Brass ‘p’ Trap, 1-1/2" (38mm). Supplies and drain from wall (on floor).

2. WF#2: Acorn Curved Front Dual Station, barrier-free #3772-ADA-2-SO-MXT, electronic Operated Unit, 50” W x 21 1/2” D x 33" H (1270mm x 546mm x 838mm), floor mounted, factory assembled, ADA compliant bowls design to OBC, with individual bowl control. Basins, countertop, backsplash and spray heads to be constructed of solid surface polymer resin (Corterra) - colour Sahara (Tan). Wall mounted pedestal frame - stainless steel. Enclosure and scuff panel 16 Ga stainless steel. Provide solenoid valve activated sensor with power transformer, temperature/pressure balancing mixing valve, checks, supply and waste. Field set water temperature at 105 deg. F (41 deg.C). Provide Cast Brass ‘p’ Trap, 1-1/2" (38mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. FIXTURE INSTALLATION

1. Connect fixtures complete with supplies and drains, trapped, supported level and square. Each fixture must have lockshield valves on supplies. Hot water faucet shall be on left. Mixing faucets and thermostatically controlled mixing valves to have check valves on supplies. Fixtures on outside walls to have supplies from floor; other fixtures to be served from wall.

2. Provide chrome plated rigid supplies to fixtures with screwdriver or handwheel stops, reducers and escutcheons.

3. Provide supports, required to set fixtures level and square. Mount fixtures so that 200 lb mass will not loosen or distort mounting.

4. Provide shock absorbers for each fixture or group of fixtures.

5. Mounting heights for wall hung fixtures and showers measured from finished floor:

1. Standard: to comply with manufacturer’s roughing-in details and Ontario Building Code, unless otherwise indicated or specified.

2. Physically handicapped: to comply with OBC 2012.

6. Test all devices and equipment.


Northern Secondary School 15516 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS, ANCHORS, Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades JOINTS AND GUIDES Project Number: 6119 Page 1



PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Submit product data and technical information.

2. Indicate for each item as applicable:

1. Manufacturer, model number, line content, pressure and temperature rating.

2. Movement handled; axial, lateral, angular and the amounts of each.

3. Nominal size and dimensions including details of construction and assembly.


1. Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section Submittals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. EXPANSION COMPENSATOR

1. Stainless steel bellows, steel stroud and fittings - for potable water.

2. Fittings: male thread ends or flange/flange.

3. Size and end connection: to suit.

4. Complete unit suitable for working pressure for 1040 kPa (150 psi) and working temperature of 230°C (450°F).

5. Capacity to absorb:

a) 2" linear movement – thread ends.

b) 1 – 6” linear movement – flange type – high corr

6. Standard of Acceptance: Flexonics Model H (up to 2” dia.); Flexonics Model CSF (2 ½” – 8” dia.) for potable water.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

Northern Secondary School 15516 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS, ANCHORS, Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades JOINTS AND GUIDES Project Number: 6119 Page 2



3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

2. Provide high corr expansion compensator to piping 2 1/2” and 3” dia.

3. Install pipe anchors and guides as indicated and recommended by manufacturer. Anchors to withstand 150% of axial thrust. Piping anchors – structural steel angles, channels, or plates secured to building structure at locations as shown. Provide two guides on each side of and adjacent to joint. Guides to be pipe rolls or structural steel shapes secured to building structure.


Northern Secondary School 15860 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, COMMERCIAL FANS Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Project Number: 6119 Page 1



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. REFERENCES

1. AMCA 99-10, Standards Handbook.

2. AMCA 210-07, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.

3. AMCA 300-08, Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans.

4. AMCA 301-06, Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data.

5. CGSB 1-GP-181M, Coating, Zinc Rich, Organic, Ready Mixed.

6. ASHRAE Standard 51-2007 -- Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating (ANSI/ASHRAE Approved) (ANSI/AMCA Standard 210-07)



2. Product data to include fan curves and sound rating data, showing point of operation.

3. Indicate the following: motors, wheels, bearings, shafts and enclosures.

1.4. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

1. Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01300 - Submittals.

1.5. MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

1. Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01300 – Submittals.

1. Spare parts to include:

1. Matched sets of belts.

2. Furnish list of individual manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for equipment such as bearings and seals, and addresses of suppliers, together with list of specialized tools necessary for adjusting, repairing or




replacing, for placement into operating manual.

1.6. MANUFACTURED ITEMS

1. Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards in force.

2. Provide confirmation of testing.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1. FANS – GENERAL

1. Capacity, total static pressure, revolutions per minute, power, model, size, sound power data and as indicated.

2. Sound ratings: comply with AMCA (Air Moving and Conditioning Association) 301, tested to AMCA 300. Unit shall bear AMCA certified sound rating seal.

3. Fans: statically and dynamically balanced, constructed in conformity with AMCA 99.

4. Performance ratings: based on tests performed in accordance with ANSI/AMCA 210, and ANSI/ASHRAE 51. Unit shall bear AMCA certified rating seal, except for propeller fans smaller than 12" diameter.

5. Motors: for use with variable speed controllers where indicated.

6. Motors: sizes as indicated.

7. Accessories and hardware: matched sets of V-belt drives, adjustable slide rail motor bases, belt guards, coupling guards, fan inlet outlet safety screens, outlet dampers and vanes as indicated.

8. Factory primed before assembly in colour standard to manufacturer.

9. Scroll casing drains: as indicated.

10. Bearing lubrication systems plus extension lubrication tubes where bearings are not easily accessible.

11. Flexible connections: to Section 15911 - Duct Accessories.

12. Acceptable Product: Penn, Cook, Jenco, Greenheck, Broan, Nutone.

2.2. CENTRIFUGAL FANS

1. Description:




1. Rotation, discharge and motor position to be as shown.

2. Fan classification to be established to permit operation at 125% of rotational speed at point of selection.

2. Fan Wheels:

1. Backward curved or backward inclined blades for fan wheel diameters less than 686 mm.

2. Backward curved air foil blades for fan wheel diameters 686 mm and larger.

3. Accessories:

1. Fans to be fitted with:

1. 38 mm casing drains where fans discharge vertically.

2. Stuffing box style shaft seals on single inlet single width fans and utility sets.

2.3. TUBULAR CENTRIFUGAL FANS

1. Constructed as for centrifugal fan wheels, direct drive.

2. Configured as Arrangement #1, #9 or as indicated.

3. Smooth rounded inlet, and stationary guide vanes.


3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Install fans as indicated, complete with resilient mountings supplied by manufacturer.

2. Install fan restraining snubbers as indicated.

3. Install fan complete with vibration isolation, flexible electrical wiring, flexible duct connections to inlet and discharge air ductwork.

4. Flexible connections shall not be in tension during running.

5. Provide sheaves and belts required for final air balance.


Northern Secondary School 15891 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, DUCTWORK, METALLIC, LOW PRESSURE - Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades TO 500 PA Project Number: 6119 Page 1



PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL



1. Do work in accordance with:

1. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, 2005.

2. SMACNA HVAC Duct Leakage Test Manual, 2012 Edition.

3. ASHRAE Handbook, Fundamentals, and Systems Volumes.



2. Indicate following:

1. Sealants

2. Tape

3. Proprietary Joints

1.4. CERTIFICATION OF RATINGS

1. Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1. CLASSIFICATION

1. Ductwork classification as follows:

Maximum SMACNA Pressure Seal Pa "WG Class 500 2 B 250 1 C 125 0.5 C




2.2. SEAL CLASSIFICATION

1. Class A: longitudinal seams, transverse joints, duct wall penetrations and connections made airtight with sealant and tape.

2. Class B: longitudinal seams, transverse joints and connections made airtight with sealant tape or combination thereof.

3. Class C: transverse joints and connections or made air tight with gaskets, sealant tape or combination thereof. Longitudinal seams unsealed.

4. Unsealed seams and joints.

2.3. SEALANT

1. Sealant: water based polymer type flame resistant duct sealant. Temperature range of minus 30°C to plus 93°C.

1. Acceptable material: Duro-Dyne DWN/water based, 3M Fastbond 900.

2.4. TAPE

1. Tape: polyvinyl treated, open weave fiberglass tape, 50 mm (2") wide.

1. Acceptable material: Duro-Dyne

2.5. DUCT LEAKAGE

1. In accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Leakage Test Manual, 2012 Edition.

2. In accordance with ASHRAE 90.1

2.6. FITTINGS

1. Fabrication: to SMACNA.

2. Radiused elbows: standard radius and or short radius with single thickness turning vanes.

3. Square elbows: to 460 mm (18") with single thickness turning vanes.

4. Square elbows: over 460 mm (18") with double thickness turning vanes.

5. Main supply duct branches with splitter damper.

6. Sub branch duct with 45° entry and balancing damper on branch or sub branch duct with square connection, volume extractor and branch duct balancing damper.

7. Transitions:




1. Diverging: 20° maximum included angle.

2. Converging: 30° maximum included angle.

8. Offsets: square elbows or full radiused elbows.

9. Obstruction deflectors: maintain full cross-sectional area. Maximum included angles as for transitions.

2.7. FIRESTOPPING

1. Retaining angles all around duct, on both sides of fire separation.

2. Firestopping material and installation must not distort duct.

2.8. GALVANIZED STEEL

1. Lock forming quality: to ASTM A525M-86, Z90 zinc coating.

2. Thickness: to ASHRAE and SMACNA.

3. Fabrication: to ASHRAE and SMACNA.

4. Joints: to ASHRAE and SMACNA or proprietary manufactured duct joint.

1. Acceptable material: Duct-Mate

2.9. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

1. Strap hangers: of same material as duct, but next sheet metal thickness heavier than duct.

2. Hanger configuration: to ASHRAE and SMACNA. Maximum size duct supported by strap hanger 20".

3. Hangers: galvanized steel angle with black steel rods to ASHRAE and SMACNA.


3.1. GENERAL

1. Install ducts in accordance with ASHRAE and SMACNA.

2. Do not break continuity of insulation vapour barrier with hangers or rods. Insulate strap hangers 100 mm (4") beyond insulated duct.

3. Support risers in accordance with ASHRAE and SMACNA.

4. Install breakaway joints in ductwork on each side of fire separation.




3.2. HANGERS

1. Strap hangers: install in accordance with SMACNA.

2. Angle hangers: complete with locking nuts and washers.

3. Hanger spacing: in accordance with ASHRAE.

3.3. WATERTIGHT DUCT

1. Provide watertight duct for:

1. Fresh air intake.

2. As indicated.

2. Form bottom of horizontal duct without longitudinal seams. Seal all other joints with duct sealer.

3. Slope horizontal branch ductwork down towards hoods served. Slope header ducts down toward risers.

4. Fit base of riser with 100 mm (4") deep drain sump and 1 1/4" drain connected, with deep seal trap and discharging to open funnel drain.

3.4. SEALING AND TAPING

1. Apply sealant to outside of joint to manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Bed tape in sealant and recoat with minimum of 1 coat of sealant to manufacturer’s recommendations.


Northern Secondary School 15893 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Project Number: 6119 Page 1



PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL



1. Do work in accordance with the following standards except where specified otherwise:

1. CAN/ULC S110-13 for fire tests for air ducts.

2. UL 181-2013 for factory made air ducts and connectors.

3. NFPA 90A-2012 for installation of air conditioning and ventilating systems.

4. NFPA 90B-2012 for installation of warm air heating and air conditioning systems.

5. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, 1995.



2. Indicate the following:

1. Thermal properties.

2. Friction loss.

3. Acoustical loss.

4. Leakage.

5. Fire rating.



1.5. SAMPLES

1. Submit samples with product data of each different type of flexible duct being used in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

Northern Secondary School 15893 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Project Number: 6119 Page 2



PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1. GENERAL

1. Factory fabricated.

2. Pressure drop coefficients listed below are based on relative sheet metal duct pressure drop coefficient of 1.00.

3. Flame spread rating not to exceed 25. Smoke developed rating not to exceed 50.

2.2. METALLIC - UNINSULATED

1. Spiral wound flexible aluminum.

2. Performance:

1. Minimum working pressure: 2500 Pa (10"WG)

2. Maximum relative pressure drop coefficient: 3.

3. Acceptable material: Flexmaster triple lock.

2.3. METALLIC - INSULATED

1. Spiral wound flexible aluminum with factory applied flexible glass fibre thermal insulation with vapour barrier and aluminum jacket.

2. Performance:

1. Minimum working pressure: 2500 Pa (10" WG)

2. Maximum relative pressure drop coefficient: 3.

3. Acceptable material: Flexmaster


3.1. DUCT INSTALLATION

1. Install where indicated and in accordance with SMACNA.

2. Support in accordance with SMACNA.

3. Maximum length of flexible duct: 1.8 m, 6' for diffuser / grille duct connection.


Northern Secondary School 15911 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, DUCT ACCESSORIES Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Project Number: 6119 Page 1



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. PRODUCT DATA



1. Flexible connections.

2. Sealants and tapes.

3. Duct access doors.

4. Turning vanes.

5. Instrument test ports.



PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1. FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

1. Frame: galvanized sheet metal frame 16 GA, 1.6 mm, with fabric clenched by means of double locked seams.

2. Material:

1. Fire resistant, self extinguishing, neoprene coated glass fabric, temperature rated at minus 40°F to plus 200°F, density of 0.3 lb/sq.ft.

2. Flame resistant, 0.56 mm thick vinyl coated fabric, 12 kg/m3 fibreglass insulation for

operation of 82°C continuous – connections for insulated duct system, less than 250 mm dia or less than 300 mm – negative pressure duct connection.

1. Duro-Dyne-Insulflex

3. Silicon rubber coated woven fibreglass fabric to UL 214 for operation up to 260°C –




for fume hood exhaust systems.

1. Duro-Dyne-Thermafab.

2.2. ACCESS DOORS IN DUCTS

1. Non-insulated ducts: sandwich construction of same material as duct, one sheet metal thickness heavier, minimum 0.6 mm thick complete with sheet metal angle frame.

2. Insulated ducts: sandwich construction of same material as duct, one sheet metal thickness heavier, minimum 0.6 mm thick complete with sheet metal angle frame and 25 mm thick rigid glass fibre insulation.

3. Gaskets: neoprene or foam rubber.

4. Hardware:

1. Up to 250 mm x 250 mm, 12 x 12": 2 sash locks complete with safety chain.

2. 275 to 460 mm, 13 to 18": 4 sash locks complete with safety chain.

3. 485 mm to 910 mm, 19 to 36": piano hinge and minimum 2 sash locks.

4. Doors over 920 mm, 37": piano hinge and 2 handles operable from both sides.

5. Hold open devices.

6. 250 mm x 250 mm, 12" x 12": glass viewing panels.

2.3. TURNING VANES

1. Factory or shop fabricated single thickness and double thickness with trailing edge, to recommendations of SMACNA and as indicated.

2.4. INSTRUMENT TEST PORTS

1. 1.6 mm, 16 GA steel zinc plated after manufacture.

2. Cam lock handles with neoprene expansion plug and handle chain.

3. 1" minimum inside diameter. Length to suit insulation thickness.

4. Neoprene mounting gasket.


3.1. INSTALLATION




1. Flexible connections.

1. Install in following locations:

1. Inlets and outlets to supply air units and fans.

2. Inlets and outlets of exhaust and return air fans.

3. As indicated.

2. Length of connection: 6" (150 mm)

3. Minimum distance between metal parts when system in operation: 3" (75 mm)

4. Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA.

5. When fan is running:

1. Ducting on each side of flexible connection to be in alignment.

2. Ensure slack material in flexible connection.

2. Access doors:

1. Size: to allow inspection and servicing.

2. Location:

1. At fire and smoke dampers.

2. At control dampers.

3. At devices requiring maintenance.

4. At locations required by code.

5. At reheat coils.

6. As indicated.

3. Instrument test ports.

1. General:

1. Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. Locations.

1. For traverse readings:

2. At ducted inlets to roof and wall exhausters.

1. At inlets and outlets of other fan systems.




2. At main and sub-main ducts. 3. And as indicated.

3. For temperature readings:

1. At outside air intakes. 2. In mixed air applications in locations as approved by Consultant. 3. At inlet and outlet of coils. 4. Downstream of junctions of two converging air streams of

different temperatures. 5. And as indicated.

4. Turning vanes.

1. Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA and as indicated.


Northern Secondary School 15912 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, DAMPERS - BALANCING Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Project Number: 6119 Page 1



PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL



1. Do work in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, 1995, except where specified otherwise.

1.3. PRODUCT DATA


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1. SPLITTER DAMPERS

1. Of same material as duct but one sheet metal thickness heavier.

2. Single thickness construction.

3. Control rod with locking device.

4. Bend end of rod to prevent end from entering duct.

5. Pivot: piano hinge.

2.2. SINGLE BLADE DAMPERS

1. Of same material as duct, but one sheet metal thickness heavier. V-groove stiffened.

2. Size and configuration to recommendations of SMACNA, except maximum height 9", 225 mm.

3. Locking quadrant.

4. Inside and outside end bearings.

2.3. MULTI-BLADED DAMPERS

1. Factory manufactured of material compatible with duct.

Northern Secondary School 15912 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, DAMPERS - BALANCING Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Project Number: 6119 Page 2



2. Opposed blade: configuration to recommendations of SMACNA.

3. Maximum blade height: 4", 100 mm.

4. Bearings: pin in bronze bushings.

5. Linkage: shaft extension with locking quadrant.

6. Channel frame of same material as adjacent duct, complete with angle stop.


3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Install at each take off and where indicated.

2. Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3. For supply, return and exhaust systems, volume dampers are to be located in each branch duct. Each grille, register and diffuser connection to have volume damper located as close as possible to main ducts.


Northern Secondary School 15914 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, DAMPERS - FIRE AND SMOKE Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Project Number: 6119 Page 1



PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. REFERENCES

1. NFPA 90A-2012, Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

2. CAN/ULC-S112-10, Fire Test of Fire Damper Assemblies.

3. CAN/ULC-S112.2-07, Fire Test of Ceiling Firestop Flap Assemblies.

4. ULC-S505-1974, Fusible Links for Fire Protection Service.

1.3. PRODUCT DATA



1. Fire dampers.



2. Provide following:

1. 6 fusible links of each type.


1. Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1. FIRE DAMPERS




1. Fire dampers: listed and bear label of ULC and meet requirements of provincial fire authority and NFPA 90A - to be dynamic type.

2. Mild steel, factory fabricated for fire rating requirement to maintain integrity of fire wall and/or fire separation.

3. Top hinged: interlocking type sized to maintain full duct cross section.

4. Fusible link actuated, weighted to close and lock in closed position when released or having negator-spring-closing operator for multi-leaf type or roll door type in horizontal position with vertical air flow.

5. 40 x 40 x 3 mm (1 1/2" x 1 1/2" x 1/8") retaining angle iron frame, on full perimeter of fire damper, on both sides of fire separation being pierced.

6. Acceptable material: Ruskin, Alumavent.

2.2. FIRE STOP FLAPS

1. To be ULC listed and labelled.

2. Construction of minimum 1.5 mm thick sheet steel with 1.6 mm thick non-asbestos ULC listed insulation and corrosion-resistant pins and hinges.


3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A and in accordance with conditions of ULC listing.

2. Fire damper assemblies to be fire tested in accordance with CAN/ULC-S112.

3. Maintain integrity of fire separation.

4. After completion and prior to concealment obtain approvals of complete installation from authority having jurisdiction.

5. Install access door adjacent to each damper. See Section 15911 - Duct Accessories.

6. Coordinate with installer of firestopping.

7. Select interlocking curtain type blade damper frames as follows; (Width is duct dimension parallel to blades. Height is duct dimension perpendicular to blades.)

1. Type A - folded blades completely within airstream:

1. for rectangular ducts with both height and width greater than 300 mm, and where duct velocity is less than 7.5 m/s.




2. Type B - folded blades out of airstream:

1. for rectangular ducts 200 mm to 350 mm in height and width greater than 200 mm, and where duct velocity is less than 7.5 m/s.

3. Type C – folded blades and damper frame shielded with airstream impingement:

1. for circular or flat oval ducts

2. for rectangular duct less than 200 mm in height

3. for rectangular duct less than 350 mm in height when width is less than 200 mm, and

4. for rectangular ducts where duct velocity is greater than 7.5 m/s.


Northern Secondary School 15942 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Project Number: 6119 Page 1



PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Submit shop drawings and technical information in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

2. Clearly indicate the following: material, gauge, finish, ratings and accessories.

1.2. RELATED WORK

1. Low Pressure Ductwork - Section 15891.


1.3. MANUFACTURED ITEMS

1. Grilles, registers and diffusers shall be product of one manufacturer.


1. Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by an independent testing agency signifying adherence to applicable codes and standards.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1. GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS GENERAL

1. Sizes indicated are nominal. Provide correct standard product nearest to nominal for capacity noise level, throat and outlet velocity.

2. Furnish factory prime coated steel frames for setting into fire protecting membrane.

3. Where penetrating fire partitions, provide approved steel sleeve attached to structure and secured in accordance with NFPA 90.

4. Frame:

1. Steel: Prime coated, cold rolled steel with exposed joints welded and ground flush, mitred corners and completely closed.

2. Provide full perimeter sponge rubber gaskets.

3. Provide plaster frame or gypsum board.




4. Provide concealed fasteners and operators.

5. Sizes and capacities: as indicated.

6. Standard of Acceptance: E.H. Price, Krueger, Titus, Nailor Industries, Metal Aire.

2.2. SUPPLY GRILLES AND REGISTERS

1. Double deflection with horizontal face and vertical rear bars or as indicated in schedule.

2. Steel or aluminum construction.

2.3. EXHAUST GRILLES AND REGISTERS

1. Single deflection, horizontal adjustable bar type or as indicated in schedule.


2.4. AIR DIFFUSERS

1. Square, rectangular or linear with removable, flow straightening core and blank-off quadrants.


2.5. LINEAR GRILLES

1. Aluminum bar core type with margin as indicated, pattern adjustment, plaster frames, sealing strips, end caps, mitered corners and alignment key strips for multiple sections.

2.6. FINISHES

1. Primer: to CGSB 1-GP-40M, off white.

2. Enamel: to CGSB 1-GP-88E, off white.


3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

2. Fit frame with gasket to prevent leakage, and smudging.

3. Install with flat head screws in countersunk holes where fastenings are visible.




4. Diffusers to be installed with concealed fastenings.


Northern Secondary School 15990 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB) Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Project Number: 6119 Page 1



PART 1 - TAB AGENCY

1. General:

1. The basic testing and balancing shall be provided by Division 15 and in accordance with this Section.

2. The independent TAB Agency employed and paid by Division 15 will be providing the final testing and balancing.


2. Quality assurance:

1. TAB to be performed to standards of ASHRAE.

3. Co-ordination:

1. Co-ordinate all work specified in this Section.

2. Provide all facilities required by TAB Agency in order to carry out work of this Section.

4. Adequacy of work for TAB:

1. TAB Agency to review contract documents before work is started and confirm in writing to Consultant adequacy of provisions for TAB and all other aspects of installation pertinent to TAB.

2. Division 15 shall provide equipment commissioning and preliminary balancing and confirm the proper operation of all systems.

5. List of TAB Agencies:

1. ABG Air Balance Group (416) 283-0637

2. Aerodynamics Inspecting Consultants Ltd. (905) 625-4388 3. Design Test Balance

(905) 886-6513 4. AirPlus (416) 298-6874

PART 2 - GENERAL

1. TAB: means to test, adjust and balance all systems to perform in accordance with Contract Documents.




2. Follow start-up procedures as recommended by manufacturer unless otherwise specified.

3. Special start-up procedures may be specified elsewhere.

4. Notify Consultant 7 days prior to start of TAB.

5. Operate all systems to permit TAB to be performed.

6. TAB to apply to systems, equipment and related controls specified in Division 15.

7. Reference organization standards:

1. Do TAB over entire operating range in accordance with most stringent conditions of this specification and standard of following organization.

8. Alternate season testing to be provided by TAB Contractor where applicable.

9. TAB Contractor to inspect site during construction in order to assure that all balancing devices are installed properly and in pre-selected locations.

10. Mechanical contractor to provide the TAB contractor with all related approved shop drawings and change notices.

11. Start TAB only when building is essentially completed, including:

1. Installation of ceilings, doors, windows and other construction affecting TAB.

2. Application of sealing, caulking and weatherstripping.

3. All pressure, leakage and other tests specified elsewhere in Division 15 completed.

4. All provisions for TAB are installed and operational.

12. Start-up, verification for proper, safe and normal operation of mechanical and associated electrical and control systems affecting TAB including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Proper thermal overload protection in place for electrical equipment.

2. Air Systems:

1. Filters in place and in clean condition.

2. Duct systems clean of debris.

3. Air shafts, ceiling plenums are airtight to within specified tolerances.

4. Correct fan rotation.

5. Fire and volume dampers in place and open.

6. Coil fins cleaned and combed.




7. Access doors closed and duct end caps in place.

8. All outlets installed and connected.

13. Accuracy tolerances:

1. Do TAB to following tolerances of design values:

1. HVAC systems: Plus 5%; minus 5%.

2. As original tolerances.

3. Measurements to be accurate to within plus or minus 2% of actual values.

2. Instrument calibration: to be in accordance with TAB referenced organization standard, but within 3 months of commencement of TAB.

14. Submittals prior to commencement of TAB:

1. Proposed methodology and procedures for performing TAB.

2. Proposed check lists and report forms.

3. List of instrumentation, including details and certificates of calibration.

15. Report:

1. Format to be in accordance with TAB referenced organization standard, but using SI units.

2. Report to include as built full system schematics showing results of TAB.

3. Submit, prior to formal submission of TAB reports, for checking and approval by Consultant, sample of rough TAB sheets. Include:

1. Details of instruments used.

2. Details of TAB procedures employed.

3. Calculations procedures.

4. Summaries.

4. Submit 3 copies of TAB reports, each in "D" ring binders, complete with index tabs for verification and approval of Consultant.

16. Verification:

1. Reported measurements shall be subject to verification by Consultant. Provide instrumentation and manpower to verify results of up to 30% of all reported measurements. Number and location of verified measurements to be at discretion of Consultant.




2. Bear costs to repeat TAB, as required, to satisfaction of Consultant.

1. Settings: lock and permanently mark settings as required by reference standard.

2. Completion: TAB to be considered complete only when final reports are approved by Consultant.

PART 3 - AIR MOVING SYSTEMS

1. General: measurements as required by referenced organization standards, including, but not limited to, following:

1. Measurements:

1. Air velocity.

2. Static pressure.

3. Velocity pressure.

4. Temperature:

1. Dry bulb.

5. Cross sectional area.

6. RPM.

7. Electrical power:

1. Voltage 2. Current draw.

2. Location of equipment measurements:

1. Inlet and outlet of each:

1. Fan.

2. Coil.

3. Filter.

4. Damper.

5. Other auxiliary equipment.

3. Location of system measurements at:

1. Main ducts.

2. Main branch ducts.




3. Sub-branch ducts.

4. Each supply, exhaust and return air inlet and outlet.

5. Other auxiliary equipment.

6. All areas served by system.


Northern Secondary School 16010 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6119



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


2. This Section covers items common to Sections of Division 16. This Section supplements requirements of Division 1.

3. Coordinate all requirements with general contractor.

1.2. SCOPE OF WORK

1. Disconnect old electrical devices such as electric heaters, lighting fixtures, emergency lighting and batteries, heat detector and other devices from renovated washroom areas and Janitor Room.

2. Provide, install and wire new devices such as lighting fixtures, fire alarm devices, emergency lighting system, lighting controls, heaters, etc.

3. Wire new plumbing fixtures with electric control valve such as wash fountain, urinals, etc.

4. Provide rough-in for barrier-free washrooms door access.

5. Perform any other electrical work required by this contract.

1.3. CODES AND STANDARDS

1. In this document, all references to Code numbers shall mean “Latest Edition”.

2. Do complete installation in accordance with Ontario Electrical Safety Code.

3. Do complete installation in accordance with CSA C22.1-12 except where specified otherwise.

4. Comply with all CSA and inspection Authority Bulletins in force at time of Tender.

5. Abbreviations for electrical terms: to CSA Z85-1983.

6. Where requirements of this specification exceed those of above mentioned standards, this specification shall govern.

1.4. DEFINITIONS

1. “Provide” means supply and install.

2. “Approved” means approved in writing by Consultant.




3. “Inspection Authority” means Electrical Safety Authority.

4. “Consultant” means designated qualified professional engineer acting as representative of Owner for monitoring of work.

5. “Manual” means Operations and Maintenance manual.

6. “OESC” means latest edition of Ontario Electrical Safety Code

1.5. CARE, OPERATION, START-UP AND INSTRUCTION TO OWNERS

1. Provide certified personnel to instruct Owner of operation electrical equipment. Provide maintenance specialist personnel to instruct on maintenance and adjustment of electrical equipment and any changes or modification equipment must be under terms of guarantee.


3. Provide these services for such period, and for as many visits as necessary to put equipment in operation, and ensure that operating personnel are conversant with all aspects of its care and operation.



6. Arrange and pay for services of manufacturer's factory service engineer to supervise start-up of installation, check, adjust, balance and calibrate components and instruct operating personnel.

1.6. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

1. Site records:

1. One set to be kept on site and all changes to be recorded on daily basis. At the completion of the project, all changes shall be transferred to clean set, signed and passed to the Consultant.

2. Make these drawings available for reference purposes and to inspection at all times.

2. As-built drawings must be delivered before system acceptance.

1.7. VOLTAGE RATINGS

1. Operating voltages: to CAN3-C235-83 (R2006).

2. Motors, electric heating, control and distribution devices and equipment to operate




satisfactorily at 60 Hz within normal operating limits established by above standard. Equipment to operate in extreme operating conditions established in above standard without damage to equipment.

1.8. PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTION

1. Submit to Inspection Authority necessary number of drawings and specifications for examination and approval prior to commencement of work.

2. Consultant will provide drawings and specifications required by Inspection Authority at no cost.

3. Submit to the Building Department the necessary number of drawings and specifications for examination prior to commencement of work to obtain a building permit.

4. Submit Notice of Project to Ministry of Labour.

5. Pay associated fees and obtain all permits required for the performance of the work.

6. Notify Consultant of changes required by Inspection Authority or Building Department prior to making changes.

7. Furnish Certificates of Acceptance from Inspection Authority on completion of work to Consultant.

1.9. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

1. Provide materials and equipment in accordance with Division 1.

2. Equipment and material to be CSA certified. Where there is no alternative to supplying equipment which is not CSA certified, obtain special approval from Inspection Authority.

3. Factory assemble control panels and component assemblies.

1.10. ELECTRIC MOTORS, EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS

1. Verify installation and co-ordination responsibilities related to motors, equipment and controls with other trades and as indicated.

2. Mechanical contractor shall supply and install all motors, controls and control wiring. Mechanical contractor shall supply all disconnect switches, starters, motor rated switches and relays, for all motor driven equipment under mechanical contract. All disconnect switches, starters, motor rated switches and relays shall be handed over to electrical contractor for installation and wiring. Both mechanical and electrical contractors to coordinate to ensure proper protection and equipment is provided and included in contract.

3. Control wiring and conduit to be installed in accordance with Section 16111 and 16122, except for connections below 50 V which are related to control systems specified in mechanical sections and as shown on mechanical drawings.




4. Electrical equipment not supplied by mechanical contractor is listed on the drawings or elsewhere in the specifications. Electrical contractor to coordinate with mechanical contractor to ensure proper protection and equipment is provided for all equipment and is included in Contract.

1.11. FINISHES

1. Apply at least one coat of corrosion resistant primer paint to supports, and equipment fabricated from ferrous metals.

2. Restore to new condition, finishes which have been damaged too extensively to be merely primed and touched up.

3. Shop finish metal enclosure surfaces by application of rust resistant primer inside and outside, and at least two coats of finish enamel.

4. Clean and touch up surfaces of shop-painted equipment scratched or marred during shipment or installation, to match original paint.

5. Clean and prime exposed non-galvanized hangers, racks and fastenings to prevent rusting.

1.12. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

1. Identify electrical equipment with nameplates and labels as follows:

2. Nameplates:

1. Lamacoid 3 mm (1/8") thick plastic engraving sheet, white face, black core, mechanically attached with self tapping screws. For emergency power circuits, use a red face and black core.

NAMEPLATE SIZES Size 1 10 x 50 mm (3/8 x 2") 1 line 3 mm (1/8") high letters Size 2 12 x 70 mm (1/2 x 3") 1 line 5 mm (1/4") high letters Size 3 12 x 70 mm (1/2 x 3") 2 lines 3 mm (1/8") high letters Size 4 20 x 90 mm (3/4 x 4") 1 line 8 mm (3/8") high letters Size 5 20 x 90 mm (3/4 x 4") 2 lines 5 mm (1/4") high letters Size 6 25 x 100 mm (1" x 4") 1 line 12 mm (1/2") high letters Size 7 25 x 100 mm (1" x 4") 2 lines 6 mm (1/4") high letters

3. Labels:

1. Embossed plastic labels with 6 mm (1/4") high letters unless specified otherwise.

4. Wording on nameplates and labels to be approved by Consultant prior to manufacture.

5. Allow for average of twenty-five (25) letters per nameplate and label.

6. Identification to be English.




7. Nameplates for terminal cabinets and junction boxes to indicate system and/or voltage characteristics.

8. Disconnects, starters and contactors: indicate equipment being controlled and voltage.

9. Terminal cabinets and pull boxes: indicate system and voltage.

10. Coordinate names of equipment and systems with Division 15 to ensure that identical names are used.

1.13. WIRING IDENTIFICATION

1. Identify wiring with permanent indelible identifying markings, either numbered or coloured plastic tapes, on both ends of phase conductors of feeders and branch circuit wiring.

2. Maintain phase sequence and colour coding throughout.

3. Colour code: to CSA C22.1.

4. Use colour coded wires in communication cables, matched throughout system.

1.14. CONDUIT AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION

1. Colour code conduits, boxes and metallic sheathed cables.

2. Code with plastic tape or paint at points where conduit or cable enters wall, ceiling, or floor, and at 15 m intervals.

3. Colours: 25 mm (1") wide prime colour and 20 mm (3/4") wide auxiliary colour.

PRIME AUXILIARY up to 250 V yellow up to 600 V yellow green Other communication systems green blue Fire alarm red

1.15. WIRING TERMINATIONS

1. Lugs, terminals, screws used for termination of wiring to be suitable for either copper or aluminum conductors.

1.16. MANUFACTURERS AND CSA LABELS

1. Ensure that manufacturer’s registration plates are properly affixed to all apparatus showing the size, name of equipment, serial number, and all information usually provided, including voltage, cycle, phase and the name and address of the manufacturer.




2. Do not paint over registration plates or approved labels. Leave openings through insulation for viewing the plates. Contractors or sub-contractors nameplate not acceptable.

1.17. WARNING SIGNS

1. As specified and to meet requirements of Inspection Authority and Consultant.

1.18. LOCATION OF OUTLETS

1. Locate outlets as shown on drawings.

2. Do not install outlets back-to-back in wall; allow minimum 150 mm (6") horizontal clearance between boxes.

3. Change location of outlets at no extra cost or credit, providing distance does not exceed 3 m (10 ft) and information is given before installation.

4. Locate light switches on latch side of doors. Locate disconnect devices in mechanical rooms on latch side of door.

1.19. MOUNTING HEIGHTS

1. Mounting height of equipment is from finished floor to centreline of equipment unless specified or indicated otherwise.

2. If mounting height of equipment is not specified or indicated, verify before proceeding with installation.

3. Install electrical equipment at following heights unless indicated otherwise.

1. Local switches: 1200 mm (48")

2. Emergency lighting heads: 2300 mm (90")

3. Fire alarm horns / strobe: 2100 mm (84")

4. Wall receptacles:

1. General: 400 mm (16")

5. Barrier-free Door Operators:

1. Provide 100 mm x 100 mm junction;

2. With centre located not less than 1000 mm and not more than 1100 mm from the floor or ground; and

3. Be located not less than 600 mm beyond the door swing where the door opens towards the control.




1.20. LOAD BALANCE

1. Measure phase current to panelboards with normal loads (lighting) operating at time of acceptance. Adjust branch circuit connections as required to obtain best balance of current between phases and record changes.

2. Measure phase voltages at loads and adjust transformer taps to within 2% of rated voltage of equipment.

3. Submit, at completion of work, report listing phase and neutral currents on panelboards operating under normal load. State hour and date on which each load was measured, and voltage at time of test.

1.21. SLEEVES

1. Provide pipe sleeves at points where conduits (53 mm and larger) pass through masonry or concrete.

2. Provide sleeves of minimum 1.0 mm (20 GA) galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints.

3. Use cast iron or steel pipe sleeves with annular fin continuously welded at mid-point.

1. Through foundation walls.

2. Where sleeve penetrates fire rated wall or floor ceiling assembly.

4. Sizes:

1. Provide 5 mm (1/4") clearance all around, between sleeves and conduits.

5. Fill voids around pipes. Remove plastic sleeves.

1. Caulk between sleeve & conduit in foundation walls and below grade floors with oakum that lead between sleeve and pipe.

2. Where sleeves pass through walls or floors, caulk space between conduit and sleeve with waterproof fire retardant non-hardening mastic.

3. Coat exposed exterior surfaces of ferrous sleeves with heavy application of zinc rich paint.

6. Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, floors and partitions, maintain fire rating integrity assembly in compliance with OBC. Submit shop drawings and details on all products prior to commencing work.

7. Temporarily plug all openings during construction.

1.22. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

1. All electrical work to be carried out by qualified, licensed electricians or apprentices as per




the conditions of the Provincial Act respecting manpower vocational training and qualification. Employees registered in a provincial apprentices program shall be permitted, under the direct supervision of a qualified licensed electrician, to perform specific tasks – the activities permitted shall be determined based on the level of training attained and the demonstration or ability to perform specific duties.

2. Conduct and pay for following tests:

1. Power distribution system including phasing, voltage, grounding and load balancing.

2. Circuits originating from branch distribution panels.

3. Lighting and its control.

3. Furnish manufacturer’s certificate or letter confirming the entire installation as it pertains to each system has been installed to manufacturer’s instructions.

4. Insulation resistance testing.

1. Megger circuits, feeders and equipment up to 350 V with a 500 V instrument.

2. Check resistance to ground before energizing.

5. Provide instruments, meters, equipment and personnel required to conduct tests during and at conclusion of project.

6. Submit test results for Consultant's review.

1.23. DEMOLITION

1. Disconnect and make safe electrical equipment and services as required on site.

2. Be responsible for demolition and removal of electrical equipment and services designated on drawings for removal and as required by work unless specified otherwise under other divisions.

3. Electrical work being removed by other division shall be carried out under direction of this division. Do all disconnecting prior to authorizing removal.

1.24. FIREPROOFING

1. Where cables or conduits pass through floors and fire rated walls, pack space between wiring and sleeve full with firestopping system to CAN 4-S115.

1.25. CUTTING, PATCHING AND FINISHING

1. All cutting, patching and finishing for electrical work shall be by Division 2, coordinated by Division 16. Obtain approval before cutting any structural members. Upon removal of all conduit, wiring, light fixtures, equipment, etc., patch all holes and match existing finishes.




1.26. EXISTING SYSTEMS

1. Before submitting tender price verify on job site location of all accessible existing electrical systems affecting execution of this contract. Difficulties arising during construction will not be considered as grounds for additional payment.

2. Where work involves breaking into or connecting to existing systems, carry out work at times directed by governing authorities, with minimum of disturbance to pedestrian traffic.

3. Submit schedule to and obtain approval from Consultant for any shut down or closure of active service or facility. Adhere to approved schedule and provide notice to affected parties.

4. Where unknown services are encountered, immediately advise Consultant and confirm findings in writing.

1.27. OWNER OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE

1. The existing building may be occupied during normal occupancy hours.

2. Provide temporary protection for all finishes, appliances or equipment in the existing building.

3. Protect and maintain electrical room operations during the work.


Northern Secondary School 16111 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades AND CONDUIT FITTINGS Project Number: 6119 Page 1



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. LOCATION OF CONDUIT

1. Drawings do not indicate all conduit runs. Those indicated are in diagrammatic form only.

1.3. REFERENCES

1. Canadian Standards Association (CSA)

1. CSA C22.2 No. 18-98 (R2003), Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes, and Fittings and Associated Hardware.

2. CSA C22.2 No. 45.2-08, Rigid Metal Conduit.

3. CSA C22.2 No. 56-04 (R2009), Flexible Metal Conduit and Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit.

4. CSA C22.2 No. 83-M1985(R2013), Electrical Metallic Tubing.

1.4. WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

1. Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Division 1.

2. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers.

3. Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from children.

4. Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in accordance with Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. CONDUITS

1. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): with steel couplings, sized as indicated.

2. Rigid metal conduit: galvanized steel threaded conduit, sized as indicated.

3. Epoxy coated conduit: with zinc coating and corrosion resistant epoxy finish inside and outside.




4. Flexible metal conduit and liquid-tight flexible metal conduit, sized as indicated.

2.2. CONDUIT FASTENINGS

1. One hole steel straps to secure surface conduits 50 mm (2") and smaller. Two hole steel straps for conduits larger than 50 mm (2").

2. Beam clamps to secure conduits to exposed steel work.

3. Channel type supports for two or more conduits at 3 m (9') o/c.

4. 6 mm dia threaded rods to support suspended channels.

2.3. CONDUIT FITTINGS

1. Fittings: manufactured for use with conduit specified. Coating: same as conduit.

2. Fittings to be suitable sized for conduit used.

3. Fittings used for EMT to be steel, not cast.

4. Factory "ells" where 90° bends are required for 25 mm (1") and larger conduits.

2.4. EXPANSION FITTINGS FOR RIGID CONDUIT

1. Weatherproof expansion fittings with internal bonding assembly suitable for 100 or 200 mm linear expansion.

2. Watertight expansion fittings with integral bonding jumper suitable for linear expansion and 19 mm deflection in all directions.

3. Weatherproof expansion fittings for linear expansion at entry to panel.

2.5. FISH CORD

1. Polypropylene.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Install conduits to conserve headroom in exposed locations and cause minimum interference in spaces through which they pass.

2. Conceal conduits except in mechanical and electrical service rooms and in unfinished areas.

3. Use rigid galvanized steel threaded conduit in areas subject to mechanical injury such as




shops, loading docks etc.

4. Field threads on rigid conduit must be of sufficient length to draw conduits up tight.

5. Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT) above 2.4 m not subject to mechanical injury.

6. Use flexible metal conduit for final connection to devices in ceiling space max. length 3 m.

7. Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for final connection to a vibrating piece of equipment.

8. Bend conduit cold. Replace conduit if kinked or flattened more than 1/10th of its original diameter.

9. Mechanically bend steel conduit over 21 mm diameter.

10. All unterminated conduit ends to be reamed and protected by insulating bushings.

11. Install fish cord in empty conduits and all conduits 53 mm and greater.

12. Where conduits become blocked, remove and replace blocked section. Do not use liquids to clean out conduits.

13. Dry conduits out before installing wire.

3.2. SURFACE CONDUITS

1. Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

2. Locate conduits behind infrared or gas fired heaters with 1500 mm clearance.

3. Run conduits in flanged portion of structural steel.

4. Group conduits wherever possible on suspended channels.

5. Do not pass conduits through structural members except as indicated.

6. Do not locate conduits less than 75 mm (3") parallel to steam or hot water lines with minimum of 25 mm (1") at crossovers.

7. All exposed conduits in areas other than service spaces are to be painted to match existing finishes.

3.3. CONCEALED CONDUITS

1. Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

2. Do not install horizontal runs in masonry walls.


Northern Secondary School 16122 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, WIRES AND CABLES - 0 - 1000V Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6119



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. RELATED SECTIONS


2. Section 16151 – Wire and Box Connections – 0 – 1000V.

1.2. REFERENCES

1. CSA C22.2 No. 0.3-09, Test Methods for Electrical Wires and Cables.

2. CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 131-07 (R2012), Type TECK 90 cable.

1.3. PRODUCT DATA

1. Submit product data in accordance with Division 1.




3. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. GENERAL

1. All conductors to be copper, unless otherwise noted.

2.2. BUILDING WIRES

1. All conductors to be copper, unless otherwise noted.

2. Conductors: stranded for 10 AWG and larger. Minimum size: 12 AWG for power and # 16 AWG for controls and fire alarm.

3. Copper conductors: size as indicated, with 600 V insulation of chemically cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene material type RW75, or with thermoplastic insulation and nylon jacket, type T-75 nylon, rated at 600 V.




4. Wire and conduit sizes shown are based on RW75 XLPE and are minimum sizes. Contractor is responsible for wire and conduit sized for other approved wires.

5. Conductors shall be colour coded. Conductors size 10 AWG and smaller shall have colour impregnated into insulation at time of manufacture.

1. Colour code wiring for 120 / 208 Volt equipment as follows

1. Phase conductors: Red, Black, Blue

2. Neutral conductors: White

3. Bonding to ground: Green

4. Isolated bonding conductor: Green with Yellow stripe

2.3. ARMOURED CABLES

1. Conductors insulated copper sizes as indicated, minimum wire size #12 AWG.

2. Type: AC90.

3. Armour: interlocking type fabricated from aluminum strip.

4. Connectors: to suit.

5. Fastenings:

1. One hole steel straps to secure surface cables 25 mm and smaller. Two hole steel straps for cables larger than 25 mm.

2. Channel type supports for two or more cables at 1500 mm centres.

3. Threaded rods: 6 mm dia. To support suspended channels.

6. Approved compression type lugs accurately sized to allow bolted connections at each cable end.

7. All wiring shall be concealed in floor slabs, walls, ceiling and furred spaces. AC90 armoured cable may be used or AC90 armoured cable may be used only for drops to fixtures, maximum length 3 m in concealed ceiling spaces, or drops to receptacles in GWB partitions, maximum length 4.5 m. Otherwise cables shall be in EMT conduit.

2.4. CONTROL CABLES

1. Type LVT: 2 soft annealed copper conductors sized as indicated with thermoplastic insulation and outer covering thermoplastic jacket.

2. Plenum rated cable (FT-6) required in ceiling space where not in conduit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION




3.1. INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRES

1. Install wiring in conduit in accordance with Section 16111, unless otherwise noted.

2. Use type RW75 or T-75 for branch circuit wiring unless otherwise indicated.

3. Minimum wire size shall be No. 12 AWG. For 15A, 120V branch circuit home runs which exceed 23 m length shall be minimum No. 10 AWG, and minimum No. 8 AWG for runs which exceed 36 m. For 20A, 120V branch circuit home runs which exceed 17 m in length shall be minimum No. 10 AWG, and minimum No. 8 AWG for runs which exceed 27 m. Where existing wiring is re-used, minimum wire sizes shall apply and wiring shall be replaced when it does not meet the minimum size.

4. Existing wiring may only be re-used if permitted by Engineer.

3.2. INSTALLATION OF ARMOURED CABLES

1. Use only for drops to fixtures maximum length 3 m in concealed ceiling spaces, or drops to receptacles in GWB partitions maximum length 4.5 m.

2. Terminate cables in accordance with Section 16151.

3.3. INSTALLATION OF CONTROL CABLES

1. Install control cables in conduit in accordance with Section 16111.

2. Ground control cable shield.


Northern Secondary School 16131 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, SPLITTERS, JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6119



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL



1. Submit shop drawings and product data for cabinets in accordance with Division 1.



4. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. SPLITTERS

1. Sheet metal enclosure, welded corners and formed hinged cover suitable for locking in closed position.

2. Main and branch lugs to match required size and number of incoming and outgoing conductors as indicated.

3. At least three spare terminals on each set of lugs in splitters less than 400 A.

2.2. JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

1. Welded steel construction with screw-on flat covers for surface mounting.

2. Covers with 25 mm (1") minimum extension all around, for flush-mounted pull and junction boxes.

2.3. CABINETS

1. Type E: sheet steel, hinged door and return flange overlapping sides, handle, lock and catch, for surface mounting.

2. Type T: sheet steel cabinet, with hinged door, latch, lock, 2 keys, containing 19 mm painted plywood backboard for surface/flush mounting as indicated.

Northern Secondary School 16131 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, SPLITTERS, JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Page 2 Project Number: 6119



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. SPLITTER INSTALLATION

1. Install splitters and mount plumb, true and square to the building lines.

2. Extend splitters full length of equipment arrangement except where indicated otherwise.

3.2. JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS INSTALLATION

1. Install pull boxes in inconspicuous but accessible location.

2. Mount cabinets with top not higher than 2 m (6'-0") above finished floor.

3. Install terminal block as indicated in type T cabinets, and for all fire alarm connections where multi-conductor cables are used.

4. Only main junction and pull boxes are indicated. Install pull boxes so as not to exceed 30 m (100'-0") of conduit run between pull boxes.

3.3. IDENTIFICATION

1. Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 16010 Electrical General Provisions.

2. Install size 2 identification labels indicating system name, voltage and phase.


Northern Secondary School 16132 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6119



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. REFERENCES

1. CSA C22.1-12 Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1.


1. Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Division 1, and with the Waste Reduction Workplan.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. OUTLET AND CONDUIT BOXES - GENERAL

1. Size boxes in accordance with CSA C22.1.

2. 102 mm (4") square or larger outlet boxes as required for special devices.

3. Gang boxes where wiring devices are grouped.

4. Blank cover plates for boxes without wiring devices.

5. Combination boxes with barriers where outlets for more than one system are grouped.

2.2. SHEET STEEL OUTLET BOXES

1. Electro-galvanized steel single and multi gang flush device boxes for flush installation, minimum size 76 x 50 x 38 mm or as indicated. 102 mm (4") square outlet boxes when more than one conduit enters one side with extension and plaster rings as required.

2. Electro-galvanized steel utility boxes for outlets connected to surface-mounted EMT conduit, minimum size 102 x 54 x 48 mm

3. 102 mm (4") square or octagonal outlet boxes for lighting fixture outlets.

4. 102 mm (4") square outlet boxes with extension and plaster rings for flush mounting devices in finished tile walls.

Northern Secondary School 16132 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Page 2 Project Number: 6119



2.3. CONDUIT BOXES

1. Cast FS or FD feraloy boxes with factory-threaded hubs and mounting feet for surface wiring of switches and receptacle.

2. Electro-galvanized utility tape for indoor surface wiring.

2.4. FITTINGS - GENERAL

1. Bushing and connectors with nylon insulated throats.

2. Knock-out fillers to prevent entry of debris.

3. Conduit outlet bodies for conduit up to 35 mm and pull boxes for larger conduits.

4. Double locknuts and insulated bushings on sheet metal boxes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Support boxes independently of connecting conduits.

2. Fill boxes with paper, sponges or foam or similar approved material to prevent entry of debris during construction. Remove upon completion of work.

3. For flush installations mount outlets flush with finished wall using plaster rings to permit wall finish to come within 6 mm of opening.

4. Provide correct size of openings in boxes for conduit, mineral insulated and armoured cable connections. Reducing washers are not allowed.

5. Provide a suitable outlet box for each light, switch, receptacle or other outlet, approved for the particular area in which it is to be installed.

6. Locate outlet boxes, mounted in hung ceiling space, so they do not obstruct or interfere with the removal of lay-in ceiling tiles.

7. Offset outlet boxes, shown back to back in partitions, horizontally to minimize noise transmission between adjacent rooms.

8. Use tile wall covers where 4" square outlet boxes are installed in exposed concrete or cinder block in finished areas.

9. Seal electrical switch and outlet boxes that penetrate vapour barrier with moulded box vapour barrier wrap boxes with film sheet providing minimum 300 mm perimeter lap flange.


Northern Secondary School 16141 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, WIRING DEVICES Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6119



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL



1. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Division 1.

2. Occupancy Sensor shop drawings to be complete with a floor plan layout drawing from the manufacturer indicated proper layout requirements, as well as all wiring details and diagrams to provide lighting control as indicated on drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. RECEPTACLES

1. Duplex receptacles, CSA type 5-15 R, 125 V, 15 A, U ground, with following features:

1. White urea moulded housing.

2. Suitable for No. 10 AWG for back and side wiring.

3. Break-off links for use as split receptacles.

4. Eight back wired entrances, four side wiring screws.

5. Triple wipe contacts and riveted grounding contacts.

2.2. OCCUPANCY SENSORS

1. Wall Mount, Line Voltage

Type 10

Wall mounted, line-voltage occupancy sensor to be passive infrared detection, c/w separate ON/OFF button. Detects small motion (hand movements) up to 20' radial coverage and large motion (walking) up to 36' radial coverage. Equal to the Sensorswitch WSX, c/w accessories to control loads as indicated on drawings.

2. Ceiling Mount, Line Voltage




Type 31

Ceiling mounted, line voltage, standard range occupancy sensor to be dual technology with PIR and Microphonics Detection. Detects small motion (hand movements) up to 12' radial coverage on a standard 9' ceiling height. Equal to the Sensorswitch CMR PDT 9, c/w accessories to control loads as indicated on drawings.

2.3. COVER PLATES

1. Cover plates for wiring devices, complete with clear adhesive label with black lettering indicating source panel and circuit number.

2. Cover plates from one manufacturer throughout project.

3. Stainless steel, vertically brushed, 1 mm (1/16") thick cover plates for all wiring devices mounted in flush-mounted outlet box (including voice / data outlets).

4. Sheet metal cover plates for wiring devices mounted in surface-mounted FS or FD type conduit boxes, or utility boxes.

5. Weatherproof gasketted, lockable rain-tight while-in-use clear cover, suitable for GFCI outlet, equal to Leviton 5977-CL series.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Receptacles:

1. Install receptacles in gang type outlet box when more than one receptacle is required in one location.

2. Mount receptacles at height specified in Section 16010 - Electrical General Requirements or as indicated.

2. Cover plates:

1. Protect stainless steel cover plate finish with paper or plastic film until painting and other work is finished.

2. Install suitable common cover plates where wiring devices are grouped.

3. Do not use cover plates meant for flush outlet boxes on surface-mounted boxes.

3. Occupancy Sensors:

1. Install sensors and ancillary devices at location(s) shown on drawings, following sensor manufacturer’s recommended installation methods.




2. Perform necessary field adjustments and settings of sensors as required for proper operation.

3. Time delay for all sensors to be set at 10 minutes.

4. Passive infrared setting to be set at minimum.

4. Occupancy Sensor Commissioning:

1. Manufacturer’s representative to provide on-site commissioning and set-up of system and provide letter confirming:

1. Installation is as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Settings and time delay are as per specification.

3. Confirm devices are operating properly after installation, and provide minor field modifications as required.

4. Identify which devices were adjusted in the field.

5. Grounding:

1. Ground all wiring devices and respective outlet boxes in accordance with applicable sections of Ontario Electrical Safety Code. Ensure proper ground connections of isolated ground receptacle.


NOTE: CONFIRM ALL SENSORS HAVE BEEN PROGRAMMED OR SET AS INDICATED BELOW

Building Name

LOCATION(S) ON LIGHT LEVEL ON OFF‐DELAY

LIGHT LEVEL

OFF NOTES

ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR

REPRESENTATIVE SIGNITURE

ALL WASHROOMS AUTO 100% ON AUTO. ‐ 10 MIN. 10%

Electrical Contractor Lighting Control Sign Off Sheet

Northern Secondary School

6119Job#

ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS SIGNITURE: _____________________________________________________________________________________________________

Northern Secondary School 16151 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, WIRE AND BOX CONNECTIONS - 0 TO 1000V Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6119



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. REFERENCES

1. CSA C22.2 No. 65-13 Wire Connectors.

2. EEMAC 1Y-2, 1961 Bushing Stud Connectors and Aluminum Adapters (1200 Ampere Maximum Rating).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. MATERIALS

1. Pressure type wire connectors: with current carrying parts of copper sized to fit copper conductors as required.

2. Fixture type splicing connectors: with current carrying parts of copper sized to fit copper conductors 10 AWG or less.

3. Bushing stud connectors: to EEMAC 1Y-2 to consist of:

1. Connector body and stud clamp for stranded copper conductors.

2. Clamp for stranded copper conductors

3. Stud clamp bolts.

4. Bolts for copper conductors

5. Sized for conductors as indicated.

4. Clamps or connectors for armoured cable, flexible conduit, as required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Remove insulation carefully from ends of conductors and:

1. Apply coat of zinc joint compound on aluminum conductors prior to installation of

Northern Secondary School 16151 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, WIRE AND BOX CONNECTIONS - 0 TO 1000V Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Page 2 Project Number: 6119



connectors.

2. Install mechanical pressure type connectors and tighten screws with appropriate compression tool recommended by manufacturer. Installation shall meet secureness tests in accordance with CSA C22.2 No.65.

3. Install fixture type connectors and tighten. Replace insulating cap.

4. Install bushing stud connectors in accordance with EEMAC 1Y-2.


Northern Secondary School 16191 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, FASTENINGS AND SUPPORTS Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6119



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. RELATED WORK


2. Fastenings and supports: Section 01600 Material and Equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. SUPPORT CHANNELS

1. U shape, size 41 x 41 x 2.5 mm thick, surface mounted or suspended.

2. Smaller sections subject to Consultant’s approval.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Secure equipment to tile and plaster surfaces with nylon anchors, with independent grip protrusions.

2. Secure equipment to poured concrete with expandable inserts.

3. Secure equipment to hollow masonry walls or suspended ceilings with toggle bolts.

4. Secure surface mounted equipment with twist clip fasteners to inverted T bar ceilings. Ensure that T bars are adequately supported to carry weight of equipment specified before installation.

5. Support equipment, conduit or cables using clips, spring loaded bolts, cable clamps designed as accessories to basic channel members.

6. Fasten exposed conduit or cables to building construction or support system using straps.

1. One-hole steel straps to secure surface conduits and cables 50 mm and smaller.

2. Two-hole steel straps for conduits and cables larger than 50 mm.

3. Beam clamps to secure conduit to exposed steel work.

7. Suspended support systems.

Northern Secondary School 16191 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, FASTENINGS AND SUPPORTS Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Page 2 Project Number: 6119



1. Support individual cable or conduit runs with 6 mm dia threaded rods and spring clips.

2. Support 2 or more cables or conduits on channels supported by 6 mm dia threaded rod hangers where direct fastening to building construction is impractical.

8. For surface mounting of two or more conduits use channels at 3 m oc spacing.

9. Provide metal brackets, frames, hangers, clamps and related types of support structures where indicated or as required to support conduit and cable runs.

10. Ensure adequate support for raceways and cables dropped vertically to equipment where there is no wall support.

11. Do not use wire lashing or perforated strap to support or secure raceways or cables.

12. Do not use supports or equipment installed for other trades for conduit or cable support except with permission of other trade and approval of Consultant.

13. Install fastenings and supports as required for each type of equipment cables and conduits, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation recommendations.

14. Provide minimum 2400 mm support channel on each suspended fixture in open areas, with rigid stem supports from structure to channel, and fixture secured to channel.

15. All fastenings and supports to be hot dipped galvanized. All cut ends exposing base material to be completely sealed with field applied coating to give equivalent protection prior to installation. Following complete installation, all damage to protective layer to be carefully and completely touched up with same field applied coating.


Northern Secondary School 16440 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, DISCONNECT SWITCHES - FUSED AND NON-FUSED Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades UP TO 1000V Project Number: 6119 Page 1



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. PRODUCT DATA

1. Submit product data in accordance with Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. DISCONNECT SWITCHES

1. Enclosed manual air break switches in non-hazardous locations to CSA C22.2 No. 4-04 (2009).

2. Fuse holder assemblies to CSA C22.2 No. 39-13.

3. Fusible and non-fusible disconnect switch in CSA Enclosure size as indicated.

4. Provision for padlocking in on-off switch position by three locks.

5. Mechanically interlocked door to prevent opening when handle in ON position.

6. Fuses: size as indicated, to Section 16478 - Fuses - Low Voltage.

7. Fuse holders: suitable without adaptors, for type and size of fuse indicated.

8. Quick-make, quick-break action.

9. ON-OFF switch position indication on switch enclosure cover.

10. Main disconnect switch to be service entrance rated.

2.2. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

1. Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 16010 - Electrical General Requirements.

2. Indicate name of load controlled on size 4 nameplate.

2.3. ACCEPTABLE MATERIALS

Northern Secondary School 16440 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, DISCONNECT SWITCHES - FUSED AND NON-FUSED Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades UP TO 1000V Project Number: 6119 Page 2



1. Siemens

2. Square D

3. Cutler-Hammer

4. Federal Pioneer

5. Alternate materials as approved by addendum in accordance with General Instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Install disconnect switches complete with fuses, if applicable.

2. For all disconnects where fuse and wire sizes have a lower rating then the disconnect, a lamacoid label is to be applied indicating “MAX FUSE SIZE TO BE ____ AMPS”. To be filled in with the value of the specific fuse size.


Northern Secondary School 16450 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, GROUNDING - SECONDARY Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6119



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. REFERENCES

1. IEEE 837-2002, Qualifying Permanent Connections Used in Substation Grounding.

2. CSA Z32.1-M1986, Safety in Anaesthetizing Locations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. EQUIPMENT

1. Grounding conductors: bare stranded copper, soft annealed, size as indicated.

2. Insulated grounding conductors: green, type TWH.

3. Non-corroding accessories necessary for grounding system, type, size, material as indicated, including but not necessarily limited to:

1. Grounding and bonding bushings.

2. Protective type clamps.

3. Bolted type conductor connectors.

4. Thermit welded type conductor connectors.

5. Bonding jumpers, straps.

6. Pressure wire connectors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION GENERAL

1. Install complete permanent, continuous grounding system including, conductors, connectors, accessories, as indicated, to conform to requirements of Consultant, and Inspection Authority. Where EMT is used, run ground wire in conduit.

2. Install connectors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Northern Secondary School 16450 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, GROUNDING - SECONDARY Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Page 2 Project Number: 6119



3. Protect exposed grounding conductors from mechanical injury.

4. Use mechanical connectors for grounding connections to equipment provided with lugs.

5. Soldered joints not permitted.

6. Install bonding wire for flexible conduit, connected at both ends to grounding bushing, solderless lug, clamp or cup washer and screw. Neatly cleat bonding wire to exterior of flexible conduit.

7. Make grounding connections in radial configuration only, with connections terminating at single grounding point. Avoid loop connections.

3.2. SYSTEM AND CIRCUIT GROUNDING

1. Install system and circuit grounding connections to neutral of secondary 208 V system.

3.3. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

1. Install grounding connections to typical equipment included in, but not necessarily limited to following list. Service equipment, switchgear, duct systems, starters, control panels, and distribution panels.


1. Perform tests in accordance with Section 16010 - Electrical General Requirements.

2. Perform ground continuity and resistance tests using method appropriate to site conditions and to approval of Consultant and Inspection Authority.

3. Perform tests before energizing electrical system.


Northern Secondary School 16505 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, LIGHTING EQUIPMENT Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6119



PART 1 - GENERAL


1. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

2. Submit complete data prepared by independent testing laboratory for all luminaires, for review by Consultant.

3. Photometric data to include: total input watts, candle power summary, candela distribution zonal lumen summary, luminaire efficiency, CIE type, coefficient of utilization, lamp type and lumen rating in accordance with IESNA testing procedure.

4. Indicate fixture manufacturer and model number.


1. Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Division 1, and with the Waste Reduction Work Plan.



4. Be responsible for the storage of all obsolete fluorescent lamps and ballasts in approved containers.

5. Include for the co-ordination and disposal with the lamp and ballast disposal company for removal of spent lamps and ballasts.

6. Identify unit costs for the destruction of PCB ballasts to be included as a separate price in tender.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. MATERIALS

1. LED lighting fixtures; to DLC Standard and Premium.

2.2. LUMINAIRE DETAILS

1. Provide luminaires as indicated.

2. Provide supporting devices, plaster frames, junction boxes and outlet boxes where required.




3. Stamped steel luminaire bodies not to be less than 1.0 mm thick cold rolled steel. Reflective steel plates of minimum 0.8 mm thick metal.

4. Provide lenses or diffusers of glass or acrylic material as indicated.

5. Provide gasketting, stops and barriers to form light traps to prevent light leaks.

2.3. LED Lights

1. All LED lighting fixtures to be energy star or DLC rated.

2.4. CONTROLS

1. Ensure all lighting controls are fully compatible with the specific light fixtures and lamps being controlled.

2.5. FINISHES

1. Baked enamel finish:

1. Conditioning of metal before painting:

1. For corrosion resistance conversion coating to ASTM F 1137.

2. For paint base, conversion coating to ASTM F 1137.

2. Metal surfaces of luminaire housing and reflectors finished with high gloss baked enamel to give smooth, uniform appearance, free from pinholes or defects.

3. Reflector and other inside surfaces finished as follows:

1. White, minimum reflection factor 85%.

2. Colour fastness: yellowness factor not above 0.02 and after 250h exposure in Atlas fade-ometer not to exceed 0.05.

3. Film thickness, not less than 0.03 mm average and in no areas less than 0.025 mm.

4. Gloss not less than 80units as measured with Gardner 60° gloss meter.

5. Flexibility: withstand bending over [12] mm mandrel without showing signs of cracking or flaking under 10 times magnification.

6. Adhesion: 24mm square lattice made of 3mm squares cut through film to metal with sharp razor blade. Adhesive cellulose tape applied over lattice and pulled. Adhesion satisfactory if no coating removed.




2. Alzak finish:

1. Aluminium sheet fabricated from special aluminum alloys and chemically brightened, subsequently anodically treated to specifications established by Alcoa, to produce:

1. Finish for mild commercial service, minimum density of coating 7.8 g/m ², minimum reflectivity 83% for specular, 80.5% for semi-specular and 75% for diffuse.

2. Finish for regular industrial service, minimum density of coating 14.8 g/m ², minimum reflectivity 82% for specular and 73% for diffuse.

3. Finish for heavy duty service, minimum density of coating 21.8 g/m ², minimum reflectivity 85% for specular, 65% for diffuse.

2.6. LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE

'A' Recessed LED troffer, nominally 305 x 1220 mm (1’ x 4’) for use in grid inverted T-bar ceiling and complete with 35.2 Watt drive with 3000 lumen LED output, 4000k Colour Temp, 120V, c/w all required components. CSA Certified.

Acceptable products: Lithonia GTL4 Series Eaton 14GR Series Philips Day-Brite 1TG Series

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Locate and install luminaires as indicated.

2. For all luminaires with reflective surfaces, contractor is to use clean gloves during installation and clean off all fingerprints, dirt and dust at completion of project.

3. Where new luminaires are specified, the Contractor shall include for all required assembly and mounting. Provide all wiring, connections, inter-fixture wiring harnesses, fittings, hangers, safety chains, aligners, box covers and accessories which may be required to ensure a complete, safe and fully operational system.

4. Thoroughly review all ceiling types, construction details and mounting arrangements prior to placing orders for new luminaires.

5. Where existing luminaires are to be retrofitted, the work shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Removing existing lamp(s) and ballast(s) and disposal. Disposal to be done to the satisfaction of all local and environmental codes, in accordance with MOE guidelines and in approved disposal facility. Provide report upon completion of project.




3.2. WIRING

1. Connect luminaires to lighting circuits as indicated.

3.3. LUMINAIRE ALIGNMENT

1. Align luminaires mounted individually parallel or perpendicular to building grid lines.


Northern Secondary School 16536 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, UNIT EQUIPMENT FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6119



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. PRODUCT DATA

1. Submit product data in accordance with Division 1, including:

1. Electrical data of components, including input and output voltages, operating time, phase, AC and DC ampere ratings.

2. Mounting methods, dimensional outline and accessories.

3. Lamp heads type, watt/ampere, lumen output, horizontal and vertical adjustments.

4. Data for battery, charger and auxiliary instruments and devices.

1.3. DELIVERY

1. Deliver batteries in dry state, unless hermetically sealed.

2. Provide electrolyte in hazard-proof container.

1.4. WARRANTY

1. For batteries, the 12 months warranty period prescribed in subsection GC 32.1 of General Conditions “C” is extended to 120 months, with a no-charge replacement during the first 5 years and a pro-rate charge on the second 5 years.

2. Provide written copy of terms of battery guarantee in maintenance manual, and note date of acceptance for start of guarantee period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. EQUIPMENT

1. Unit equipment for emergency lighting: to CSA C22.2 No. 141.

2. Supply voltage: Universal Voltage 120 V AC.

3. Output voltage: 12 V DC.




4. Battery: sealed, maintenance free, sized to 30 min. operation plus 20% spare capacity. Battery capacity to be 180 W, unless otherwise noted.

5. Charger: solid state, multi-rate, voltage/current regulated, inverse temperature compensated, short circuit protected with regulated output of plus or minus 0.01V for plus or minus 10% input variation.

6. Solid state transfer circuit.

7. Low voltage disconnect: solid state, modular, operates at 80% battery output voltage.

8. Signal lights: solid state, life expectancy 100,000 h minimum, for ‘AC Power ON’ and ‘High Charge’.

9. Lamp heads:

1. Type 2 – 5W LED

1. Fully adjustable LED remote emergency light fixture 360° horizontal and 180° vertical adjustment inside cube impact- resistant polycarbonate cube housing. Lamp type: 5W LED. Products: Lumacell RSQB - LED9, RSQB-2 - LED9 or equal.

10. Cabinet: suitable for direct or shelf mounting to wall and c/w knockouts for conduit. Removable or hinged front panel for easy access to batteries.

11. Finish: white baked enamel.

12. Voltage Sensing Relays: each battery pack shall be provided with a minimum of three (3) internal zone sensing relays. These relays shall be pre-wired by the factory within the battery pack. Each zone shall have its own ‘push to test’ push button mounted on the side of the battery pack. Each zone push button shall be clearly identified to the corresponding branch lighting circuit being monitored. Provide a minimum of two spare zone circuits for future use.

13. Auxiliary equipment:

1. Lamp disconnect switch.

2. Momentary test switch.

3. Time delay relay.

4. Battery disconnect device.

5. Shelf.

6. Cord and plug connection for ac.

7. Self-diagnostics (auto-test).

14. Acceptable Products:




1. Type 2 - Lumacell RG-QB series with 72 Watt battery capacity, or approved equivalent.

2.2. WIRING OF REMOTE HEADS

1. Conduit: type EMT, to Section 16111.

2. Conductors: RW90 type to Section 16122, sized to limit voltage drop to 5%.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Install unit equipment for emergency lighting in accordance with CSA C22.1-12.

2. Install unit equipment and remote mounted fixtures as indicated.

3. Unit equipment shall be mounted with the bottom of the enclosure not less than 2 meters above the floor.

4. Receptacles to which unit equipment is to be connected shall be not less than 2.5 meters above the floor.

5. Connect exit lights to unit equipment as indicated.

6. Clean all heads and direct as indicated by Consultant at type of acceptance.

7. Test each unit and verify operation of all remote heads.

8. Unit equipment shall be installed in such a manner that it will be automatically actuated upon failure of the power supply to the normal lighting in the area covered by that unit equipment.

9. For all battery units that are equipped with self-diagnostics (auto-test), ensure that the system is connected as per manufacturer’s instructions. Note that some battery packs with self-diagnostics have two circuits and the circuits should be balanced as close as possible for the system to work properly. Also, the DC side of the system must be connected first before the AC is initiated to prevent damage to the circuit board electronics.

10. Provide complete instruction for the operation and maintenance of the unit equipment for emergency lighting as per the OBC and the manufacturer’s recommendations. Instructions to include testing unit equipment at least once a month to ensure proper operation. Installation instructions to be posted on the premises in a frame under glass.


Northern Secondary School 16721 Window & Door/Hardware Replacement, FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Exterior Cladding & Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6119



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. RELATED SECTIONS


2. Section 16010 – Electrical General Requirements.

3. Section 16111 – Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings

4. Section 16122 – Wires and Cables 0 – 1000 V

1.2. REFERENCE

1. CAN/ULC-S524-06-AM1, Installation of Fire Alarm Systems

2. CAN/ULC-S525-07, Audible Signal Appliances, Fire Alarm

3. CAN/ULC-S526-95, Visual Signal Appliances, Fire Alarm

4. CAN/ULC-S527-11, Control Units, Fire Alarm

5. CAN/ULC-S528-05, Manually Actuated Signalling Boxes, Fire Alarm

6. CAN/ULC-S529-09 Smoke Detectors, Fire Alarm

7. ULC-S530-1999 Heat Actuated Fire Detectors, Fire Alarm

8. CAN/ULC-S536-2004 Inspection and Testing of Fire Alarm Systems

9. CAN/ULC-S537-2004 Verification of Fire Alarm Systems

10. OBC 2012 Ontario Building Code.

1.3. DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM

1. Existing fire alarm system shall remain and be modified as shown on drawings.

2. All existing devices, zoning and sequence of operation shall remain, unless otherwise noted on drawings.

3. New devices to be added as shown.

1.4. REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

1. System:




1. To Ontario Fire Marshal approval.

1.5. SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Division 1.

2. Include:

1. Data sheets on all new equipment used.

1.6. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

1. Provide Copy of verification report for incorporation into the owner’s manual specified by Division 1.

1.7. MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

1. Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Division 1.


1. Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Division 1 and with the Waste Reduction Workplan.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. MATERIALS

1. Equipment and devices: ULC listed and labelled and supplied by single manufacturer.

2. Manual fire alarm stations: to ULC-S528.

3. Smoke detectors: to CAN/ULC-S529.

4. Thermal detectors: to ULC-S530.

5. The system and components must be compatible and be of same manufacturer as existing fire alarm system.

2.2. SYSTEM OPERATION

1. Existing system operation shall remain as existing, unless otherwise noted.




2.3. CONTROL PANEL

1. Existing Simplex control panel to remain.

2.4. POWER SUPPLY

1. Existing power supply to remain.

2.5. AUTOMATIC ALARM INITIATING DEVICES

1. New heat detectors shall match existing and be compatible and of same manufacturer as existing fire alarm system.

2. New smoke detectors shall match existing and be compatible and of same manufacturer as existing fire alarm system.

2.6. AUDIBLE SIGNAL DEVICES

1. Existing audible signal devices to remain or be relocated, as noted.

2. New audible signal devices shall match existing and be compatible and of same manufacturer as existing fire alarm system.

2.7. END-OF-LINE DEVICES

1. Existing end-of-line devices to remain.

2.8. AS-BUILT RISER DIAGRAM

1. Existing Fire alarm system riser diagram to be revised to suit new layout.

2.9. REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANELS

1. Existing remote annunciator to remain, upgrade FAS passive graphic plan to accommodate revisions.

2.10. ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS

1. Manufacturer of new products to match existing Simplex Fire Alarm System.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION




1. Install systems in accordance with CAN/ULC-S524 and according to manufacturer’s requirements, the qualified contractor shall have minimum 5 years experience related to fire alarm installation systems.

2. Provide new devices as shown and connect to existing zones.

3. Relocate devices as shown, extend wiring as required.

4. Locate and install manual alarm stations and connect to existing alarm circuit wiring.

5. Locate and install detectors and connect to existing alarm circuit wiring. Do not mount detectors within 600 mm of air outlets. Maintain at least 600 mm radius clear space on ceiling, below and around detectors. Locate duct type detectors in straight portions of ducts, in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.

6. Splices are not permitted.

7. Provide necessary raceways, cable and wiring to make interconnections to terminal boxes, annunciator equipment and main control panel, as required by equipment manufacturer.

8. Ensure that wiring is free of opens, shorts or grounds, before system testing and handing over.

9. Locate and install door releasing devices and connect main control panel.


1. Perform tests in accordance with Section 16010 - Electrical General Requirements and CAN/ULC-S537.

2. Fire alarm system verification:

1. Fire Alarm verification is to be done in conformance to the construction documents. Fire alarm installation technician is to obtain a set of electrical drawings and specifications for reference.

2. Full fire alarm verification to be done for area of renovation and to include all devices of any affected zones, unless otherwise noted. Final verification to be encompass all that is required to ensure that the new renovation has not disrupted the original function of the fire alarm system and that all new devices are working properly.

3. Test each device and alarm circuit to ensure manual stations, thermal and smoke detectors, and sprinkler system, transmit alarm to control panel and actuate general alarm and ancillary devices.

4. Simulate grounds and breaks on alarm and signalling circuits to ensure proper operation of trouble signals.

5. Each restorable heat detector shall be tested by using a heat source reproducible in its intensity, as recommended by the manufacturer of the device, to initiate an alarm.

6. Each smoke detector shall be tested for operation by introducing smoke or simulated




smoke to the detecting chamber.

7. Decibel readings test shall be taken and recorded, throughout the area of coverage. All areas to be identified by either:

1. Too low (less than 65 dB or 10 dB above ambient).

2. Too high (greater than 100 dB at a distance of 3 metres from the device).

3. Passed (between 65 dB or 10 dB above ambient and 100 dB).

4. A marked-up drawing is to be provided to the Consultant showing the decibel reading test results for all areas in the contract.

5. Where levels are too high, adjust the horn setting to low and re-test. Update setting changes on dB report.

6. Where levels are too low, adjust the horn setting to high and re-test. Update setting changes on dB report.

3. Class A circuits:

1. Test each conductor on all circuits for capability of providing alarm signal on each side of single open-circuit fault condition imposed near midmost point of circuit. Reset control unit after each alarm function and correct imposed fault after completion of each test.

2. Test each conductor on all circuits for capability of providing alarm signal during ground-fault condition imposed near midmost point of circuit. Reset control unit after each alarm function and correct imposed fault after completion of each test.

4. Check annunciator panel to ensure zones as shown correctly, including zones outside of the area of renovation.

5. Perform tests to all devices related to the sprinkler system in conjunction with the sprinkler contractor.

6. A complete verification report is to be submitted to the Consultant for review, including all of CAN/ULC-S537 Appendix C and the decibel reading test results.

3.3. WIRING METHODS

1. All joints in the fire alarm system shall be done on numbered terminal strips in adequately sized type D boxes.

2. Mark all wires to correspond to terminal number and provide directory on cover to identify wires to designation code.

3. Paint all conduit boxes in Fire Alarm system with red paint.

3.4. GUARANTEE




1. Warranty all equipment against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one full year (12 months) from date of final verification test or final inspection. Should any partial occupancy be permitted the warranty shall commence on the date of that partial occupancy and shall encompass all material supplied to that project.
